Home
        UF-8300 / 8200 UF-7300 / 7200
         Contents
1.                                                                                                                                    a   m Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function  CN712 11   5VP LVPS 45V  5 VDC Power Supply  CN103 11  CN712 12  GND LVPS Ground  CN103 12  OV  CN712 13  nMPOW1 LVPS T Power Supply Control  CN103 13 Power      Signal  Saving                  QV  CN712 14  nFCTL LVPS d Fuser ON OFF Control  CN103 14 Heater   gt   ON  OV  CN712 15  N C  No Connection  CN714  ps M Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function  CN714 1 nA ADF Motor 1 24V ADF Motor Control  S Signal  OV  CN714 2 A ADF Motor 3 24V ADF Motor Control  z Signal  OV  CN714 3 nB ADF Motor 4 DAN ADF Motor Control  k Signal  OV  CN714 4 B ADF Motor 6 DAN ADF Motor Control  v Signal  OV  CN722  ys NS Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function  CN722 1 nADUST LSU PCB 5V LSU APC Timing  Laser Diode 1    OV  CN722 2 nVIDEO LSU PCB 5V Video Signal  Laser Diode 2    OV                                  85          UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200                                                                                                          gs   e Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function  CN722 3 nLDON LSU PCB 5V LD Light Enable  Laser Diode 3 KR  OV  CN722 4 5VGND LSU PCB Ground  Laser Diode 4  OV  CN722 5 L 5V LSU PCB 45V  5 VDC through Process  Laser Diode 5 Interlock SW  CN722 6 5VGND LSU PCB Ground  Laser Diode 6  OV  CN722 7 nHSYNC LSU PCB 5V Horizontal  Laser Diode 
2.                                                                                                                des o Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function  CN235 17  nSLPKY PNL2 PCB 3 3V Energy Saver Key Signal  CN252 17 Key ES  Pressed ov  CN235 18  nSNDKY PNL2 PCB   PNL Key Signal  CN252 18 Key Raj  Pressed ov  CN235 19   GND PNL2 PCB Ground  CN252 19  OV  CN235 20  FG PNL2 PCB Ground  CN252 20  OV  CN236  js a Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function  CN236 1 nLEDDAT PNL3 PCB ES DATA Lamp LED Control  CN254 1 LED li Signal  ON oV  CN236 2 nLEDALM PNL3 PCB   ALARM Lamp LED  CN254 2 LED   Control Signal  ON ov  CN236 3 nLEDACT PNL3 PCB sij ACTIVE Lamp LED  CN254 3 LED i Control Signal  OH OV  CN236 4  ACT PNL3 PCB 424V ACTIVE Lamp LED  CN254 4 Power Supply  CN236 5  ALM PNL3 PCB 424V ALARM Lamp LED  CN254 5 Power Supply  CN236 6  DAT PNL3 PCB 424V DATA Lamp LED Power  CN254 6 Supply  CN238  ii We Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function  CN238 1 nLEDDBK PNL4 PCB ET PNL LCD Back Light  CN253 1 LED R Control Signal  ON ov                95          UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200       PNL1 PCB             Pin No Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function  CN238 2 VCC PNL4 PCB 45V  5VDC Power Supply  CN253 2                   3 7 5    PNL2 PC Board    CN251  Refer to PNL1 PC Board CN234     CN252  Refer to PNL1 PC Board CN235     3 7 6   PNL3 PC Board    CN254  Refer to PNL1 PC Board CN236     3 7 7  PNL4 PC Board  UF 8300 8200     CN253  Refer to P
3.                                                                                Medie Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function  CN504 10   5V SPC PCB 45V  5 VDC Power Supply  CN704 3  CN504 11  GND SPC PCB Ground  CN704 2  OV  CN504 12  GND SPC PCB Ground  CN704 1  OV  CN505  SEET Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function  CN505 1 GND Engine Control Ground  PCB  CN721 16 ov  CN505 2 nVIDEO Engine Control Video Signal  PCB  5V  CN721 15 ov  CN505 3 GND Engine Control Ground  PCB  CN721 14 ov  CN505 4 nTOP Engine Control Paper Top Detection  PCB GN  9V  Signal  CN721 13 Detection  OV  CN505 5 nSBSY Engine Control Busy Status  PCB 45V  CN721 12 ov  CN505 6 nHSYNC Engine Control 5V Horizontal  PCB i Synchronization Signal  CN721 11 ov  CN505 7 nPRTRST Engine Control 5V Printer Reset  PCB j  CN721 10  RESET ov  CN505 8 nPURGE Engine Control P  par s Paper End Detection  PCB Gan       Signal  CN721 9 Detection  OV  CN505 9 CXD Engine Control Serial Data Command  PCB  5V  CN721 8 oV                   78          UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200                                                                                                                                        Z  Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function  CN505 10  CCLK Engine Control Serial I F Clock  PCB  5V  CN721 7 oV  CN505 11  SXD Engine Control Serial Data Status  PCB    CN721 6 ov  CN505 12  nPRINT Engine Control EV Print Start  PCB Print d  CN721 5 Start   i  CN505 13  nCBSY Engine Control Bu
4.                           Service Modes  For Copier   pub Item Function  F1 SELF TEST  00 SCANNER LED TEST This test is used for checking the Scanner LED   01 LCD LED TEST This test is used for checking the LCD and  LEDs   02   PAGE MEMORY TEST This test is used for checking the Page Memory   03   PRT TEST PTN  1 Prints the pattern for setting the Paper position  alignment   04  PRT TEST PTN  2 Prints the Slant pattern for setting the Paper  position alignment   05 PRT TEST PTN  3 Prints the Grid pattern for setting the Paper  position alignment   F2 SINGLE COPY TEST One sheet is copied when the Start key is  pressed   F3 CONTI  CPYTEST Multi copies are made when the Start key is  pressed   F4 I  O STATUS TEST The functioning of Input   Output items  selected  item numbers  is checked   F5 FUNC  PARAMETERS Various function settings  selected by code  numbers  can be changed   F6 ADJ  PARAMETERS Various function settings  selected by code  numbers  can be adjusted   F7 ELECTRONIC COUNTER Electronic Counters for Maintenance  F8 SERVICE ADJ  Perform pseudo operation of an item  selected  by code numbers   F9 UNIT MAINTENANCE Fax Service Mode  Service Alert Tel    Firmware Version  Print Device Info                    192    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    F5   F6 Information List  Sample        KRKRKKKKKKKKKK O F5 F6 INFORMATION LIST s eexiekiek   DATE MMM dd yyyy     TIME12 01     P 01    Fb 00        F5 50 AUTO CONTRAST ADJ  Yes  F5 01 FREQUENCY DESIRED 60Hz F5 51 DEPT  COUNTER 
5.                         Is the printout in Service Yes  Mode 3 normal  Y  No Check the Scanner mechanism   j Yi  Is the recording paper damp    j  ne Replace the paper    t  y  Is the Toner Cartridge NO  operational  Y  Yes Replace the Toner Cartridge   Are there any foreign particles  or   Yes  stains blocking the Laser Unit  path  1  Remove the particles from the  No laser beam path  or clean the stains   2  Replace the LSU   L      No  Is the Power Supply Unit  HVPS   normal   1  Check all connectors  and  Yes voltages on the Power Supply Unit   HVPS    2  Replace the Power Supply Unit   HVPS    V  Are the Fuser  and Pressure Roller  No       surfaces clean              Yes    re       Y  Clean  or replace the rollers                          108    4 3 9     Horizontal White Lines       C START                  Paper Travel              V  Is the printout in Service  Mode 3 normal     Yes          V       No    Let          Check the Scanner mechanism           Y          Is the recording paper damp     Yes             No    ra    Y             Replace the recording paper                 operational        Y  Is the Toner Cartridge    No             Yes    rat    Y  Replace the Toner Cartridge                                                                          ra             Y  Are there any foreign particles   Yes  or stains on the BTR  Y  No 1  Clean the BTR with a soft  dry  cloth   2  Replace the BTR   rat  Y  Is the Power Supply Unit No   HVPS  normal   Yes 1  C
6.                 CED  amp  300bps   75ms   RTC EQL X 12   Off  Off  V34TX START   33600bps   V34RX START   33600bps     75ms       33600bps  33600bps  3429sr  3429sr             V34 TX SR   3429sr  V34 RX SR   3429sr        SPLAY   Off  Off    500ms       TIME   500ms    TIME   3sec        3sec  REDIAL INTERVAL   3min  3min  REDIAL COUNT  5  5   RING DET  COUNT  2  2  ON HOOK TIME  5sec  5sec  RESPONSE WAIT  55sec  55sec    Note  The power must be reset for the    050  051  052  053  054  055  056  057  058  059    060  061  062  063  064  065  066  067  068  069    070  071  072  073  074  075  076  077  078  079    080  081  082  083  084  085  086  087  088  089    090  091  092  093  094  095    DATE MMM dd yyyy       TIME 12 07    P 01    RING DET MODE   Normal  Normal    BUSY TONE CHECK   On  On  DIAL TONE CHECK   On  On    COMM JRNL  IMAGE   On  On    VERSION  UF XXXX XXXXXXXXXX  TX RX PRT CPY  000080 000168 000003 000000  PRINT COUNTER   Off  Off    NYSE FAX FORWARD   Off  Off  NYSE LOCAL PRINT  Inc  Inc    LINE ERROR  128  128   TOTAL ERROR  10  10   CONTI  ERROR   Off  Off  ERROR DETECT   Rate  Rate  RTN RECEIVE   Discon  Discon  CODING   JBIG  JBIG   BATCH TX   On  On   RX JAM LENGTH   2 m  2 m    DOC TOP FEED   0  0  DOC END FEED   0  0  JAM LENGTH   1 m  1 m    LINE AS NOPAPER   Ring  Ring  DARKER LEVEL   2  2    NORMAL LEVEL   8  8  LIGHTER LEVEL   14  14          new parameter settings to take effect      PCC Manual        Panafax PCC    123  kkkkkkkkkkk    1  T
7.                 Code  Mode   Phase Description of Problem Cause  416 RCV D Receiver did not detect post Transmitter is defective   command  such as EOP  MPS  EOM   Line quality is poor   RTC signal is  etc  distorted due to line noise   SC PCB or FXB PCB is defective   417 RCV C Receiver returned RTN in response to Line quality is poor   There are  post message  excessive errors in received data   SC PCB or FXB PCB is defective   418 RCV C Receiver transmitted PIN in response Line quality is poor   There are  to PRI Q from transmitter  excessive errors in received data    Transmitting operator requests voice   SC PCB or FXB PCB is defective   contact   420 RCV B  T1 timer  35 sec   elapsed without Incorrect incoming call type  voice    detecting 300 bps signal   Non facsimile communication   Transmitter is defective   SC PCB or FXB PCB is defective   421 RCV B  Busy Tone is detected after sending   Remote station disconnected the line   NSF Signal  Wrong number is dialed   422 XMT B Content of NSF  or DIS  or NSC  or  There is an incompatibility   DTC  was invalid   427 G3 B DCN received to NSF CSI DIS The interface is incompatible   RCV transmitted   434   XMT or B   CD  response from Modem  did not  Remote unit is defective   RCV turn OFF within 180 sec  after SC PCB or FXB PCB is defective   receiver detected FLAG signal   436 G3 RX C   DCN received after transmitting FTT    Transmitter is defective or incompatible   Line quality is poor   438 RCV B Refusal ID  Junk Fax ID
8.              Network B    PC Client   192 168 1 0    gt   192 168 1 4     ec5 labo mgcs com                            ee  PC Client Panasonic Device eg   192 168 3 4   192 168 3 5  Network C PC Client  ec4 labo mgcs com ef1 labo mges com  192 168 4 0     192 168 4 1        fmrt7 labo mgcs com    2  Checking the Current Configuration  Print the current unit Internet Parameters configuration   Locate a PC connected to the same Subnet Mask as the unit  then from the DOS Prompt  type the  following command line utility   ipconfig  all  for Windows 2000   XP   2003   Vista   Verify that the displayed Network configuration on the PC  matches the following Internet Parameter  settings of the unit   Default Gateway IP Address     124    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    DNS Server IP Address   Subnet Mask   whether it is valid     For Windows 2000   XP   2003   Vista  The following example shows the output after you type  ipconfig  all  at a command prompt     C   gt ipconfig  all  Windows NT IP Configuration    Host Name   ec4 labo pcc com  DNS Servers   192 168 1 1    yp  NetBIOS Scope ID  IP Routing Enabled  i  WINS Proxy Enabled   No  NetBIOS Resolution Uses DNS       No    Ethernet adapter IBMFE1    Description   IBM 100 10 EtherJet PCI Adapter    Physical Address   00 04 AC EE 9C E8  DHCP Enabled   No   IP Address   192 168 3 4   Subnet Mask   255 255 255 0  Default Gateway   192 168 3 254  Primary WINS Server   192 168 3 18       From the above examples  you know the Network conf
9.             34  2 3  Disassembly Instructions                          35    Maintenance  Adjustments and    Check Points                                            57  3 1  Preventive Maintenance                           57  3 2  Required Tools                                         59  3 3  Preventive Maintenance Points                60  3 4  Preventive Maintenance Check List         61  3 5  Updating the Firmware        eeeeeeeeeeeeeen 62  3 6  Adjusting the Printer Registration    LSU Image Side to Side                           69  3 7  Signal Waveform                                      71   Troubleshooting                                      99  4 1  Initial Troubleshooting Flowchart             99  4 2  Improper LCD Display                            100  4 3  Printed Copy Quality Problems              101  4 4  Document Feeder  ADF                         115  4 5  Communications                                    118  4 6  Troubleshooting the LAN Interface         123  4 7  Error Codes  For Copier                        130  4 8  Information Code Table    For Faceimile   135  4 9  Diagnostic Codes  For Facsimile           142  4 10  Troubleshooting  For Printer                  150   Service Modes                                       152  5 1  Service Modes  For Copier                    152  5 2  Service Modes  For Facsimile                166   System Description                               192  6 1  Transmit Mechanism                              192  6 2
10.             Glossary of Electrical Abbreviations  Signal Name Function   24V  24 VDC Power Supply   24VA  24 VDC Power Supply   24VIR  24 VDC Power Supply   3 3V  3 3 VDC Power Supply   5V  5 VDC Power Supply   5VA  5 VDC Power Supply   5VB  5 VDC Power Supply   5VP  5 VDC Power Supply   ACT ACTIVE Lamp LED Power Supply   ALM ALARM Lamp LED Power Supply   DAT DATA Lamp LED Power Supply  24VGND Ground  5VGND Ground  A Motor Control Signal  AA Motor Control Signal  ACL AC Power Supply  Live   ACN AC Power Supply  Neutral   AGND Ground  B Motor Control Signal  BB Motor Control Signal  BZCLK Buzzer Signal Output  CCLK Serial I F Clock  CISCLK CIS Clock  CLOCK_OP CLOCK  CXD Serial Data Command  FANNERR Fan Error Detection Signal  FANPER  24VDC Fan Power  FG Ground  GND Ground  IICSCL IIC Bus Clock  IICSDA IIC Bus Data  KINO PNL Key Signal  Key Line   KIN1 PNL Key Signal  Key Line   KIN2 PNL Key Signal  Key Line   KIN3 PNL Key Signal  Key Line   KIN4 PNL Key Signal  Key Line   KIN5 PNL Key Signal  Key Line   KING PNL Key Signal  Key Line   KIN7 PNL Key Signal  Key Line   L 5V  5 VDC through Process Interlock SW  L1 Telephone Line Signal  L2 Telephone Line Signal  LDADF DOOR  1 2 VDC Power Supply  LDAPNT ADF Paper Detection Sensor Signal          71    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200       Glossary of Electrical Abbreviations       Signal Name    Function                         LDBPNT  1 2 VDC Power Supply   LDCCHK  1 2 VDC Power Supply  LDCCHK OP  1 2V   LDCPNT ADF Paper Ejection Senso
11.        Toner Empty                                           NJSLIXJU  ONOASS    dSAG        Paper Exit  Sensor          UF 8300   8200 only                               ans  SIGE    ae          Registration   Paper Detect                DS  QNO  vasall   SHNOS     OdHsd   Od3HAd  WILNAaSA                                  T eO   00 OND  eet  ee er    u  5 E   amp   S  Sl      2  S                            ONO  OJOIA  QN  dolu  Asasu  ONASHU  LSY14dd  aoungu  axo   X109  axs  INIU4U  ASAJU    i    GSA model  HERMISTOR             A Lamp ea                 ey  a o  EI mo    A ano   Deeg   d    IND  eg     Zeck Sl ena k  mms     S sina    li  ot Nez      won         Li           als   BI  WW EXIT E  Pi moan Re  EDGE  ut  SE  oL OL    QNO  va  7   AG   gt   GNS GNOW    SANTOS     GNSD GNOW SANT Saomononton      Kanslanon   gt  Z08NO  Leave _   Leaver    wares    WARE            FUSERUNIT   tyHeRmostat            O BRUSNE SooNohbusne             SIERT                                                                                                                                                                 yINosu  lelNosu       ON                             v     D aee A  E ansaan  er    c vas e  HEINS H    x  v              Q   al    DL515 04UH          ul   UI   dj       o  TAO THOR OO    El   2  7                                                                                                                      DAT  24     ALM  24  ACT  24V    nLEDACT  nLEDALM  nLEDDAT  
12.        x x x    STATUS 3 0K  MODE   ECM TX  STANDARD   SPEED   9600bps OMS L  REMOTE CAPA    DIS 00 CE B9 C4 80 12  LOCAL CAPA    TSI 2B 20 20 20 38 37 2B 2B 2B 2B  39 38 36 36 35 34 37 38 38 30  DCS 00 C6 F8 44    COMMAND LOG   REMOTE  LOCAL       REMOT  LOCAL     Panafax PCC      kk e kk UF XXXX FRR EKER KKK ke dede ek ek ek ke e x        PCC Manual   kk ke ke ke kx   123   x xx kk n n       179    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    5 2 4 6  Toner Order Form  The Toner Order Form can be printed out manually by the following procedure   Press the    w        a    keys to select    3  Print Report List      Press the  Set  key   Press the    w        a    keys to select    7  Toner Order Form      Press the  Set  key     wv    Press the  Stop  key to exit the service mode        kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkak     gt  TONER CARTRIDGE ORDER FORM  lt     kkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk                        The toner supply in your machine is running low       1   To order a replacement Cartridge from your Authorized Dealer    by Phone  1 201 111 5555  2   by Fax  1 201 111 4444  3     Thank you for your order     Customer Name and Address             Attention  Attention           Phone No   Phone No            Customer ID  ABC COMPANY  4  P O  No  if required            Toner Cartridge No    5  Serial No         Quantity Required           Print your name and title Signature  amp  Date       Explanation of Contents     1  Low Toner Message  Fixed   The toner supply 
13.       10  Remove the Roller Assembly      11  Remove the Snap Ring    12  Remove the Pick Up Shaft  412     13  Remove the Pick Up Roller Assembly      14  Remove the Pick Up 1 Gear  414  and Pick Up 2  Gear  413         42    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200      Feed Roller       15  Remove the Snap Ring     16  Remove the Feed Lever  402      17  Remove the Feed Roller Shaft Assembly    18  Remove the Feed Roller  411         Note   When reinstalling  make sure that the Roller Assembly  is properly placed on the ADF Unit      4  CIS  Contact Image Sensor  Assembly      1  Open the ADF Cover Assembly    Refer to 2 3 1   4  Top Cover      2  Remove the Stamp Unit    Refer to 2 3 2   2 Stamp Unit      3  Remove the Upper Paper Guide  311     Refer to 2 3 2   3 Roller Assembly      4  Remove 3 Screws     5  Remove the Paper Guide  434         6  Remove 2 Screws    7  Remove the Paper Guide  433     8  Remove 2 Screws    9  Remove the CIS Assembly     10  Disconnect the Flat Harness from CIS Assembly                   Caution   When reinstalling the CIS Assembly  pull out the Flat  Harness a little from the machine first   After connecting  push the Flat Harness in the  machine        43    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200     5  Motor Assembly     Paper Transfer Motor Assembly       1  Remove the ADF Drive Assembly    Refer to 2 3 1   6 ADF Drive Assembly      2  Remove the ADF Tray Assembly     3  Remove 2 Screws         4  Remove 2 Screws     5  Remove the ADF Base  538      6  Close th
14.      Fax Diagnostic Codes  Definition  Data Polling XMT RCV Selective Password  Comm  Comm   0   RCV Off Off  1 Yes RCV Off Off  2   XMT Off Off  3 Yes XMT Off Off  4   RCV On Off  5 Yes RCV On Off  6   XMT On Off  7 Yes XMT On Off  8   RCV Off On  9 Yes RCV Off On  A   XMT Off On  B Yes XMT Off On  C   RCV On On  D Yes RCV On On  E   XMT On On  F Yes XMT On On  7th Digit     Not used defined  Fax Diagnostic Codes  Definition  Data Sub Address Confidential Relaved C Turnaround  Comm  Comm  Syon Polling  0      i E  1 Yes     E  2   Yes      3 Yes Yes      4     Yes    5 Yes   Yes    6   Yes Yes    7 Yes Yes Yes    8       Yes  9 Yes     Yes  A   Yes   Yes  B Yes Yes   Yes  C     Yes Yes  D Yes   Yes Yes  E   Yes Yes Yes  F Yes Yes Yes Yes                         145    8th Digit     Not used defined    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200                                                                      Fax Diagnostic Codes  Definition  Data  Advanced Comm  Cover Sheet XMT  0   2  1 Report XMT    2 Check  amp  Call    3 E z  4 Memory Transfer    5 z z  6 z 5  7 z z  8   Yes  9 Report XMT Yes  A Check 8 Call Yes  B   Yes  C Memory Transfer Yes  D   Yes  E   Yes  F   Yes          9th Digit     Not used defined       Fax Diagnostic Codes       Data    Definition       Short Protocol    Standard   Non Standard       Standard       Standard       Standard       Standard       Standard       Standard       Standard       Standard       Non Standard       Non Standard       Non Standard   
15.      PAPER TRAY COUNT    F7 21 COPY PRINT COUNT  F7 22 COPY SCAN COUNT     4  PRINT ERROR     00 00000013    PC  P  PC S  FAX  FAX  FAX    A4R        FLS     RINT COUNT   CAN COUNT  TRANSMIT COUNT  RECEIVE COUNT  PRINT COUNT    LTR COUNT       LG COUNT    SERVICE MODE ID    NO  DATE  amp  TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT NO  DATE  amp  TIME    MMM dd yyyy 20 07 E04 01 00 00000013  MMM dd yyyy 20 04 E04 01 00 00000013       eek kk UF XXXX KARA  PCC Manual    Explanation of Contents     1  Customer ID               2  Firmware Version  3  Counter Information    4  Print Error    Last 30 records  Latest on top     188     B    ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT    anafax PCC       kkkkkkkkkak    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    5 2 7 4  MAINTENANCE ALERT REPORT FORMAT    KKKKKKKKKKKKKK PRINTER REPORT  see DATE MMM dd yyyy       TIME 19 02  ek    LAST PRINT ERROR    SERIAL NUMBER  CUSTOMER ID    FIRMWARE VERSION  sc  PNL  SCANNER  SDR   PRINTER    TRANSMIT COUNTER  RECEIVE COUNTER  COPY COUNTER  PRINT COUNTER    kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxk     gt  MAINTENANCE ALERT REPORT  lt     kk ck ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce k ce k k ce k k ke ke ke k k kx kx X      MACHINE IS RUNNING OUT OF TONER  1       ABC company  2      3       000244    000082    000000    000000    NO DATE  amp  TIME ERROR CODE RRROR COUNT   NO DATE  amp  TIME ERROR CODE RRROR COUNT     Panafax PCC      Xe x x x UF XXXX FRR KKK KKK KK ke ke ke e e x x x         PCC Manual a   123     xxk kk kx    Explanation of Contents   1  Low Ton
16.      Press the  Stop  key   4  Press the    Function    and the    Clear    keys sequentially to exit the service mode     4    Reboot the machine after setting the parameter s  to activate the setting s                                       F8 Mode  No  Item Remarks  00 05   Not Used  06 Error Log View Each time the arrow key is pressed  the machine errors or  paper jam codes stored in memory are displayed  beginning  with the oldest code   Note   Only the 30 most recent codes are displayed   07  Error Log Clear Press the Start key   08 17   Not Used  18  C18 PRT PWM ADJ PTN  Print out the Test Pattern    LSU PWM Pattern  Proceed when the LSU is replaced   19 46   Not Used  47  C47 ADF Scan Test Place the document on the ADF first   Press Start key to begin   48 54   Not Used             163       5 1 8     F9 Mode  Unit Maintenance    Set the machine to Service Mode  and press the    9    key     4    Press the    Start    key to enter the F9 Service Mode     4    Enter the desired code number  or press the    w        a    keys   If you wish to select another code number  press the    w        a    keys     Y    Press the  Set  key     Enter the desired function code number and press the  Set  key     Y    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    When the  Clear  key is pressed  the selected code input will not be accepted     Press the  Stop  key   4    Press the    Function    and the    Clear    keys sequentially to exit the service mode                 4  Reboot the machine after
17.     Device Location    Your machine interprets the command that you enter in the  Subject  line of your email message and  performs one of the following functions  it Retrieves or Stores data into the Internet Parameters  User  Parameters  The two types of commands that can be entered in the  Subject  line of your email      1  To Store data  type    Zset parameters password        2  To Retrieve data  type   Zget parameters password        Note     where the  password  is the Remote  Password programmed in your machine s  User Parameters  i e  123456789   You can  enter the Internet Parameters shown above  with this command the first time  However  if  these fields already contain data  do not use  this command as the existing information will  be deleted and overwritten  Use the Retrieve  command below instead    where the    password    is the Remote  Password programmed in your machine s  User Parameters  i e  123456789   Make  sure that the CC     Bcc    lines and the body  of the email message is Blank     To activate this feature  change the Fax Parameter No  158  PC Remote Update  to  Valid      221    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    9 1 4  To Retrieve Each Parameters  To retrieve the existing parameters  send a plain text email to your machine s email address with the  following command in the  Subject  line      get parameters password      To retrieve the Internet Parameters   get abbr password     To retrieve the Auto Dialer   get jnl password A   To retrieve the Jo
18.     Non Standard       Non Standard       Non Standard       Non Standard             nM  olol W  gt   O Co  CN  OO  BK  ew  PO  o       Non Standard          146    10th Digit     Not used defined    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200                                                                                                                                     Fax Diagnostic Codes  Definition  pati Coding ECM  0 MH    1 MR    2 MMR    3   a  4   E  5   m  6   e  T      8 MH Yes  9 MR Yes  A MMR Yes  B   z  C      D  gt  2  E a 2  F a    11th Digit     Not used defined  Fax Diagnostic Codes  Data Definition  Symbol Rate  V 34  V 34  0   a  1   7  2 E 3  3   5  4 E E  5 B    6      T 2    8 2400 sr Yes  9   d  A 2800 sr Yes  B 3000 sr Yes  C 3200 sr Yes  D 3429 sr Yes  E   z  F   z                   147    12th Digit       Not used defined    13th Digit       Not used defined    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200       Fax Diagnostic Codes                                                             Data Definition  Modem Speed Modem Speed  V 34    0 2400 bps     1 4800 bps 2400 bps  2 7200 bps 4800 bps  3 9600 bps 7200 bps  4 TC 7200 bps 9600 bps  5 TC 9600 bps 12000 bps  6 12000 bps 14400 bps  7 14400 bps 16800 bps  8   19200 bps  9   21600 bps  A   24000 bps  B   26400 bps  C   28800 bps  D   31200 bps  E   33600 bps  F 2 E                   Fax Diagnostic Codes                                                             Data Definition   Line Status   0 T   1 Private Line   2 z   3 E  
19.     Start    key     Vv    Press the    Stop    key twice to exit the service mode     Tonal Signal Table       Number    Signals       1    462 Hz       1080 Hz       1100 Hz       1300 Hz       1650 Hz       1850 Hz          NIO Oo RA WIND       2100 Hz          182    5 2 5 3     UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    DTMF Signal    This Service Mode is used to check the DTMF  Dual Tone Multi Frequency  signal output   The DTMF signal can be generated using the following procedure       DTMF Single Tone  Press the    w        a    keys to select    4  MODEM Test      Press the  Set     Press the  w     Press the  Set     Press the    w       Ston  V A   keys to select the  3  DTMF Test    ky  E A   keys to select  1  Single      w    Press the desired number and press the  Start  key        w    Press the  Stop  key twice to exit the service mode       DTMF Dual Tone  Press the    w       Press the  Set     Press the  w     Press the  Set     Press the  w       a    keys to select    4  MODEM Test      Mis  V A   keys to select the    3  DTMF Test         koji  V A   keys to select the    2  Dual        w    Press the desired number and press the  Start  key        AA    Press the  Stop  key twice to exit the service mode     DTMF Single Tone Table DTMF Dual Tone Table                                           Number DTMF Signal Tones Number DTMF Dual Tones  1 697 Hz 0 941 Hz   1336 Hz  2 770 Hz 1 697 Hz   1209 Hz  3 852 Hz 2 697 Hz   1336 Hz  4 941 Hz 3 697 Hz   1477 Hz  5 1209 Hz
20.    17  Remove 3 Screws on the Front Side     39    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    Caution   To prevent damaging the Harness  carefully guide it  throughout the frame      18  Remove the ADF Drive Assembly        2 3 2  Automatic Document Feeder  ADF  Unit  Scanner     1  Cleaning     1  Open the ADF Cover Assembly    Refer to 2 3 1   4  Top Cover       Separation Roller  Pick Up Roller and Feed Roller    Clean the surface of the Rollers with a soft cloth   saturated with water      ADF Pad     Clean the surface of the ADF Pad only with a soft dry  cloth      CIS  Contact Image Sensor       Clean the surface of the CIS only with a soft dry cloth       White Sheet      Clean the surface of the White Sheet only with a soft dry  cloth        40    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200     2  Stamp Unit      1  Open the ADF Cover Assembly    Refer to 2 3 1   4  Top Cover      2  Remove the Stamp Unit  422      3  Remove the Stamp Head      3  Roller Assembly     Separation Roller Assembly       1  Open the ADF Cover Assembly    Refer to 2 3 1   4  Top Cover      2  Remove the Separation Roller Cover  438  as  illustrated      3  Remove the Snap Ring     4  Remove the Separation Roller Assembly as  illustrated     5  Remove the Separation Roller Shaft Assembly   440        Pick Up Roller  416  gt      6  Remove 2 Screws    7  Remove the Upper Paper Guide  311         41    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200     8  Release the Spring from the Hook as illustrated    9  Remove both side Feed Levers  402 
21.    5V  GND  nADFDOOR       2  6  5  4  3  2  1                                        EEA    EN  Ne             3  N  zZ  o          ZEN  S    ADF Motor  PH Motor  STAMP  SOLENOID  Document  Sensor  Readpoint  ADF Door  Paper Tray  Sensor                                        ES          231    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    232    Panasonic    Software  Operating Instructions    Network Firmware Update Tool  for Service Technicians    Version 3    DZSD001829 15    Network Firmware Update Tool  LAN     Table of Contents    1  General  1 1 oupported  Operating  Systetns       4    25 cnc eed trt pena u un lenken ehren  1 2 Supported Panasonic Fax MFP Models       2  Installation  2 1 Installing the Network Firmware Update Tool    emm enm enne  2 2 Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool   2 3 Uninstalling the Network Firmware Update Tool    3  Preparing the Firmware Update    3 1 Preparing the Unit to Accept the Firmware Code eene eene  3 1 1 For DX 600   DX 800  v1 31 or higher  only  3 1 2 For other models   3 2 Preparing the Firmware Code    naked een    4  Usingthe Network Firmware Update Tool    1st Edition  2002 March 20  2nd Edition  2002 August 1   3rd Edition  2002 December 5  4th Edition  2003 April 10   5th Edition  2003 April 22   6th Edition  2003 December 18  7th Edition  2004 April 7   8th Edition  2004 August 3   9th Edition  2004 August 20  10th Edition  2004 October 22  11th Edition  2005 March 18  12th Edition  2006 March 27  13th Edition  2006 May 8  14
22.    7    keys      gt        he          2  Select    8  MAINTENANCE     and press the  Get  key to enter the Maintenance mode   3  Select    6  LCD BRIGHTNESS      and press the  Set  key    4  Press the     lt q  Lighter     key or    p  Darker     key    5  Press the    Set    key or the    Stop    key     100    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    4 3  Printed Copy Quality Problems  4 3 1  Black Copy                                                                                                                                                             t START   lt   u  ke  D Yes  S   Isthe printout in Service       Mode 3 normal     N Check the Scanner mechanism   o  Y  Is the Toner Cartridge No  operational  i  Yes Replace the Toner Cartridge     No  Is the Power Supply  i 2  Unit normal 1  Check all connectors  and voltages  Ves on the Power Supply Unit   2  Check the contacts between PSU   and Toner Cartridge   3  Replace the PSU   Is the SC PCB normal  No  Yes 1  Check all connectors  and voltages  on the SC PCB   2  Replace the SC PCB   Y  No    Is the SPC PCB normal                    Yes     i      Check all connectors  and voltages  on the SPC PCB   2  Replace the SPC PCB                 rat          Y    101    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    4 3 2  Blank Copy                                                                                                                                                                                                          t C START  g
23.    75 ms  gt  1 sec    033   33600 bps   31200 to 2400 bps   TC9600 TC7200     025   1st  gt  2nd             rt   Y  To equalize loss  Amplitude Distortion  between the fax unit   and the phone company exchange                 Transmitting Side  3014   0 dBm  4  8  12 dBm         To improve a poor S N  signal to noise ratio      Receiving Side   013   0 dBm  4  8  12 dBm                         Transmitting Side    Receiving Side        010    9 dBm  gt  0 to  15 dBm   017   14400 bps   12000 to 2400 bps   033   33600 bps  gt  31200 to 2400 bps        011    43 dBm    33 dBm or  38 dBm   018   14400 bps gt  12000 to 2400 bps   019   On  gt  Off    023  Normal   Long    033   33600 bps   31200 to 2400 bps                  To cope with impulse noise        Receiving Side           070  128  gt  256 to 2048                  To cope with shifted signal sequences caused by an echo        Transmitting Side    Receiving Side           025   1st  2nd        024   2100 Hz gt 1080 Hz   030   75 ms  gt 1 sec          118    4 5 2     Y  Make a copy                    Y       Poor Transmitted Copy Quality    No       Is the printed copy normal           Y       Yes       Y  Perform a transmission test  to a reference fax unit                       Is the LED lit     No       Pur          Y  Is the transmitted copy  normal           Yes       Y    Does  5 VDC alive on the  SDR PCB        Yes       V  Does nLEDON go Low  when the scan starts     UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200             Repl
24.    File Name       10 74 229 171 XMT Executing    53  C  Panasonic  10 74 229 171 XMT Queuing C  Panasonic  10 74 229 171 XMT Queuing C  Panasonic  10 74 229 171 XMT Queuing Check versio          When the transfers are completed  all jobs in the x  spooler disappear  and the communication log is 75159 9f the Fiare Update   displayed  au may carme Sa talem ges terere riti e pode   wi opens automatically   After the firmware code is successfully Sm se  programmed to the Firmware Flash Memory In Zon GETT  the device  the device will shut down and reboot     Hee SE E   automatically  ile Versi SFOLSPNLAAVOODD2 PU  gt  SFDL2PNLAAVIDOOD PU   SFOLZPNLAAVIOONO PU  D    DP SFDL24AV00006_PU   gt  DP SFDL2AAV10000_PU   DP SFDL244V10000 PU   OK  SFDL2SPCAAVO0003   gt  SFDL2SPCAAV10000   SFDL2SPCAAV10000   OK    Click  Finish   Te 4 2 2003 4 51 08 AM       A Firmware Deletion confirmation screen will  appear     Network Firmware Update Tool    P     Would you like to delete the original Firmware code Files   Click  Yes  to delete the firmware code files that C  Panasonic Panasonic FUP Data DP C322_C262_PU_20070315    you used for the update  or click  No  to keep the  firmware code files in your PC for future use  No       Page 13    Network Firmware Update Tool  LAN     13  Confirm the message in the text box and click   OK  to close the tool     Network Firmware Update Tool    The firmware code files have been deleted        Network Firmware Update Tool    Operators other than USA   The
25.    Panafax UF 7300    Panasonic uv      send  Di pr Search      ILLE     Clear a  Contrast Resolution         gt      o HS S S Sr      D a  Print Data Status Active       26    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    1 3  System Combination    Automatic Document Feeder  ADF            Panel   PNL PC Board         Super G3 Fax  Communication    GDI Printer       Electronic  Sorting    Option USB Interface    10 100 Ethernet  Interface       Memory               h  U    G3 Communication  i  U  Li       p                     Port Kit Option    SD Memory Card i WEE  LTE E MMB RRR ERR     Iw     32 MB   2 GB  1   Internet Fax   Email   11         Network Scanner 11    i   etw tt     SSSR REE   Module Option  3   UF 8300 8200 Std    i  aT    i         O b   1   t s s     2nd Paper Feed Module Option        Standard Configuration      ta M    H WM                   K    L   Option D    27    1 4  Options List    Options    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200       Option Name    Option Number    Remarks       Internet Fax   Email   Network Scanner             UE 404093 For UF 7300 7200  Module  G3 Communication Port Kit UE 407029  2nd Paper Feed Module UE 409080  Handset Kit UE 403185       SD Memory Card    32 MB up to 2 GB  Use Genuine SD Memory Cards only       Supplies       Part Name    Part Number    Remarks       All in One Cartridge       UG 5570    For USA and Canada          UG 5575          For Other Destinations       Note     1  The Part Name s    Part Number s  differ depending on the Mo
26.    SERVER 2 Valid  133   JOB BUILD  1 Off Selecting whether the machine performs Job Build when  2 On the total number of documents exceed the maximum  capacity of the ADF  or when scanning the documents  manually one at a time   The Fax Parameter No 82  QUICK MEMORY XMT  is  not available when the Job Build is set to  2 On     135  01 JUNK FAX  1 Invalid Selecting whether the machine performs Junk Fax Filter   FILTER 2 Valid function  If the setting is set to  Valid   the machine  disallows faxes from the senders whose numeric ID is  registered as a junk fax number    02 RCV 1 Invalid Selecting whether the machine allows fax reception from   WITHOUT ID W  i Valid senders without numeric ID being registered    This feature is available when  01 Junk Fax Filter  is set  to  2 Valid     03 RECEIVED ID  1 Invalid Selecting whether the machine prints the sender s   PRINT  2 Valid numeric ID and received time at the bottom of the    received faxes  If the sender s numeric ID is not  registered  only the received time is printed     This feature is available when  01 Junk Fax Filter  is set  to  2  Valid            04 ID NO   REGIST                   Registering a junk fax number    Up to 30 junk fax numbers can be registered    Up to 20 digits  including numbers  blank space  and    symbol  can be registered for a fax number           203    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200                                                                                                       No  Paramete
27.    Secure the Rear Cover with Removed 3 Screws and 2  Washer head Screws      24  Reinstall the SD Memory Card if it was removed     25  Plug the AC Power Cord first  then reconnect the  Telephone Line Cable     26  Reconnect the LAN   USB Cable s  if disconnected     27  Make a copy to confirm the operating of the 2nd  Paper Tray     Note   Pull out the 1st Paper Tray to disable     216    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    8 4  Installing the Handset Kit  UE 403185   8 4 1  Contents    Visually check the condition and contents of the box for completeness  or for any shipping damage before  starting the installation    Remove all tapes  and the packing materials used to secure the units during shipment    After unpacking  dispose of the packing materials appropriately                             No  Qty  Description Remarks  1 1 Cradle Assembly  2 1 Handset  3 1 Handset Cord Installed to the Cradle Assembly  4 1 Installation Instructions This document             Note   Refer to the Parts Manual for Part Number s   Packing  and Accessories in details     8 4 2  Installation    CAUTION   Unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation      1  Remove the Protective Tab covering the Handset  Jack on the Rear Cover        217       Handset Jack    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200   2  Turn the Cradle Assembly upside down    3  Route the Cradle Assembly Cord along the 2 Hooks  as illustrated      4  Hook the projections of the Cradle Assembly into the  holes on the Rear Cover     5  
28.    Sensor e EL e NL       Paper Exit  Sensor       Document Sensor    i     Sige                                        Exit Sensor                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        HE                      4 7 3              No Paper Sensor    No Paper Sensor o    Mechanical Error Codes  E Code        Paper Path Sensor             LN    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    LSU    Toner  Cartridge    Registration  Sensor       E1  Optical Unit Error       Code    Function    Check Points       E1 22       Polygon Motor Synchronization       1  SPC PCB connector is disconnected   2  SPC PCB is defective    3  Laser Unit is defective    4  LVPS connectors is disconnected   5  LVPS is defective    6  SC PCB is defective           E2  Lift DC Motor Error       Code          Function       Check Points       E2  Not Applicable          132    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200       E3  Development System Error  Code Function Check Points  E3 20   Main Motor Rotation 1  Drive Mechanism is defective   2  Main Motor connector is disconnected   3  Main Motor is defective   4  SPC PCB connector is disconnected   5  SPC PCB is defective   6  LVPS is defective                          E4  Fuser Unit Error  Code Function Check Points  E4 01  Fuser Warm up Temperature 1  Fuser Thermistor is dirty   2  Thermistor position is in
29.    x xen       Explanation of Contents   1  Customer ID   2  Firmware Version   3  Counter Information   4  Call Counter Pre Set Value    190    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    5 2 8  Service Mode 9  System Maintenance     5 2 8 1  Overview    This Service Mode is used to maintain the machine  Use the following procedure for System Maintenance        Service Mode 9                                                                   Step Operation or Unit Condition LCD Display   dd  i  1  Stand by NE a E  2  Press the    Function    and the    7    keys  SE a  3   Press the  Monitor  key four times  then press the         key  d   E VA   TOLE SYSTEM MAINT   1 8   4 Press the 9 key  1 FIRMWARE UPDATE   1      1    FIRMWARE BACKUP  5  Press the    Set    and the    Start    keys  PR EN  6 After the backup is completed  repeat step 4 through 5 to request an SERVICE MODE  operation  ENTER NO  OR VA             MMM dd yyyy 15 00  00           7  Press the    Stop    key twice to return to stand by                       Note   If there is NO File in the machine  this operation will not function   Press the    Stop    key twice to exit the service mode     System Maintenance Table       No  Maintenance Mode Description   1  Firmware update PC    gt  Host  Updates the firmware in the machine with the Master Firmware from the  PC  After the firmware is updated  the machine reboots automatically  and returns to standby   3  PARAMETER RESTOR  Restores the parameters from the Backup Card into
30.   09 V34 2400 sr 21600 bps 30 V34 3000 sr 28800 bps 51 V34 3429 sr 24000 bps  10 V34 2800 sr 4800 bps 31 V34 3200 sr 4800 bps 52 V34 3429 sr 26400 bps  11 V34 2800 sr 7200 bps 32 V34 3200 sr 7200 bps 53 V34 3429 sr 28800 bps  12 V34 2800 sr 9600 bps 33 V34 3200 sr 9600 bps 54 V34 3429 sr 31200 bps  13 V34 2800 sr 12000 bps 34 V34 3200 sr 12000 bps 55 V34 3429 sr 33600 bps  14 V34 2800 sr 14400 bps 35 V34 3200 sr 14400 bps 56 ANSam  15 V34 2800 sr 16800 bps 36 V34 3200 sr 16800 bps 57 CM  16 V34 2800 sr 19200 bps 37 V34 3200 sr 19200 bps 58 JM  17 V34 2800 sr 21600 bps 38 V34 3200 sr 21600 bps 59 INFOOc  amp  TONEB  18 V34 2800 sr 24000 bps 39 V34 3200 sr 24000 bps 60 INFOOc  amp  TONEA  19 V34 2800 sr 26400 bps 40 V34 3200 sr 26400 bps 61 PPh  amp  AC  amp  ALT  20 V34 3000 sr 4800 bps 41 V34 3200 sr 28800 bps  21 V34 3000 sr 7200 bps 42 V34 3200 sr 31200 bps             184    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    5 2 6  Fax Service Mode 6  RAM Initialization   Initializes RAM and restores the Function Parameters to their default values     Note   This operation should be performed when the unit is first installed     Press the    w        a    keys to select    6  RAM initialize      i   Press the  Set  key to select the desired Mode number   i   Press the    Set    key to initialize RAM   v    Press the  Stop  key twice to exit the service mode     RAM Initialization Table    No  Initialize Mode Description   01  PARAMETER INITIALIZE Restores the Fax and Function Parameters to def
31.   11  Remove 2 Screws    12  Remove 2 Pick Up Rollers  1106         54    2 3 9  Bias Transfer Roller       ay    2 3 10  2nd Paper Feed Module       UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200     1  Open the Right Cover  614     Refer to 2 3 1   3 Control Panel Unit     2  Remove the Toner Cartridge    3  Remove 2 Transfer Roller Holder  901     4  Remove the Bias Transfer Roller Assembly     5  Remove the Spacer  902     6  Remove the Transfer Gear  903    7  Remove 2 Bushings  904     8  Remove the Spacer  902       n        1  Remove 5 Screws    2  Remove the Rear Cover  1501       3  Open the Jam Cover Assembly    4  Remove the Jam Cover Assembly by pulling the  Hook as illustrated     55    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200   5  Remove 2 Screws    6  Remove the Paper Guide  1120       7  Remove the Snap Ring    8  Remove the Pick Up Roller Clutch  1612       9  Turn the Pick Up Roller Assembly    10  Remove 2 Screws    11  Remove 2 Pick Up Rollers  1106         56    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    3 Maintenance  Adjustments and Check Points    3 1  Preventive Maintenance    Preventive maintenance is performed at specific intervals  and consists of machine cleaning  and parts  replacement  It is essential to perform these service activities properly  and at the specified intervals for  customer satisfaction    The purpose of this service is to maintain machine performance  and image quality     1  You should prepare the replacement parts  and cleaning tools beforehand    2  After completing the
32.   16 x 15 4   600dpi   600 x 600 dpi    LAN 600 dpi  16 x 15 4  Scanning Resolution is  available        Printer Mechanism       1 Printing Resolution    600 dpi       2 Effective Recording Width    LTR  8 1 in  207 mm   A4  7 9 in  201 mm        Transmission Features       Convenient simultaneous G3                                  1 Multi Task Operation Yes Fax and LAN operation   2 Memory Transmission Yes  3 Sequential Multi Station   e Yes  Transmission  Max  630 stations  4 Simultaneous Multi Station eee S eu EE  Tr  nsmiseion Yes Number Dialing   EE Max 1000 stations when the SD  Memory Card is installed  5 Sender Selection Yes  6 G3 Email Mixed  Yes  Broadcasting  7 Deferred Transmission Yes  8 Fax Forward Yes Received File Transfer  9 Sub address RCV Yes Inbound Routing  10 Mail Header  Email Header Print Selection Yes All or From   To   Subject only          Subject Line    Random Entry       LAN Features          1 Internet Fax Communication    Yes       2 Internet Mail Reception          Yes             23    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200       Items    Description       UF 8300 8200 7300 7200    Remarks       3 Internet Fax Server Features       Internet Fax Internet Fax                                                                                  Internet Fax Relay XMT Yes G3FAX  Email Relay XMT Yes PC  gt  Internet Fax  gt  G3FAX  DEE VOU Tax Emal Yes Local print available  Forward  PC FAX Transmission Yes F anaran Desk ey   Network   Inbound Routing Yes pls Sub
33.   2  Valid   a journal will be  printed out after a new job is stored in the memory   017 RECEIVE MODE  1 Manual Setting the reception mode to automatic or manual    2 Auto  022  SUBSTITUTE 1 Invalid Selecting whether the machine receives to memory when  RCV  2 Valid the recording paper runs out  toner runs out or the  recording paper is jammed   023 REC  PAPER        Selecting the Paper Tray and paper size   SIZE  024   PRINT 1 Fixed Selecting print reduction mode   REDUCTION  2 Auto Fixed   Reduce received document according to setting of  Parameter No 25   Auto   Reduce received document according to the length of  received documents   025   REDUCTION 70 70  Selecting the fixed print reduction ratio from 70  to  RATIO iad EE 100    100 100  This parameter functions only when the fixed print  reduction is selected on Fax Parameter No 24  PRINT  REDUCTION    026   POLLING        Setting 4 digits password for secured polling   PASSWORD  027  POLLED FILE  1 Invalid Selecting whether the machine retains the polled  SAVE 2 Valid document in memory even after the document is polled  once   028 STAMP AT MEM   1 Invalid Selecting whether the machine stamps the original  XMT Wei Valid documents when storing the documents into memory    depending on the Stamp setting on the Control Panel  If  the setting is  1 Invalid   the machine will not stamp even  if the Stamp LED light is ON   031 INC  FILE SAVE   1 Invalid Selecting whether the machine retains the document in  2 Valid memory i
34.   295  F7 08 ADF PM COUNT   50  F7 09       t   F7 10       t   Fell   z 4 eg   147  F7 12 Ist PAPER TRAY COUNT   90  F7 13 2nd PAPER TRAY COUNT   0  F7 14           S   FUSl5 uod wpe cw     F7 16              KF7 29       e e     F7 30 A4R LTR COUNT   73  E7 31    sses t   F7 32 FLS LG COUNT DH 0  F7 17 ADF COUNT s 26  F7 18 ADF READ COUNT S 26  F7 19             F7 20           F7 21 COPY PRINT COUNT   59  F7 22 COPY SCAN COUNT   180  F7 23 PC PRINT COUNT   0  F7 24 PC SCAN COUNT 5 3  F7 24 FAX TRANSMIT COUNT   24  F7 24 FAX RECEIVE COUNT   27  F7 24 FAX PRINT COUNT s 21  F7 98 SERVICE MODE ID    SERIAL NUMBER            155    5 1 3     F4 Mode  Input Output Status Test    Set the machine to Service Mode  and press the  4  key     4    Press the    Start    key to enter the F4 Service Mode     4    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    Select    1 Check Input    or    2 Check Output     and press the    Start    key to activate the test     4    If you wish to cancel the test  press the  Stop  key   When the  Clear  key is pressed  the selected code input will not be accepted     Press the    Function    and the    Clear    keys sequentially to exit the service mode     1  Check Input       F4 Mode  Check Input                                                                                               No  Function Condition Nee Er aie  030  ADF Read Point Sensor Original is detected  1  312   ADF Paper Exit Sensor Original is detected  1  312   ADF Cover Open Sensor Cover is ope
35.   3  Check the Screws  If required  replace consumable parts    6  Gears  Rollers Shafts O 1  Check and grease the reguired Gears and Shafts    7   Timing Belts Check 8 1  Check for belt looseness or abrasion    Clean 2  Adjust the Idle Pulley                       59    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    3 3  Preventive Maintenance Points    CIS  Contact Image Sensor      White Sheet  Separation Roller  Feed Roller  Pick Up Roller  ADF Pad                                                                                  Toner Cartridge           9  Feed Roller                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                OPC Drum  8  Pick Up Roller   9 Fuser Unit  7  Bias Transfer Roller  BTR     60    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    3 4  Preventive Maintenance Check List  The chart outlined below is a general guideline for maintenance  The list is for an average usage of 50    transmitted and received documents per day  Needless to say  the environmental conditions and actual use  will vary these factors  The chart below is for reference only                                                                            preventive Ref  e   ae Tr A eret Ref   Maintenance Parts No   Sheet  Method  Sheet  Procedure Counter  ADF Unit  1  Pick Up Roller 415   10K WSESOIL   aask  cloth  2  Feed Roller 
36.   Control Panel                                         193  6 3  Printer   Receive Mechanism                  193    13    Installation    8  har en 199  Options and Supplies                           208  8 1  Installing the Internet Fax   Email    Network Scanner Module   UE 404093                                           208  8 2  Installing the G3 Communication  Port Kit  UE 407029                              210  8 3  Installing the 2nd Paper Feed Module   UE 409080                                           213  8 4  Installing the Handset Kit   UE 403185      4  obediens 217  8 5  Installing the SD Memory Card   32 MB up to 2 GB                                219  Network Imfomation                              220  9 1  Programming or Retrieving  Parameters via Email                             220  9 2  To Edit the Retrieved or Backup  Internet Parameters File                        224  9 3  To Edit the Retrieved or Backup  Auto Dialer Data File                              226  9 4  Error Message                                       229  Schematic Diagram                               231  10 1  General Circuit Diagram                        231    1 Specifications Table    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200                                                          1 14  Fax  Printer  Network Scanner and Internet Fax Functions  Description  Items UF 8200 AU  UF 7200 AU  Remarks  UF 8300 Others    UF 7300 Others   Multi Function  1 Copy Function Yes  2 Printer Function Ye
37.   File Access Error                    140          UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200       Fax Information Codes                                  Code  Mode   Phase Description of Problem Cause  884     File Access Error   961 RCV LAN  Memory file access error  SC PCB is defective   962 XMT PSTN  Memory file access error  SC PCB is defective   LAN  Memory file access error  SC PCB is defective   Note     When G3 option is installed  check FXB PCB or G3B PCB     141       4 9     Diagnostic Codes  For Facsimile     UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    The 16 digit Diagnostic Code   1  is provided for the service technician to analyze how the communication  was performed  The code is recorded on the Journal     Journal Example       ck ck ck ck ck cc   ee ck ck ck ok     JOURNAL  3k kk eee DATE MMM dd yyyy     2           NO  COMM  PAGES FILE DURATION X R IDENTIFICATION DATE  001 OK 001 001 149 00 00 52 XMT 73215 MMM dd  002 Se 001 001 151 00 00 02 XMT TEST MMM dd  003 Ey 003 003 153 00 00 20 XMT faxenwfaxl MMM   dd  004 OK 003 154 00 00 21 RCV fax nwfaxl rdmg mgcs  MMM dd  005 OK 001 155 00 00 19 RCV 215 MMM dd  006 634 000 003 156 00 00 00 XMT  2216 MMM dd  007 408  003 00 02 14 XMT  2217 MMM dd  050 OK 001 001 160 00 00 16 XMT TEL XMT MMM dd   lt  lt  CONTINUE  gt  gt     PANASONIC        UF XXXX kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk  HEAD OFFICE   kkkkk               TIME 15 00       P 01    1   TIME DIAGNOSTIC  20 04 C8444B0577000000  20 07 01 STN S  LAN  20 09 01 STN S  LAN  20 10 LAN  20 11 C0542B0
38.   Line is disconnected   RCV V 34   D continued ON for long time  During Transmitter is defective   communication  lost loop   current  SC PCB or FXB PCB is defective   503 XMT  B  C   CS of modem is not able to turn ON  FXB PCB is defective   RCV V34   D   during training  Line is disconnected   504   RCV V 34 B Polling is rejected from the remote No polling original is set    Polling  station   505   XMT V 34 B Polling XMT is rejected  No polling original is set    Polling   540   XMT ECM B   Noresponse after transmitting 3rd Incompatible interface   CTC or DCN received   541   XMT ECM D   Noresponse after transmitting 3rd Line is faulty   EOR or received DCN  FXB PCB abnormal   542  XMT ECM D   Noresponse to the 3rd RR Remote unit is abnormal   transmitted or received DCN   543  XMT ECM D   T5timer  60 sec   elapsed without Remote unit is abnormal   MCF   544   XMT ECM D   Stopped Transmission after EOR Line is faulty   Transmission  FXB PCB abnormal   550  RCV ECM C   Timer between frames in phase C has  Defective remote station   elapsed   554   RCV ECM D   Transmitted ERR after receiving Line is faulty   EOR   555   ROV ECM D  Transmitted PIN after receiving EOR   Line is faulty and Operator Call  requested by RX side   570 RCV B Password or machine code did not  match during remote diagnostic  communication   571 XMT B Remote unit did not have the remote  diagnostic function   580 XMT B Sub address transmission to a unit Sub address transmission to a unit that  that ha
39.   Programs the Auto Dialer  4  get abbr password   Retrieves the Auto Dialer Data  5  get jnl password A Retrieves the current Journal data                   220    Where      set    is used to program the data     get    is used to retrieve the data   parameters  represents Internet Parameters   abbr  represents Auto Dialer   ini  represents Journal    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200     password  is the Remote Password programmed in your machine s User Parameters  i e   123456789   Must be enclosed within the parenthesis         The command must be enclosed within the hash     signs     9 1 3    Using a PC to Input the Internet Parameters Remotely    This feature provides a convenient and an easy way to input the Internet Parameters right from your PC by  sending a text email message to your machine The following parameters can be input remotely via a PC   The other parameters must be entered from the machine in the User Parameters       Sender Selection  up to 24 User Names     Default Domain      Selectable Domains  up to 10 additional Domain Names       Remote Password    Manager s Email Address    Relay XMT Password      Relay Domain  up to 10 Domain Names authorized for Relay XMT Request     LDAP Server Name  Available for some countries only        LDAP Login Name  Available for some countries only        LDAP Password  Available for some countries only        LDAP Search Base  Available for some countries only        Community Name  up to 2 Community Names     Device Name
40.   Refer to 2 3 1   4  Top Cover      2  Disconnect 2 Harnesses     3  Remove 3 Screws     4  Remove the LSU Unit  803      49    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    2 3 7   Fuser Unit  Paper Exit Sensor    CAUTION   To prevent from getting burned  do not install  remove  clean or make adjustments when the Fuser Unit is  hot      1  Fuser Unit      1  Remove the Exit Cover  602     Refer to 2 3 1   2 Exit Cover     2  Remove the Inner Cover  606       3  Release the Harness from 1 Clamp    4  Disconnect 2 Harnesses    5  Remove 3 Screws      6  Remove the Fuser Unit  1334       7  Remove 2 Screws    8  Remove the Fuser Holder R  1330         50       UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200   9  Release the Harness from the Fuser Unit    10  Remove 2 Screws    11  Remove the Fuser Holder L  1331      12  Remove 2 Screws   13  Remove the Side Fuser Cover  1306    14  Remove 2 Screws               15  Remove the Left Fuser Cover  1316       16  Remove 2 Black Screws      17  Separate the Upper Fuser Unit      18  Remove the Pressure Roller  1326      51       UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200  Caution   When removing the fixing Screw  fix the LEAD Plate  with a pliers as illustrated  not break the Fuser Lamp  Terminal      19  Remove 2 Screws    20  Remove the Halogen Lamp  1319      Note   Do not Touch the glass portion of the Fuser Lamp with  bare hands  Grease from finger prints will shorten its  life cycle  use isopropyl alcohol to clean finger prints      21  Shift the Fuser Roller and remove the Lef
41.   a    keys   If you wish to select another code number  select the    w        a    keys   i  Press the  Set  key   i  Enter the desired function code number and press the  Set  key   When the  Clear  key is pressed  the selected code input will not be accepted     Press the  Stop  key   4  Press the    Function    and the    Clear    keys sequentially to exit the service mode     4    Reboot the machine after setting the parameter s  to activate the setting s                                                         F5 Mode  No  Item Function Default Setting  00   Not Used  01  FREQUENCY DESIRED 0   Auto 1  for Europe   1 50Hz 2  for USA   Canada   2  60Hz  for Taiwan   02 03   Not Used  04  LSU OFF TIMER 1  5sec  1  2 10 sec   3 15 sec   4 20 sec   6 30 sec   8 40 sec   10   50 sec   12   60 sec   05  Not Used  06  JOB TRACKING SERVER 0  NO 0  1  YES  07 09   Not Used  10  EXIT TRAY LIMITATION 0   None 0  1   Accumulate  2  Job  11 12   Not Used  13   PAPER OUT INDICATOR 0  On 0  1  Off  14 PAPER SIZE  TRAY1  4  A4 R 4  for Europe   Others   12  LEGAL 14  for USA   Canada   14   LETTER R  15 PAPER SIZE  TRAY2  4  A4 R 4  for Europe   Others   12  LEGAL 14  for USA   Canada   14   LETTER R  16 39   Not Used  40  DOUBLE COUNT 0 No 0  2 LGL                157       UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200                                                                               F5 Mode  No  Item Function Default Setting  41  COUNT UP TIMING 0   At feed 1  1  At exit  42  Not Used  43  KE
42.   if it was used for  updating the Firmware  etc       When servicing the machine  ask customer s permission to back up data for the following reasons     a  Deleting the customer information during service   b  Keep the customer information for service   c  The risk of losing the data during service     Before servicing  back up the machine s data to prevent losing the settings     a  Back up the setting data onto an SD Memory Card using the Service Mode    F9 11  Param Backup  to SD     b  Back up the setting data onto a PC via a Network using    Network Configuration Editor     c  Print out the Service Parameters   Customer information       Service Technicians are required to keep the PC data the SD Memory Card including the machine and    the customer s information in a confidential and safe place  Delete the customer s data from the SD  Memory Card or from the PC to maintain security of the machine       When disposing transferring this machine  delete all of the customer s information     a  Delete the data in the F ROM using Service Mode    F9 06  Shipment Set    b  Delete the data in the SD Memory Card on the SC PCB  Physically break the SD Memory Card or  completely delete the data using a data deleting software       To secure the customer s information  make sure the Fax number E mail address is set correctly in the    Check  amp  Call feature       Service Manuals and Installation Instructions are essential for maintaining security of the machine     Service Tech
43.   key first and press the    Function        Clear    keys sequentially to exit the Service    Mode   Unplug the AC Power Cord to turn off power   Remove the SD Memory Card from the machine       Reinstall the DATA SD Card into the machine     Plug the AC Power Cord to turn on power   Reconnect the Telephone Line  LAN and or USB Cables     Note     Repeat steps 8  to 13  to continue formatting other SD Card s      67    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    3 5 7  Firmware Emergency Recovery    The easiest method to recover the firmware in an Emergency Recovery routine is to use the Master SD  Memory Card method  1 SD Memory Card required if the SD Memory Card capacity is Large enough size  for all necessary Firmware     If the Master SD Memory Card includes all necessary firmware as a package  all necessary firmware can  be recovered once  except the G3 Fax option    After recovering  if optional G3 firmware is required  use the Network Firmware Update Tool  the Local  Firmware Update Tool or use the Master SD Memory Card to update the firmware selecting the  Auto  Mode  to the required level    If the unit does not boot up properly  follow the steps below     1  Turn the power OFF   Before proceeding to the next step  you must create the Master SD Memory Card  read the appropriate  sections first 3 5 5      2  Turn the power On while holding the  ENERGY SAVER  button    3  When the green lamp on the front panel turns On  release the  ENERGY SAVER  button     The unit is now ready t
44.   received in   Transmitter ID is registered as a Junk  Phase B  Fax  JUNK is printed as the Information  Code on the Comm  Journal   456 RCV B Received relay transfer request or  confidential document to distribute to  an end receiving station or all  confidential mailboxes are used   457 RELAY B Remote unit does not have Relayed  XMT XMT or Confidential Comm   COMF  capability   XMT   POLL  459 RCV C Failed training in Phase C  Line quality is poor   Training signal is  distorted due to line noise   SC PCB or FXB PCB is defective   490 RCV C   Sum of error lines exceeded the limit   Line quality is poor    Function Parameter No  70  of 64 SC PCB or FXB PCB is defective   lines   494 RCV C Interval between two EOLs was more   Transmitter is defective   than 10 sec  when receiver received  Line quality is poor   EOL is damaged  message data  due to line noise   SC PCB or FXB PCB is defective   495 XMT C   During reception  CD turned OFF or  Line is disconnected   RCV continued ON for long time  During Transmitter is defective   communication  lost loop   current  SC PCB or FXB PCB is defective   496 XMT C   CS of modem is not able to turn ON   FXB PCB is defective                    137       UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200       Fax Information Codes                                                                      Code Mode  Phase Description of Problem Cause  501 XMT  B Remote unit does not have  RCV V 34  compatible Modem   502 XMT  B  C  During reception  CD turned OFF or 
45.   then reconnect the  Telephone Line Cable    10  Reconnect the LAN   USB Cable s  if disconnected    11  Install the Internet Fax Software into the PC by  following the prompts of the installation Wizard   For details  refer to the Operating Instructions       209    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    8 2  Installing the G3 Communication Port Kit  UE 407029   8 2 1  Contents    Visually check the condition and contents of the box for completeness  or for any shipping damage before  starting the installation    Remove all tapes  and the packing materials used to secure the units during shipment    After unpacking  dispose of the packing materials appropriately                                   No  Qty  Description Remarks  1 1 G3 Assembly  2 1 Telephone Line Cable  3 1 G3 Line Label  4 3 Screw  M3 x 6   hmm  5 1 Harness Clamp  6 1 Installation Instructions This document             S  yf vi    e       lt  _  Note     Refer to the Parts Manual for Part Number s   Packing  and Accessories in details     8 2 2  Installation  CAUTION   Unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation      1  Remove 1 Screw  and the SD Card Cover    2  Remove 7 Screws    3  Remove the Rear Cover     Caution   Remove the SD Memory Card if it was installed        210       UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200     4  Cut off the Protective Tab covering the G3 Line Jack  on the Rear Cover     5  Attach the G3 Line Label onto the Rear Cover as  illustrated      6  Loosen 6 Screws    7  Remove the SC Cover      
46.  168 1 253 192 168 1 253                      When the Unit at 192 168 3 5 attempts to communicate with the Unit at 192 168 1 x  IP performs the  ANDing process to find two things  The local network ID is 192 168 3 0  and the destination network ID  is not  This means  that the destination host is not on the local network     IP  is responsible to find a route to the remote network  and therefore  it consults the routing table   Here  the local host normally determines that the next step in the route is the Default Gateway  and  sends the packet to router R1     The router R1  receives the packet  After determining that the packet is for another host and not the  router itself  it checks the routing table  It finds the route to 192 168 1 0 and sends the packet through  the interface to the Unit at 192 168 1 x  which receives the packet  This is a simple route that took only  a single hop     When another network is added as the number of hosts grows  it gets complicated  and the systems on  the most distant networks cannot communicate  When the router receives a packet in this case  it  cannot find a route to the remote network  It then discards the packet and a message indicating   destination host unreachable    is sent to the originator     Here  is where the ROUTE command line utility is useful when dealing with more than two networks   and is used by Administrators to statically manage a route table by adding  deleting  changing and  clearing the route table  It has a nu
47.  2 VDC Power Supply   1 2V  Paper Detect  Sensor PC Board  CN805 5  CN734 2 LDPLPOSISEN   Registration   1 2V   1 2V  Paper Detect  Sensor PC Board  CN805 4  CN734 3 5VGND Registration  Ground  Paper Detect  Sensor PC Board ov  CN805 3  CN734 4 pREGSEN Registration  V Registration Sensor  Paper Detect Registration  9V   Signal  Sensor PC Board Sensor ON  CN805 2 po SETI  CN734 5 nPLPOSISEN   Registration  V Paper Lead Position  Paper Detect ee E  etect  Sensor PC Board Sensor ON  CN805 1 ER za  CN734 6 LDEXITSEN  Paper Exit 12V  1 2 VDC Energy Saver  Sensor PC Board   Control  CN803 3  CN734 7 5VGND Paper Exit Ground  Sensor PC Board  CN803 2 ov  CN734 8 nEXITSEN Paper Exit EXIT Sensor Signal  Sensor PC Board Exit nav  CN803 1 Sensor ON      UN  CN734 9  5V Thermistor 2  5 VDC Power Supply   5V  Sleep  amp   Shutdown      0V  CN734 10  TH Thermistor 1 5V Fuser Thermistor Signal     OV  CN736  piki bei Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function  CN736 2 5VGND No Paper Sensor Ground          OV                90          UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200                                                                                                 SG   n Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function  CN736 2 PNON No Paper Sensor 45V No Paper Sensor Signal  No Paper  Sensor ON oV  CN736 1 LDPNON No Paper Sensor 41 2V  1 2 VDC Energy Saver  i Control  CN737  ps Ns Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function  CN737 1  24VIR Main Motor 7  24 VDC Power Supply   24 VDC throug
48.  3 1   3 Control Panel Unit      4  Remove the Top Cover  601     Refer to 2 3 1   4  Top Cover      5  Pull the Paper Tray out     6  Remove 2 Screws      7  Remove 2 Screws      8  Release the Speaker Harness from 1 Clamp    9  Disconnect the Speaker Harness    10  Remove the Front Cover Assembly     37          UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200     6  ADF Drive Assembly      1  Remove the Rear Cover  604     Refer to 2 3 1   1 Rear Cover      2  Remove the Exit Cover  602     Refer to 2 3 1   2 Exit Cover      3  Remove the Control Panel Unit    Refer to 2 3 1   3 Control Panel Unit      4  Remove the Top Cover  601     Refer to 2 3 1   4  Top Cover      5  Remove the Front Cover Assembly    Refer to 2 3 1   5 Front Cover Assembly      6  Loosen 6 Screws     7  Remove the SC Cover  714       8  Release 2 Harnesses from 2 Clamps and 1 Edge  Saddle     9  Disconnect 2 Harnesses on the SC PC Board   CN519  CN520      Caution   When reconnecting the Harnesses  insert the Power 2  Harness into the Edge Saddle as illustrated  to comply  with EMI regulations      10  Remove 6 Screws    11  Remove the MJR PC Board Assembly     38             UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200   12  Release 5 Harnesses from 5 Clamps and 1 Edge  Saddle    13  Disconnect 5 Harnesses on the SPC PC Board   CN701  CN706  CN709  CN710 and CN714       14  Release the Harness from 1 Clamp  Edge Saddle and  1 Flat Clamp     15  Disconnect the Harness on the SC PC Board   CN502       16  Remove 3 Screws on the Rear Side   
49.  4 770 Hz   1209 Hz  6 1336 Hz 9 770 Hz   1336 Hz  7 1477 Hz 6 770 Hz   1477 Hz  8 1633 Hz 7 852 Hz   1209 Hz   8 852 Hz   1336 Hz  9 852 Hz   1477 Hz  K 941 Hz t 1209 Hz    941 Hz   1477 Hz                         183    5 2 5 4     Binary Signal  V 34     UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    This Service Mode is used to check the binary signal output  Signals can be output to the line using the  following procedure   V 34     Press the    w        a    keys to select  4  MODEM Test      w    Press the  Set  key     wv    Press the    w        a    keys to select the    4  V34 MODEM TEST       We    Press the  Set  key     Press the desired    w       w    number and press the  Start  key     Press the  Stop  key twice to exit the service mode     Binary Signal Table                                                                                     Number Signals Number Signals Number Signals  01 V34 2400 sr 2400 bps 22 V34 3000 sr 9600 bps 43 V34 3429 sr 4800 bps  02 V34 2400 sr 4800 bps 23 V34 3000 sr 12000 bps 44 V34 3429 sr 7200 bps  03 V34 2400 sr 7200 bps 24 V34 3000 sr 14400 bps 45 V34 3429 sr 9600 bps  04 V34 2400 sr 9600 bps 25 V34 3000 sr 16800 bps 46 V34 3429 sr 12000 bps  05 V34 2400 sr 12000 bps 26 V34 3000 sr 19200 bps 47 V34 3000 sr 19200 bps  06 V34 2400 sr 14400 bps 27 V34 3000 sr 21600 bps 48 V34 3429 sr 16800 bps  07 V34 2400 sr 16800 bps 28 V34 3000 sr 24000 bps 49 V34 3429 sr 19200 bps  08 V34 2400 sr 19200 bps 29 V34 3000 sr 26400 bps 50 V34 3429 sr 21600 bps
50.  4 k   5     6     7     8     9 z   A     B     C ni   D si   E z   F s                148    14th Digit     Not used defined    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200                                                                   Fax Diagnostic Codes  Definition  Data Color Comm   0 Mono  1    2 a  3    4    5    6    7    8 E  9    A    B  gt   C a  D    E    F               15th Digit     Not used defined    16th Digit     Not used defined                                                                      Fax Diagnostic Codes  Definition  Data  Paper Length Manufacturer Code   0 A4 Current  1 B4 Current  2 A3 Current  3 co Current  4 A4 New  5 B4 New  6 A3 New  7 co New  8 z z   9 5     A E E   B E     C z     D z z   E H H   F              149          UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    4 10  Troubleshooting  For Printer     4 10 1     Checking the Basics    This section explains how to solve problems including error messages  or unexpected printing results   If the Printing System is not printing or working as expected  and if you are not sure what to do  start your  troubleshooting by checking the basics below       Ensure that the Ethernet LAN  10Base T   100Base TX  Cable is connected properly    Ensure that the Internet Parameters are correct     Ensure that the Unit is turned On     Ensure that the Paper is set properly in the Unit     No error message is displayed on the Unit     Try printing a test page from the printer driver properties dialog box    4 10 2  Document Does N
51.  8 3 2  Installation    CAUTION   Unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation      1  Remove 1 Screw  and the SD Card Cover    2  Remove 7 Screws    3  Remove the Rear Cover     Caution   Remove the SD Memory Card if it was installed        213    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200   4  Remove 3 Screws    5  Remove the Rear Cover      6  Place the machine on top of the 2nd Paper Feed  Module      7  Install the Bracket R2 on the Left Rear Side as  illustrated    8  Secure the Bracket R2 with 2 Screws  M4 x 8       9  Install the Bracket R1 on the Right Rear Side as  illustrated    10  Secure the Bracket R1 with 2 Screws  M4 x 8         214    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200     11  Insert the Harness into the Clamp         12  Connect the Harness to CN724 on the SPC PC  Board    13  Secure the Harness with 2 Flat Clamps      14  Open the 1st and 2nd Paper Trays      15  Install the Bracket F on the Left Front Side as  illustrated    16  Secure the Bracket F with 2 Screws  M3 x 8         215             UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200   17  Install the Bracket F on the Right Front Side as  illustrated    18  Secure the Bracket F with 2 Screws  M3 x 8     19  Close the 1st Paper Tray      20  Remove 1 Screw     21  Store 1 Screw removed in step  20  into the 2nd  Paper Tray as illustrated     22  Insert Letter A4 size paper into 2nd Paper Tray  close  the 2nd Paper Tray      23  Proceed with the installation of other options   If finished  reinstall all Harnesses and Covers     Note  
52.  BRYDES  UNDGA EKSPONERING FOR STRALEN  2 WIENER BPIOAG EFT     KLASSE 38 USYNLIG LASERSTRALING NAR MASKINEN ER APEN OG SIKKERHETSLAS BRYTES  UNNG   EKSPONERING FOR STRALEN  e                                                             CLASS 38 OSYNLIG LASER   PPEN OCH NAR SAKERMETSSPARAAR AR URKOPPLADE  UNDVIK EXPONERING AV LASER BABBERMT   ATFRRREGKRAME  SSICLASSSBT RN  ATRRGXHT ut  BSSRREMRRAUN  SIECAGDTNREARM  AGAIN gai S   SIRO MOS 38 EN SON js BAAS AH BA RB O COLO AO BHM LOSI YER SS HUND  resamos   eg  poet MA UALS CN MEH BS be zo tit        4 389 AO 30i FB 9 o Oud   san ULA ZA NUUS    ceems  Sn 77 ady rt  OTF    v  tamo   E LRRTO SEME                 mmm d                                                 19 06 in  484 mm                                      17 32 in  440 mm  17 72 in  450 mm   17 48 in  444 mm  19 80 in  503 mm                                29    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    Main Unit    3  Space Requirements                                                                                                                                                    ww 001  Ut v6      ww 004  ut v6      en   ww OpZ  ut ep 6      ww OpZ  u  cp 6               E E ZEE nee dih      BOB we ws E  E     i E E  t  E Sc bb E  oo S 3 3 OO  Fan msn    oo       oo   E  OO co OO co o  00   co   e  oo   oo        E      0 0     E o     oo  b oo Indy  gt   J S 1  2000  N 5      i ree Hot    E 0 50 0  2 Dall  oo co oo 0050      2  0000  o o  Ona  ul 0g   uu goc  u 086b fe   ww 0
53.  CN709 1  24V STAMP 424V  24 VDC Power Supply  Solenoid 1  CN709 2 MGND STAMP Ground  Solenoid 2  OV  CN710  ps Aen Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function  CN710 1 nB PH Motor 1 424V PH Motor Control Signal  OV  CN710 2 B PH Motor 3 4D4V PH Motor Control Signal  OV                                  83             UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200                                                                                                                                                    ge   e Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function  CN710 3 nA PH Motor 4 424V PH Motor Control Signal  OV  CN710 4 A PH Motor 6 DAY PH Motor Control Signal  OV  CN712  yim ia Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function  CN712 1  24V LVPS 424V Sleep Mode  24 VDC Power Supply  CN103 1 op  Shutdown  Mode OV  CN712 2  24V LVPS 424V Sleep Mode  24 VDC Power Supply  CN103 2  awy S EE  Shutdown  Mode OV  CN712 3  24V LVPS 424V Sleep Mode  24 VDC Power Supply  CN103 3 on PE  Shutdown  Mode OV  CN712 4  24V LVPS 424V Sleep Mode  24 VDC Power Supply  CN103 4 none a  Shutdown  Mode OV  CN712 5 MGND LVPS Ground  CN103 5  OV  CN712 6 MGND LVPS Ground  CN103 6  OV  CN712 7 MGND LVPS Ground  CN103 7  OV  CN712 8  5V LVPS  5 VDC Power Supply  CN103 8 Sleep amp   77  Shutdown  u 0V  CN712 9  5V LVPS  5 VDC Power Supply  CN103 9 Sleep amp   V  Shutdown  u QV  CN712 10  GND LVPS Ground  CN103 10  OV                      84          UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200                                      
54.  COPY  No  F5 02 s       F5 52 DEPT  COUNTER  FAX  No  F5 03 K owe ses Wn E F5 53       r e e   F5 04 LSU OFF TIMER 5Sec E5 54 s a 00    F5 05        F5 55  s w 4 e s   F5 06 JOB TRACKING SERVER No F5b 56          F5 07 ss s ae F5 57 e  asa   F5 08         F5 58           F5 09        F5 59 OPER ADD TONER ALARM Continue  F5 10 EXIT TRAY LIMITATION None F5 60 AUTO TRAY SELECTION Yes  F5 11        F5 61             F5 12 g   ws F5 62 si  usi sei s   F5 13 PAPER OUT INDICATOR On F5 63 E NES   F5 14 PAPER SIZE  TRAY1  LETTER R F5 64 DEPT  COUNTER  SCAN  No  F5 15 PAPER SIZE  TRAY2  LETTER R F5 65 DEPT  COUNTER  PRINT  No  F5 16        F5 66           F5 17 EA Se SAM Die c F5 67   Lee e       F5 18           F5 68             F5 19         F5 69 REDUCE N IN 1 SPACE No  F5 20        F5 70 PM CYCLE No             KREKRKKKKKKKKKA PR EE INFORMATION LIST        4e4ee4   DATE MMM dd yyyy     TIME12 01     P 02    F6 00        F6 50  gt        F6 01           F6 51 PHOTO IMAGE DENSITY 0  F6 02         F6552 ege ge e  F6 03         F6553           aa  F6 04 PRINTER REGISTRATION 0 F6 54 TEXT MODE CONTRAST 0  F6 05        F6 55 w a o si e  F6 06         F6 56 PHOTO MODE CONTRAST 0  F6 07 REGISTRATION VOID 5 F6 57         F6 08        F6 58          F6 09 TRAIL EDGE PRT TIM  4 F6 59         F6 10        F6 60         F6 11 SIDE ADJUST  TRAY 1  I F6 61            F6 12 SIDE ADJUST  TRAY 2  1 F6 62          F6 13           F6 63          F6 14       F6 64          F6   15        F6 65         
55.  F6 16        F6 66      a   F6 17         F6 67          F6 18           F6 68            F6 19        F6 69  STAMP POSITION ADJ  0  F6 20         F6 70         F6 21           F6 71         F6 22          F6 72               153    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    Machine Setup Information List  Sample        RRR KKK KKK MACHINE SETUP INFORMATION    seeieciek   DATE MMM dd yyyy     TIME 12 01     P 01    1 MACHINE INFORMATION  MACHINE NAME   UF xxxx  MAC ADDRESS DOXXXXXXXXXXXX  SERIAL NUMBER    2 FIRMWARE VERSION    SC DOXXXXXXXXXX  SC BOOT   VXXX   PNL   OVXXXXXX  SCANNER  SDR    Vxxxxx  PRINTER   VXXXXX   FAX MODEM   Ver XXXX    2nd G3 Board    3 MEMORY CAPACITY    PAGE MEMORY   32 MB  SORT MEMORY   16 MB  FAX MEMRY   12 MB  4 OPTION  2nd PAPER FEED MODULE   No  NETWORK SCANNER   Yes  EMATL   Yes  2nd G3 Board   Yes    5 ERROR LOG    TOTAL PRINT COUNT   503  NO  DATE  amp  TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT NO  DATE  amp  TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT  01 MMM dd yyyy 11 11 J97 XX 00000008  02 MMM dd yyyy 11 31 J44 XX 00000140     See Remarks      Panafax PCC      ek ee kk UF XXXX FRR EKER KKK ke eek DOC Manual a kk k ke ke a 123   x xk kk e e e e x          154    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    F7 Total Counter List  Sample        KRRRKKKKKKKKKKA PT TOTAL COUNTER LIST        44e 4    DATE MMM dd yyyy     TIME12 01      F7 01 APPLICATION PASSWORD s   F7 02 TOTAL COUNT   295  F7 03 PM COUNT DH 295  F7 04         J   F7 05            F7 06 OPC DRUM COUNT    295  F7 07 PROCESS UNIT COUNT 
56.  Firmware Update Tool you must be logged on with Administrator    privileges   2  From the Windows Desktop  double click on the x  Network Fi rmware Update shortcut icon to start This wizard guides you through the process of programming the machine firmware remotely via a LAN   the Network Firmware Update Tool  Boro vov begin  k ra a Gen Operates Puen orate ne ond  Note  lf a shortcut was not created to the FTP Password on this application are set correctly     3  Make sure the remote unit is not in an operating condition  Copying or Printing etc          Windows Desktop  click the Start button on the  Taskbar  point to  Al  Programs    Panasonic Panasonic Firmware Update  pereu are emisie en ip FC niie ti tamto te y u  then select Network Firmware Update Tool  NS    Click  Next gt       Click  Next  to begin     Copyright C  2003  Panasonic Communications Co   Ltd   Version 3 00       Note    1  Make sure the device password  Service Mode F7 01   Key Operator ID Code or Operation  Password  on the device and the password on this application are set correctly    Caution    1  Make sure the device is not in use  i e  Copying or Printing     2  Do not run other applications on this PC while it is transferring the firmware data to the device   otherwise a communication error may occur    3  If using a laptop for the update it is recommended the laptop be connected to a power outlet to  prevent battery drain and or automatic standby mode  which may cause the update to fail    4  
57.  If  Send at once  is checked  all firmware Puedo o RN o ee EE  will be sent at once  and then erase  write and Pelee Rie FDL Mr eeng SFDLZSPCAAV 10000   reboot are performed for the entire package         If  Send at once  is unchecked  each firmware  ec              2    bo x z   SC  PNL  SPC  etc   is transmitted separately    vo   V00006   V00003   and each time the unit erases  writes and reboots        olje zhe zi E  in the normal mode for each independent   update        This  Send at once   function cannot be used if  the model is DP 6010   4510   3510  firmware  type is PCL or PS  and the unit SC version is  V1 xxxx        Confirm the destination device s  again  X    Set timer if necessary   Click  Next  to start updating the firmware code     Set timer communication if necessary  otherwise  leave unchecked     Then click  Next gt          Timer       Date   4 J  E     mm dd   Time   4 z     e z  temm       10     11     12     Network Firmware Update Tool  LAN     Data is then transferred to the Spooler  and the LXER  xi  u pdate is started  The result of the Firmware Update    e Data has been spooled to the spooler  m  The S poo le rscreen a p pea rs au to ma ti ca   ly  Lo ed cover EE progress to the remote unit in the spooler     showing the progress of the data transfer     The spooler will take time to open depending on  the number of addresses to update           Ta Spooler   0  x  EN    Spooler Help  Jobs in queue 4      Fax No  Address   Function Percentage
58.  Is the Toner Cartridge No  operational  Y  Yes Replace the Toner Cartridge   re  V  Are the Fuser  and Pressure No  Roller surfaces clean  Y  Yes  Clean  or replace the rollers   START  Y  Is the recording paper damp  Yes    No  Replace the recording paper   Y  Are there any foreign particles Yes  or damage in the paper path  Y  No Remove any obstructions  and  clean the paper path       Yes  Is the recording paper skewing     No Ensure the paper is set under the  Paper Separation Clips in the  Cassette   Yes  Are there any foreign particles    in the Fuser Unit   Are the Fuser Rollers normal           No       Y  1  Remove any foreign particles  or  clean the stains   2  Replace the Fuser Unit                       111    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    4 3 14  Poor Printed Copy Quality    CSTART  gt                                                                                   Is the Test Pattern printout No  in Service Mode 3 normal  3  1  Replace the SC PCB   Yes 2  Replace the Laser Unit  LSU    3  Replace the Power Supply Unit   4  Replace the Toner Cartridge    Laf  Y  Make a local copy       No  Is the printed copy correct     TA Check the Transmission Block    CIS PCB  and SDR PCB   x  Y          Perform a receiving test  with the reference fax unit           Y  A No  Is the received copy correct                      Yes 1  Check the SC PCB    2  Check the FXB PCB    3  Check the Telephone Line Cable   4  Replace the SC PCB                    z    Is a poor copy pr
59.  Lasers    The optical laser system employed by this photocopier is completely sealed by a protective housing  and an  external cover  Therefore  the laser beam will not stray  or leak during photocopying operation   However  when servicing the photocopier  take the following precautions     1  Do not insert any screwdrivers  or other tools that have high reflective properties into the path of the  laser    2  Before servicing the photocopier  take off any watches  rings  or other metallic objects that you may be  wearing   This is to avoid the danger of the laser entering the eye by reflecting off the metallic objects  being worn     Since the laser beam cannot be seen with the naked eye  please follow the above precautions for  maximum safety     57    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    3 1 5  Data Security Precautions    1     10     11     12     13     The Service Mode Password is essential for maintaining security of the machine  Service Technicians  must change the factory default password to the new password and record store it in a safe place out  of the reach of others       The Service Mode is used by Service Technicians to perform maintenance and or repairs  as well as to    maintain security of the machine  Service Technicians must not leave the machine in the Service Mode  after servicing       Service technicians are required to keep the SD Memory Card including the Firmware in a confidential    and safe place  Make sure to remove the SD Memory Card from the machine
60.  Low Toner LED Control  CN501 1 bi  OV  CN729  pode da Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function  CN729 1 nTESEN Low Toner 45V Low Toner Sensor Signal  Sensor Low Toner  CN803 2 Detection  KE y  CN729 2 5VGND Low Toner Ground  Sensor  CN803 1 ov                      88          UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200                                                                                              CN730  ps Ae Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function  CN730 1  24V LSU Motor 5  24 VDC Power Supply   24V  Sleep  amp   Shutdown  u QV  CN730 2 24VGND LSU Motor 4 Ground  OV  CN730 3 nSNRCTL LSU Motor 3 LSU Motor Control  LSU Motor  5V Sianal  Control 9  Enable ov  CN730 4 nSNRLD LSU Motor 2 LSU Motor Lock Signal  LSU Motor  5V  Lock     Detection oV  CN730 5 nSNRCLK LSU Motor 1 45V LSU Motor Clock  OV  CN731  ps Ns Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function  CN731 1 PUSOL CTL  Pick Up m Pick Up Solenoid Control  Solenoid 1 Pick Up    Solenoid  ON ON  CN731 2 24VGND Pick Up Ground  Solenoid 2  OV  CN732  ps dvi Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function  CN732 1 REGSOL CTL   Registration 24V Registration Solenoid  Solenoid 1 Registration Control  Solenoid  ON ov  CN732 2 24VGND Registration Ground  Solenoid 2  OV                   89       UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200                                                                                              CN734  yis ipis Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function  CN734 1 LDRELSEN   Registration   1
61.  Motor Lock Signal  nSPCWAKE Wake Up Control   nTECTL Low Toner LED Control   nTESEN Low Toner Sensor Signal   nTOP Paper Top Detection Signal   nTR Transfer    Voltage PWM Pulse   nTRCTL HVPS Transfer Control      Change   nVIDEO Video Signal   nWAKE Wake Up Signal   pADF DOOR ADF Door Open Close Signal  pCMLD Line Switching Relay Drive Signal  pENABLE OP 2nd Feeder Motor Control Signal  pEXTRYSN Not Use   pG3BRST G3B Reset Signal   pLEDBON bLED ON OFF Control             73    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200       Glossary of Electrical Abbreviations       Signal Name    Function                                                                                  pLEDGON gLED ON OFF Control   pLEDRON rLED ON OFF Control   PNLRXD PNL Reception Data Signal   PNLTXD PNL Transmission Data Signal   PNON No Paper Sensor Signal   pREGSEN Registration Sensor Signal   pSAVE Power Save Control Signal   pSCNRST Scanner   pSENTIM Scanner Horizontal Synchronous Signal  pSREQ Scanner Request Signal   PUSOL CTL Pick Up Solenoid Control   PUSOL CTL1 Pick Up Solenoid Control   pVREQ Scanner Vertical Synchronous Request Signal  REGSOL CTL Registration Solenoid Control   SCLDO IIC Bus Clock   SDAO IIC Bus Data   SEL CIS  Resolution Selection   SI Scan Data Frame Signal   SIG Scanner Serial Data   SPCIIC IIC Bus SDR Interrupt   SPKOUT Line Signal Dial Tone Ringer Key Tone  SXD Serial Data Status   TH Fuser Thermistor Signal   VCC  5VDC Power Supply   VREF Dark Reference Control             74    UF 830
62.  OV  CN518 2 SPCIIC SPC PCB a IIC Bus SDR Interrupt  P716 9        ov  CN518 3 nSPCWAKE  SPC PCB ET Wake Up Control  P716 8 l  OV                   80          UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200                                                                                                                                                                                                       e Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function  CN518 4 IICSCL SPC PCB 3 3V IIC Bus Clock  P716 7 m  OV  CN518 5 GND SPC PCB Ground  P716 6  OV  CN518 6 IICSDA SPC PCB V IIC Bus Data  P716 5 i      OV  CN518 7   pSCNRST   SPC PCB RESET Scanner  P716 4  3 3V          EM OV  CN518 8 pSREQ SPC PCB 3 3V Scanner Request Signal  P716 3 p  E OV  CN518 9 pVREQ SPC PCB 5V Scanner Vertical  P716 2 P Synchronous Request  oV Signal  CN518 10  pSENTIM SPC PCB 33V Scanner Horizontal  P716 1 ia Synchronous Signal  EE OV  CN519  ar Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function  CN519 1  5VP MJR PCB 45V  5VDC Power Supply  CN302 7  CN519 2 GND SPC PCB Ground  CN302 6  OV  CN519 3 nHKOFF SPC PCB     5y   External Phone Off Hook  CN302 5 Detection Signal  Off Hook  CN519 4 nRING SPC PCB V Ring Detection Signal  CN302 4 s  OV  CN519 5 pCMLD SPC PCB 3 8V Line Switching Relay  CN302 3   Drive Signal             3 OV                81          UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200                                                                                                    a Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Funct
63.  PC Board  1806        LED Module and LCD Module       7  Remove 2 Screws     8  Remove the LED Module     9  Remove the PNL3 Board  1805  from the Lamp  Cover     UF 8300 8200 Only   10  Remove the LCD Module  111         UF 8300 8200 Only    46    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    2 3 4  PC Board     lt MJR PC Board gt      1  Remove the Rear Cover  604     Refer to 2 3 1   1 Rear Cover     2  Remove the SC Cover  714     Refer to 2 3 1   6 ADF Drive Assembly     3  Release all Harnesses from 1 Clamp and 1 Egde  Saddle on the MJR Bracket    4  Remove 2 Screws    5  Remove the MJR PC Board  1702     6  Remove 6 Screws    7  Remove the MJR Bracket  715     Refer to 2 3 1   6 ADF Drive Assembly       lt SC PC Board gt      8  Remove 1 Screw    9  Remove the Ground Plate  713     10  Disconnect all Harnesses on the SC PC Board    11  Remove 2 Clamps from the SC Bracket    12  Remove 8 Screws    13  Remove the SC PC Board  1701       14  Release all Harnesses from all Clamps and Egde  Saddles on the SC Bracket     15  Remove 8 Screws     16  Remove the SC Bracket  708       lt SPC PC Board gt      17  Disconnect all Harnesses on the SPC PC Board    18  Remove 4 Screws    19  Remove the SPC PC Board  1704         47    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200          r          lt LvPs gt   G   S v  20  Disconnect 2 Harnesses on the LVPS  CN103     D  I    CN102     21  Remove 4 Screws    22  Disconnect the Harnesses on the LVPS  CN101  as  illustrated   Caution   When reinstalling the LVPS  hook
64.  Parameter Backup  and Sending a Received File during a fatal printer error    10  FIRMWARE VERSION Displays Firmware Version for SC  SC Boot  Panel  etc                             166    5 2 3     UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    Fax Service Mode 1  Function Parameter Setting     Use the following procedure to change the function parameters     Enter the desired code number and press the  Start  key   If you wish to select another code number  press the    w        a    keys     Y    Select the desired function code and press the  Start  key   When the  Clear  key is pressed  the selected code input will not be accepted     Press the  Stop  key   4    Press the    Stop    key to exit the service mode        Function Parameter Table                         No  Parameter Selections Function  000  MON TEL DIAL  1   Monitor Selects whether the machine starts to TX   2   Tel Dial automatically during On Hook dialing    Monitor   Start to TX after pressing Start   TEL DIAL   Start to TX automatically   001  ALARM STATUS  1   Off Selects the No Paper or No Toner alarm status    2   Timer OFF   Alarm is disabled    3   Constant Timer   Alarm will shut off after 6 seconds    Constant   Alarm will not stop until  Stop  is pressed   or the error is cleared corrected   002  STOP COMM  1   Off Selects whether the machine prompts to print the  JRNL 2  On COMM  Journal when the printout condition is set to  INC and Stop is pressed during communication   003  CONTINUOUS 1   Off Selects whethe
65.  RRR KKK DATE MMM dd yyyy       TIME 19 02     eee    LAST PRINT    ERROR    SERIAL NUMBER  CUSTOMER ID    FIRMWARE VERSION    SC  PNL    PRINTER    SCANNER  SDR     TRANSMIT COUNTER  RECEIVE COUNTER       COPY COUNTER    PRINT COUNTER       01 MMM dd yyyy 15 38 J00  02 MMM dd yyyy 10 48 J02      MMM dd yyyy 15 38 J00 00 00000016      1234567890123456      UF xxxx    VXXXXXX    VXXXXX    VXXXXX      000475    000398    000083    000016    ROR CODE RRROR COUNT   NO DATE  amp  TIME ERROR CODE RRROR COUNT    00 00000016    00 00000016       Panafax PCC    Xe x xx UF XXXX kkk ke ek kk kk       DOC Manual   o k kkk x     123      xxkk kk       178    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    5 2 4 4  All Document Files  Print the document files from the Flash Memory     Press the    w        a    keys to select    3  Print Report List    Press the  Set  key   Press the    w        a    keys to select    5  All Document Files      w    Press the  Set  key        w    Press the  Stop  key to exit the service mode     5 2 4 5  Protocol Trace  Print a Protocol Trace Report for the previous communication     Press the    w        a    keys to select    3  Print Report List    Press the  Set  key   Press the    y     A  keys to select    6  Protocol Trace      Press lie    Set    key   Press the  v     A  keys to select    1  L 1      Press the  Set  key        w    Press the  Stop  key to exit the service mode     kok KKK KKK PROTOCOL LOG  REPORT seeeeeoeeeeee    DATE MMM dd yyyy       TIME 16 56 
66.  Roles   ocal print available  Phone Book Registration Yes Via Email or Network Address  from PC Editor  4 Internet Fax Parameters Yes  Registration via Email  5 Internet Delivery Yes With MDN  Confirmation  6 Network Scanning Yes 600 dpi  7 Network Printing  LPR   LPD Yes 600 dpi  GDI Yes 600 dpi  PDL No  8 DHCP Client Yes  9 LDAP Mes p Directory Access  10 TIFF Viewer Yes Selectable  PDMS   TIFF Viewer  11 NYSE Yes For USA and Canada only  Certainty  1 Comm  Journal  w   Image  Yes  ID  1 Email Address Yes       24       1 1 5     UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    SD Memory Card    SD Memory Card Format Structure and Allocation by Function       SD Memory Card Format Structure                                                 SD Memory Size 32 MB 64MB   128 MB 256 MB 512 MB 1 GB 2 GB  EUM er 1020   2 900   6 800   12 750   12 750 12 750 12 750  Memory Allocation Usage by Function  Function 32 MB 64MB   128 MB 256 MB 512 MB 1 GB 2 GB  1000 Station Auto   f Yes  Dialer  Job MIB Data Yes  G3 Fax Internet Fax  Scan to Email Yes  Scan to PC File  Mailbox Print  Secure Mailbox NA za MUN Joen bs es  ie es  pos es  Te es   Print  See Note  5   pag pag pag pag                            Note     1  This function is available only when an SD Memory Card is installed   2  Max  Number of Pages is based on ITU T Image No 1  A4  Standard Resolution    3  Max  XMT file management number  G3 Fax   Internet Fax    Max  255 pages file  Max 50 Files  Scan  to PC File   Max  999 pages   4  Max  RCV 
67.  Selecting  2  Valid   allows you to set up the user name and password        171    POP BEFORE    SMTP     1    Invalid       Valid    If you transmit to the SMTP server  POP User Name and  POP Password are used for authentication        172    DIRECT IFAX    XMT     1    Invalid       Valid    Selecting whether to be prompted during Phone Book  registration if the station you are programming is to  receive Internet Fax directly without going through a Mail  Serv       173    DELIVERY  NOTICE   HOME      1    Off       On    Setting the home position of whether to request a  Message Disposition Notification  MDN  for a delivery  processing confirmation indicating that the message   Email  was read  when sending an Email Internet Fax   This setting will be the default value for the Select Mode   Function 8 2  DELIVERY NOTICE          174    APOP  AUTHENTI      1    Invalid       Valid    This parameter allows you to encrypt the protocol for the  POP password security when connecting with the POP  server        177    XMT FILE TYPE    1    TIFF        2    PDF    Selecting whether the document s  are converted to  TIFF F or PDF format when Scanning to Email  or TIFF   F format when sending to an Internet Fax    The default is    2 PDF    as PDF has become the industry  standard for exchanging documents from computer to  computer  Scan to Email   However  neither PDF format  can be used tor Internet Faxing  Internet Fax to Internet  Fax  as current Internet Fax specifications d
68.  Update Tool  Parallel  USB Port     1 0 Confirm the message in the text box and click   OK  to close the tool     Local Firmware Update Tool    The Firmware code files have been deleted        Local Firmware Update Tool    Operators other than USA   The Firmware code files need to be deleted due to contract restrictions     Please delete them after the firmware update is completed        Page 14    Published in Japan    
69.  ata DP 2310_3010_PU_030327 Pni          Click Next when you are done        di Cancel         Page 11    Local Firmware Update Tool  Parallel  USB Port     6 The selected Firmware Code File s  are xi  indicated  Uncheck the box if you do not need Select the firmware code file s  to transfer   to transfer a file           V SFDL2PNLAAV10000 PU BIN    On the unit side   Set the unit to the Firmware Update Mode     Before proceeding ensure that a USB cable or  a Parallel cable are connected from the unit to  the PC     Click  Next gt      Click Next when the machine is ready to accept the firmware update        Cancel         7 The Firmware Code File starts transferring  xi  When there is more than one file to be EE e    updated  the operation will be the following     Status File Name     Executing    DP SFDL244V00008_PU BIN  Bl waiting    SFDL2SPCAAV10000 BIN  El waiting    SFDL2PNLAAV10000_PU BIN    For USB connected unit    they are transferred in turn automatically if the  unit is ready to receive the next firmware code  file     Note  If you are updating the  DP 2310 3010  the sending of  sequential multiple files to the unit  isn t done automatically  The   Waiting     display on the PC will not  advance to  Executing     until you set  the unit back to USB Firmware  Update on the machine to start les jun  receiving the next file  See Unit  information of the Firmware  Update Mode on the next page             gt            For Parallel connected unit    the confirmation 
70.  automatically  transmit the Maintenance Alert Report to the pre registered telephone number or email address     Press the    w        a    keys to select    08 Check  amp  Call      Press the  Set  key to select the desired code number    i e  01 Service Alert Fax     input the telephone No  or for an email address  press the    FAX EMAIL     Mode key and input the email address      Press the  Set  key   4    Press the    Stop    key twice to exit the service mode     5 2 7 2  Printer Reports    Conditions under which a report can be printed or transmitted    1  Manual print  The Printer Report can be printed by Service Mode 3   See Sect  5 2 4 3      2  Automatic transmission printout    a  Service Alert Report  When the unit detects an Emergency Printer Error  the unit will immediately transmit the Service Alert  Report to the pre registered telephone number or email address  However  the unit will not transmit  the Service Alert Report if it finds the same error within the same date in the error log     b  Maintenance Alert Report  When the unit detects Low Toner  the unit can automatically transmit the Maintenance Alert Report to  the pre registered telephone number or email address  Refer to the Error Code Table     c  Toner Order Form  When the unit detects Low Toner  the unit can automatically print the Toner Order Form with the pre   registered order information     d  Call Counter Report  When the printer counter reaches the pre set number  the unit can automatica
71.  but is not limited to  parts pricing  availability  and text       Electrical parts supplied may include previously used components        N important Safety Notice  Components identified by a  NMmark  have special characteristics important for safety   When replacing any of these components  use only manufacturer s specified parts       In New Parts column   N  indicates part is used only in UF 8300 8200 Series   C   indicates part is used in previous models       In Remarks column   PM  indicates  Preventive Maintenance Part        In Remarks column   RTL  indicates that the Retention Time is limited for this item  After  the discontinuation of this assembly in production  the item will continue to be available for  a specific period of time  The retention period of availability is dependent on the type of  assembly  and in accordance with the laws governing part and product retention    After the end of this period  the assembly will no longer be available       This  Unit  which includes other itemized parts is provided as  Limited Availability  for your  convenience  and will only be offered for up to 3 years after the production of the unit  ceases  However  the individual contents of the assembly will be available for the standard  period       This Product Uses Lead  Pb  Free Solder Printed Circuit Boards  PCBs    Information regarding Lead Free  PbF  solder     Distinction of PbF PCB    PCBs  manufactured  using lead free solder will have a mark following the PCB   
72.  enter the Service Mode  refer to your device s Service Manual   9 Searching     s Searching For Drivers  West  Installing driver       Firmware Update  USB     ey       3 When the install screen disappears  the  installation of the Firmware Update  USB   Driver is completed   Note   1  The installation screens will vary depending on the Operating System     2  The  Digital Signature Not Found  or  Software Installation  window will be displayed during the  installation and indicate  Unknown software package  or  not passed Windows Logo testing   please click   YES  or  Continue Anyway  button to continue the installation     3  If you are asked for the inf file location  please specify the following folder   C  Panasonic Panasonic FUP UsbDrv1    4  Ifyou are asked for the inf file selection  please chose the larger version of the file     5  Afterthe USB Firmware Update Driver is installed  and if you are not updating the machine s firmware at this  time  turn the Power Switch OFF and ON again to return your machine to the Standby mode     Page 5    Local Firmware Update Tool  Parallel  USB Port     2 4    Uninstalling the Local Firmware Update Tool    The Local Firmware Update Tool can be uninstalled by using it s Uninstall program     Note  Do not delete the installed program folder from Windows Explorer directly  due to possible registry  setting problems     1 Start Microsoft Windows     Log on to the computer network from an account with Administrator privileges     2 C
73.  firmware code Files need to be deleted due to contract restrictions     Please delete them after the firmware update is completed        Page 14    Panasonic    Software  Operating Instructions    Local Firmware Update Tool  for Service Technicians    Version 3    DZSD000965 18    Local Firmware Update Tool  Parallel  USB Port     Table of Contents    1  General  1 1 oupported  Operating  Systetns     TEE  1 2 Supported Panasonic Fax MFP Models terrne nanasan ennen    2  Installation  2 1 Installing the Hardware Port on the Panasonic Fax MFP Machine     2 2 Installing the Local Firmware Update Tool   2 3 Installing USB Firmware Update Driver  For the USB Port Model Only        24 Uninstalling the Local Firmware Update Tool       3  Preparing the Firmware Update  3 1 Preparing the Unit to Accept the Firmware Code nennen    3 2 Gidder EE    4  Using the Local Firmware Update Tool    1st Edition  1999 February 10  2nd Edition  1999 September 30  3rd Edition   2000 September 8  4th Edition  2000 November 28  5th Edition  2001 June 20  6th Edition  2001 September 7  7th Edition  2003 April 10  8th Edition  2003 April 22  9th Edition  2003 December 18  10th Edition  2004 January 19  11th Edition  2004 February 10  12th Edition  2004 April 20  13th Edition  2004 August 3  14th Edition  2004 August 20  15th Edition  2004 October 22  16th Edition  2005 March 18  17th Edition  2006 June 26  18th Edition  2007 October 5    Microsoft  Windows  Windows Server and Windows Vista are either
74.  into the designated folder without needing to paste the file into the folder manually  In this case  the file may be downloaded to the desktop or to any other easily accessible location on the hard  disk drive     Page 7    Local Firmware Update Tool  Parallel  USB Port     4  Using the Local Firmware Update Tool    1 Set the machine to the Firmware Update Mode and then connect the unit and PC with a Parallel  cable or USB cable depending on machine option     Note  For the USB Port Models  the Plug  amp  Play of the Printer mode is activated when the  USB cable is connected without the unit set in the USB Firmware Update Mode  If  this happens  please click the  Cancel  button for the Plug and Play Driver  installation     2 Please close the all applications that are    currently running  Stati Mai See    Also ensure that the Status Monitor and or  Port Controller are closed  If they are   running  right click on the icons in the system OB 10 25 AM    tray and select Exit End     Note  For Windows 2000 XP Administrator  privileges are required     3 From the Windows Desktop  double click on E  i This Wizard guides you through the process on programming the machine firmware   the Local Firmware Update Tool shortcut  icon to start the Panasonic Firmware Before you begin   P rog ramm i n g Wi za rd 1  Close all the applications that are currently running   Note  If a shortcut was not created to the 5 k Paralel able o USB Cable and rec to accept the fimware code by  Windows Des
75.  keys                    120    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    4 5 4     Transmission Problems    y                      Y          1  No ID function at the remote unit   2  The ID is not set for the remote unit                                      3  Replace the Stamp Solenoid                                   Make a copy  and refer to Sect  4 3                       Does the ID display  SR  Yes  V  Does the Verification Stamp No  operate  Y  1  Set  STAMP ON   Yes 2  Check the SDR PCB   4  Replace the SDR PCB   y  Is the copy quality OK  Mo  Y  Yes  V  Yes    Any other problems              No    re          Y  See Sect  4 3   Troubleshooting with the  Information Codes                     121    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    4 5 5  Reception Problems       Y  Does the machine answer   No             the Ringing signal   Yes       ra    Y      Set  RCV   AUTO    Check that all covers are closed firmly      Check the telephone line connection   Check the Ringer Timing  or DRD setting   Check the recording paper path    Check the SC PCB  and MJR PCB      Replace the MJR PCB      Replace the SC PCB        oxoosopmwo                   Y  Is the received copy OK        No                Yes    ra    V       Make a copy  and refer to Sect  4 3 14                    V       Yes       Any other problems   No             V  See Sect  4 3   Troubleshooting with the  Information Codes                           ra    Y    4 5 6  Polling Problems                         1  Setthe same po
76.  layer on the surface of the Conductive Roller  Wherever the Conductive Roller touches the  drum  the positively charged toner is attracted to the latent image on the drum  and the latent image is  converted to a visible toner image  A bias voltage of approx  350 VDC is applied to the Conductive Roller to  achieve maximum print quality     194    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    Cleaning    After transfer  residual toner remains on the drum surface  and for next printing  the residual toner reaches  to the development area via charge and exposure  The charge level of the OPC corresponds to the white  background is  900 VDC  and the bias voltage of the Conductive Roller is approx   350 VDC  Therefore   the positively charged residual toner on the OPC Drum is attracted and collected to the Conductive Roller   The charge level of OPC after exposure is  100 VDC  So  the printing area of the OPC is cleaned     6 3 2 4  Transfer    As the paper is fed between the drum and the Transfer Roller  a high negative charge is applied to the back  of the paper  The positive toner particles are then attracted from the drum surface to the paper  After  transfer  the paper is separated from the drum surface by the curvature of the drum     6 3 2 5  Fusing    The paper passes through the Fuser Rollers and is subjected to heat and pressure  The fusing temperature  is approximately 190   C  374   F   and the pressure is approximately 0 36 kg cm  3 53 N cm   This bonds  or  fuses the toner into the p
77.  not boot up  the Network Firmware Update Tool will not  be able to transfer the firmware code  If this occurs  please refer to the next section  Updating  through the USB Port  and use the Local Firmware Update Tool to recover the unit    4  The suffix   xx  for the Folder Name or File Name may not exist depending on the destination  location     3 5 3  Updating through USB Port  If the device is not connected to the LAN  upgrade the firmware code using the USB Port     1  Install the Local Firmware Update Tool to your PC  The Tool can be downloaded from your sales company s Web Site  Please refer to the Tool s  Operating Instructions file for additional details     2  Preparing the Firmware Code  Access the Service Web site to download the latest Firmware Code  When performing the  self extraction wizard for preparing the Firmware Code File  the Archive will be extracted automatically  into the designated folder     Example    From    Firmware Code File  UF 8200 AU xxxxxx exe or UF 7200 AU xxxxxx exe  To    Firmware Data Folder  C Panasonic   Panasonic FUP   Data    3  Preparing the Main Unit for the Firmware Upgrade  Important  DO NOT connect the USB Cable yet   Enter into Test Mode F9 1 to enable the unit to accept the programming code from the USB Port   Now connect the USB Cable between the Unit and PC   Repeat the above steps if there are additional firmware code files to be updated     4  Upgrading the Main Unit s Firmware Code  Start the Local Firmware Update Tool an
78.  or Add document s   into a Polled file   2 Quick Name Search  Press  S   13  Key to search the  Store 4 Polling  name instead   To prepare document s  to be polled  simply place the document s  on the ADF and press the   S   13  Key to search for  Store 4 Polling   then press the  Start  Key to Store or Add  document s  into a Polled file    Note  If a regular polled file is stored in memory  the Program Key for Continuous Polling will  not be accepted    Note 2  Function Parameter No  070  Line Error  Transmit condition of RTP PIP or RTN PIN  Signal Setting  1 128 2 256 3 512 4 1024 5 2048 6 Off  MCF PIP 0 31 0 63 0 127 0 255 0 511 Always  RTP PIP 32 63 64 127 128 255 256 511 512 1023    RTN PIN 64 127 128 255 256 511 512 1023   1024 2047    Note 3  Function Parameter No  071  Total Error  Transmit condition of RTP PIP or RTN PIN    Setting  Signa 1 5  2 10    3 15    4 20   MCF PIP 0 2 0 4 0 7 0 9  RTP PIP 3 4 5 9 8 14 10 19  RTN PIN 5  10  15  20   Note 4  The default setting of parameters depends on the country   s specifications or regulations  Print the  Function Parameter List to confirm the default settings   Note 5  200 Series Function Parameters Only appear when the G3 Communications Port Kit is installed    and follow the same numbering order     174    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200  5 2 4  Fax Service Mode 3  Printout of Lists  Reports and Test Results     From this Service Mode you can print the Function Parameter List  Page Memory Test  Printer Report  All  Docume
79.  preventive maintenance  discard the used parts and packaging in accordance  with local regulations  and clean the surrounding area    3  Before servicing the equipment  turn the power switches Off  and disconnect the power cord from the  wall outlet    4  Before using solvents such as IPA  Isopropyl alcohol   wear rubber gloves and eye protection     3 1 1  Timing    Perform the preventive maintenance in accordance with the Preventive Maintenance Check List  refer to  3 4   in the service manual     3 1 2  Cleaning the Rollers    1  Rollers should be cleaned with water  and a clean cloth   2  Use the IPA  Isopropyl Alcohol  sparingly     3 1 3  Precautions for Disassembly  and Adjustment    Caution   Unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation     1  After taking the unit apart  do not attempt to operate the machine   2  When operating the machine with covers removed  be careful and avoid clothing from being caught by  moving components    3  While the electricity is applied to the unit  do not connect nor disconnect the connectors on any PC  Board      When handling the drum  follow the precautions listed in section 3 3       Ensure to use correct screws      Use toothed lock washers for the installation of ground wires to ensure electrical continuity      To reassemble  reverse the sequence of disassembly  unless otherwise specified      Blown fuses should only be replaced with fuses of the same specified rating     oNOOI   PR    3 1 4   Precautions for Handling
80.  registered trademarks or trademarks of  Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries     Copyright    1999   2007 Panasonic Communications Co   Ltd     All rights reserved  Unauthorized copying and distribution is a violation of law     The contents of this Operating Instructions are subject to change without notice     Page 2    Local Firmware Update Tool  Parallel USB Port     1  General    The Local Firmware Update Tool  Parallel USB  enables a PC to program the Firmware Code directly to the  memory of the Panasonic Fax MFP machine  The installation and operation are very similar to the installation of a  USB or Parallel printer interface     1 4 Supported Operating Systems    This application software operation has been confirmed under the following Operating Systems    e Windows   2000   e Windows   XP   e Windows Server   2003  e Windows Vista      Note  64bit version is not supported     1 2 Supported Panasonic Fax MFP Models  Please refer to the service manual of each model to determine compatibility     Page 3    Local Firmware Update Tool  Parallel  USB Port     2  Installation    2 1    2 2    Page A    1    1    Installing the Hardware Port on the Panasonic Fax MFP Machine    Depending on the model  either a Parallel Port or a USB Port is required in the machine    If the machine is not already equipped with one of these ports please install an optional Parallel  Port USB Port Assembly into the supporting Panasonic Fax MFP models by following
81.  setting the parameter s  to activate the setting s    F9 Mode  Service  Mode Item Remarks  FQ  UNIT 00   FAX FUNC PARA       MAINTENANCE       01    SVC  ALERT TEL      Displays the contact number when a  machine malfunction occurs                                                  02   FIRMWARE  00 SC Displays the firmware version for SC   VERSION    01 SC BOOT Displays the firmware version for SC  Boot   02   PNL Displays the firmware version for  PNL   03   SCANNER Displays the firmware version for  Scanner   04   PRINTER Displays the firmware version for  Printer or engine   05   FAX MODEM Displays the firmware version for  FAX   06   G3B BOARD Displays the firmware version for  G3B   03   PRINT 00   F5 F6 Prints the memory contents of the F5  DEVICE PARAMETERS  and F6 modes   INFO  01   MACHINE Prints the machine setup information  INFO  list   02 COUNTER Prints the Counter information list   INFO   03   SYSTEM Prints the system memory setting   ADDR  INFO   04   RAM ADDR  Prints the RAM data dump list   INFO   04 RAM EDIT   1  RELATIVE Setting of Relative address   MODE ADRS MODE  2  ABSOLUTE Setting of Real address   ADRS MODE                   164       UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200                F9 Mode  Service  Mode Item Remarks  F9   UNIT 05   SERIAL NUMBER Registration of Serial Number for  MAINTENANCE Maintenance        Clears with Shipment Set                                                  06   RAM 00 PARAMETER Resets the Fax and Function  INITIALIZE INITIALIZE 
82.  setup     Network Firmware Update Tool  LAN     2 3 Uninstalling the Network Firmware Update Tool    The Network Firmware Update Tool can be uninstalled by using the included uninstall program     Note  Do not delete the installed program folder from Windows Explorer directly as it may cause registry  setting problems     1 Start Microsoft Windows     Log on to the computer network from an account with Administrator privileges   2 Click the Start button on the Taskbar  point to  All  Programs   Panasonic   Panasonic  2 Firmware Update  then select Uninstall Network Firmware Update Tool     3 Follow the instructions on your screen to uninstall  Remove  the program     4 A confirmation message is displayed when the uninstall is completed     Page 5    Network Firmware Update Tool  LAN     3  Preparing the Firmware Update    3 1    3 1 2  1     3 2    Page 6    Preparing the Unit to Accept the Firmware Code    3 1 1  1     For DX 600   DX 800  v1 31 or higher  only    If the device password was changed  Remote Password  from the default value  blank   0000   it  is not possible to program the firmware code  In this case  enter the password in advance to the  Default Password in the Configuration dialog box  or enter the password at each communication     Make sure the device is not in use  i e  copying or printing  when performing a firmware update   Note  It is recommended to update the firmware at night due to lower activity of the device     Ensure the device is not in Servi
83.  the  Set  key to enter the Service Mode  default ID is 00000000       Select the Service Mode  F9 15  SD Card Format          Perform the Service Mode F9 15  SD Card Format       After the SD Card is formatted  the machine goes to Service Mode F9      Press the    Stop    key first and press the    Function        Clear    keys sequentially to exit the Service    Mode    Unplug the AC Power Cord to turn off power    Remove the SD Memory Card from the machine    Plug the AC Power Cord to turn on power    Reconnect the Telephone Line  LAN and or USB Cables     Note     Repeat steps 7  to 12  to continue formatting other SD Card s      2  When a DATA SD Card is installed    1   2      OOAND A FW               12   13   14  15   16     Disconnect the Telephone Line  LAN and or USB Cables   Unplug the AC Power Cord to turn off power   During a Lightning Storm  to prevent electrocution  disconnect the Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC Power Cord        Remove the DATA SD Card from the machine      Install the SD Card into the machine      Plug the AC Power Cord to turn on power      Press the    Function        Original Size     and the    3    keys sequentially      Input the ID  and press the    Set    key to enter the Service Mode  default ID is 00000000       Select the Service Mode    F9 15  SD Card Format          Perform the Service Mode F9 15  SD Card Format       After the SD Card is formatted  the machine goes to Service Mode F9      Press the    Stop  
84.  the  appropriate option installation instructions for that model     Prepare the Parallel cable or USB cable for connecting the Panasonic Fax MFP and your PC     Important  For the USB port models  do not connect the USB cable yet     Installing the Local Firmware Update Tool    Start Microsoft Windows     Log on to the computer from an account with Administrator privileges     Important  For the USB port models  do not connect the USB cable yet     Locate and Run the Setup  exe  program in the Firmup folder contained in the software setup  disk or folder     Follow the instructions on your screen to install the program     Note    The  Digital Signature Not Found  or  Software Installation  window will be displayed during the  installation and indicate  Unknown software package  or  not passed Windows Logo testing   please click   YES  or  Continue Anyway  button to continue the installation     A confirmation message is displayed when the installation is completed   When prompted to do so  allow the program to restart your PC     Local Firmware Update Tool  Parallel USB Port     2 3 Installing USB Firmware Update Driver  For the USB Port Model Only     1 After installation of the Local Firmware Update Tool  if you need to install the USB Firmware  Update Driver  please first set the unit to  Update from USB   IN PROGRESS    in the Service  Mode  and then connect the USB Cable  The required Driver will then be installed automatically        Note   For instructions of how to
85.  the ID   Name or Dialing Number   Default   3   Name     1   Number  Number gt Name gt Chara gt Dial  2 Chara   Chara gt Name gt Number gt Dial  3  Name  Name gt Chara gt Number gt Dial  4   Dial   Dial gt Name gt Chara gt Number       007    Not Used       008    MONITOR     On    Nh        Selects whether the Monitor is ON OFF for  monitoring fax signals  The 2nd G3 port is also  available     FOR SERVICE USE ONLY        009    DC LOOP    1   Off  Normal   2   On  Off Hook     Selects a false Off Hook state for back to back  communication test           010       TX LEVEL       00   0 dBm         15    15 dBm       Selects the TX signal output level  0 to  15 dBm in 1  dBm steps        168       UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200       Function Parameter Table                                                       No  Parameter Selections Function  011  RX LEVEL 1    43 dBm Selects the receiving sensitivity of  33  38  43  48  2    38 dBm dBm   3    33 dBm     48 dBm  012  DTMF LEVEL 00   0 dBm Selects the DTMF output level  0 to  15 dBm in 1    dBm steps   15    15 dBm  013  G3 RX EOL 1   OdB Selects the cable egualizer for G3 reception mode   2   4dB OdB  4dB  8dB or 12dB   3   8dB  4   12dB  014  G3 TX EOL 1   OdB Selects the cable egualizer for G3 transmission  2   4dB mode  OdB  4dB  8dB or 12dB   3   8dB  4   12dB  015    Not Used  016  017  TX START 2400 bps Selects the transmission modem start speed  14400   4800 bps 12000 TC9600 TC7200 9600 7200 4800 2400 bps   7200 bps  P
86.  the command should send    w 2000   Specifies the period PING will wait for the reply before deciding that the host is not    responding     CAWINDOWS   ping js2 labo pcc com  n 10  w 2000  Pinging js2 labo pcc com  210 232 71 18  with 32 bytes of data     Reply from 210 232 71 18  bytes 32 time 633ms TTL 252  Reply from 210 232 71 18  bytes 32 time 645ms TTL 252  Reply from 210 232 71 18  bytes 32 time 810ms TTL 252    Reply from 210 232 71 18  bytes 32 time 455ms TTL 252  Reply from 210 232 71 18  bytes 32 time 645ms TTL 252  Reply from 210 232 71 18  bytes 32 time 633ms TTL 252  Reply from 210 232 71 18  bytes 32 time 677ms TTL 252  Reply from 210 232 71 18  bytes 32 time 703ms TTL 252  Reply from 210 232 71 18  bytes 32 time 633ms TTL 252  Reply from 210 232 71 18  bytes 32 time 633ms TTL 252         Tracing a Packet Route   Another useful command line utility is TRACERT  which is used to verify the route a packet takes to  reach its destination  The result shows each router crossed and how long it took to get through each  particular router to reach the specified destination    The time it takes to get through a particular router is calculated three times and displayed for each  router hop along with the IP Address of each router crossed  If a FQDN  Fully Qualified Domain Name   is available  it will be displayed as well     This utility is useful for two diagnostic purposes    a  To detect whether a particular router is malfunctioning along a known path  For example  i
87.  the machine   4 PARAMETER BACK UP  Creates a Backup Card of the machine s parameters   A 1 MB  or higher  Flash Memory Card is required   8  Send RCV D File Transfers documents from memory to another fax machine during a fatal  printer error                                191    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    6 System Description    6 1  Transmit Mechanism    The transmit mechanism consists of components which feed  scan and eject documents  as well as send  signals  These components and their functions are as follows        6 1 1  ADF Mechanism    The ADF  Automatic Document Feeder  automatically feeds paper into the unit  and consists of ADF Roller  and Separation Roller  The document is placed face up on the Document Tray before being fed into the unit   The ADF Roller feeds individual pages into the scanning area    The Separation Roller and ADF Pad separates documents placed on the ADF  preventing multiple feeding     6 1 2  Transmit Guide Unit    The Transmit Guide Unit is an auxiliary part used for feeding and ejecting documents  It consists of the  Transmit Guide  Control Panel Chassis  Feed Roller  Eject Roller  and Eject Pinch Roller and Feed Pinch  Roller  This unit also provides the white scanning area and serves as a base for electronic white reference     6 1 3  Transmit Mechanism Drive System    This system feeds documents through the transmitting mechanism  and consists of rollers  gears  belts and  a stepper motor    The motor  a Stepper Motor  controlled by 
88.  the top edge to the  Latch  and secure with 2 Screws      23  Remove the LVPS  1706       lt HVPS gt      24  Remove the Front Cover Assembly    Refer to 2 3 1   5 Front Cover Assembly      25  Remove 6 Screws     26  Remove the HVPS Insulation Sheet  816       27  Remove the HVPS  817     28  Disconnect the Harness on the HVPS        2 3 5  Drive Unit     1  Motor      1  Remove the Rear Cover  604     Refer to 2 3 1   1 Rear Cover     2  Disconnect the Harness on the Motor Assembly    3  Remove 3 Screws    4  Remove the Motor  1201         48                UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200     2  Drive Unit      1  Remove the Rear Cover  604     Refer to 2 3 1   1 Rear Cover     2  Remove the SC Cover  714     Refer to 2 3 1   G ADF Drive Assembly     3  Remove the MJR Bracket Assembly    Refer to 2 3 1   6 ADF Drive Assembly     4  Remove the SC Bracket Assembly   Refer to 2 3 4     5  Release the Harnesses from 6 Latches    6  Remove 2 Screws    7  Remove the Fan Assembly           8  Remove the Snap Ring   9  Remove the Pick Up Roller Clutch  921     10  Release 3 Harnesses from 4 Clamps    11  Disconnect 3 Harnesses on the SPC PC Board   CN731  CN732  CN741     12  Disconnect the Harness on the Motor Assembly    13  Remove 3 Screws    14  Remove the Drive Unit     Caution   1  When removing the Drive Unit  exercise care not to  drop   lose the Gears   2  When reinstalling  please make sure the Gears are  positioned properly as illustrated      1  Remove the Top Cover  601   
89.  the unit power up  N    normally  y  2 Does the LCD display No  Yes function correctly     Yes Troubleshoot Improper  LCD Display  Sect  4 2                     Y  Troubleshoot any 3 digit  INFO  CODE displayed                       Does the unit produce   No                                  normal copies  Y  Ves Does the original document   No  feed through correctly   Yes Troubleshoot the  Document Feeder   Sect  4 4                     Y  Does the recording paper No  exit the unit                    Yes Check for recording    paper path problems     Troubleshoot communication  problems  transmission                       reception  dialing  network Troubleshoot printed  connection  polling  copy guality problems  information codes  or  Sect  4 3               diagnostic codes               99    4 2  Improper LCD Display          and PNL PCB     Check connectors on the SC PCB           Y       Is LED LCD displayed        Yes    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200                No          SC PCB measure  5 VDC     Y  Does CNP501  pin 11 onthe   Yes        gt  Does the display appear normal                       No  Y    Replace the SC PCB                 Y          Yes No   gt   Y  Replace the LCD No  Module    gt   Replace the          Panel              y          Is the trouble  No  resolved     Yes                Replace the Low  Voltage Power  Supply Unit                    Is the trouble resolved   Yes                  LCD Contrast Adjustment    1  Press the  FUNCTION      
90. 0 8200  UF 7300 7200                                                                                                                                        3 7 2  SC PC Board  CN501  E Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function  CN501 1 AGND SPAKER     Ground  OV  CN501 2 SPKOUT SPAKER     Line Signal  Dial Tone   ARA Ringer  Key Tone   1V  Min   CN501 3 nWAKE PNL1 PCB Wake Up Signal  CN230 13 Energy   Fay  Saving Wake UP         ON  CN501 4 nSLPKY PNL1 PCB Energy Saver Key Signal  CN230 12 en  PRESSED  CN501 5 nLPOW PNL1 PCB EV 24V 5V Power Control  CN230 11   Signal  OV  CN501 6 BZCLK PNL1 PCB 5V Buzzer Signal  CN230 10 ji  OV  CN501 7 nPNLRST PNL1 PCB 45V   PNL Reset Signal  CN230 9  OV  RESET  CN501 8 PNLTXD PNL1 PCB 43 3V PNL Transmission Data  CN230 8   Signal  OV  CN501 9 PNLRXD PNL1 PCB EEN PNL Reception Data  CN230 7 f Signal  OV  CN501 10   5V PNL1 PCB 45V  5 VDC Power Supply  CN230 6  CN501 11   5VP PNL1 PCB 45V  5 VDC Power Supply  CN230 5  CN501 12  GND PNL1 PCB Ground  CN230 4  OV                   75       UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200                                                                                                                            a Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function  CN501 13  GND PNL1 PCB Ground  CN230 3  OV  CN501 14  GND PNL1 PCB Ground  CN230 2  OV  CN501 15   24V PNL1 PCB 424V  24 VDC Power Supply  CN230 1  CN502  SUM Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function  CN502 1 SIG CRB PCB V Scanner Serial Data  CN8
91. 02 13 n n to  OV  CN502 2 SEL CRB PCB Sage CIS  Resolution  CN802 12 ne Selection  OV  CN502 3 GND CRB PCB Ground  CN802 11  OV  CN502 4 45VA CRB PCB 45V  5VDC Power Supply  CN802 10  CN502 5 VREF CRB PCB EV Dark Reference Control  CN802 9    OV  CN502 6 SI CRB PCB 3 3V Scanner Data Frame  CN802 8 i Signal  OV  CN502 7 GND CRB PCB Ground  CN802 7  OV  CN502 8 CISCLK CRB PCB 3 3V CIS Clock  CN802 6 SC  OV  CN502 9 GND CRB PCB Ground  CN802 5  OV                      76          UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200       SC PCB                                                                                                 Pin No Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function  CN502 10  pLEDBON CRB PCB 3 3V Not Use  CN802 4   a  OV  CN502 11  pLEDGON CRB PCB asy gLED ON OFF Control  CN802 3    OV  CN502 12  pLEDRON CRB PCB T Not Use  CN802 2 na  OV  CN504  on Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function  CN504 1 pEXTRYSN  SPC PCB 43 3V Not Use  CN704 12  CN504 2 nLPOW SPC PCB 5V Power Save Control  CN704 11    ON  CN504 3  5VP SPC PCB 45V  5 VDC Power Supply  CN704 10  CN504 4  5VA SPC PCB 45V  5 VDC Power Supply  CN704 9  CN504 5 GND SPC PCB ov Ground  CN704 8  CN504 6 GND SPC PCB ov Ground  CN704 7  CN504 7  24V SPC PCB 424V  24 VDC Power Supply  CN704 6  CN504 8 MGND SPC PCB Ground  CN704 5  OV  CN504 9  5V SPC PCB 45V  5 VDC Power Supply  CN704 4                77          UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200                                                                                 
92. 234   002 SP 200  0003     2   003 SP 200IPFAX ifax   panasonic com        004 LONDON ifax rly   london panasonic co uk      005 ROME  396111234         f    end  a   b   c       Q program P01  POP3  POP    user POP3      d   password  pop pswd      e   delete on      f  I  3    end 9    h      program P02  Group1  GROUP   001 002     i    Q end m           LLIllll1lllooolool l1  hhnnlLholn lllu      Your machine s email address     This field is normally not visible when creating new email message s    It is your default email address  email application   for retrieving the Auto  Dialer data and for error message notification    Can be programmed with the configuration tool of your email program      To Store data  type    set abbr password       2   begin to  end block   Defines the Auto Dialer to be set in section  2  between  begin to  end    block    Edit  Delete or Register the information    Separate each data field with a semicolon       If the remaining fields are to   remain blank  insert a semi colon     for each blank field    The data string for each station should be defined within a single line    The syntax is    lt Entry number gt     lt Station name gt     lt Station address gt      lt Routing subaddress gt     lt Routing id number gt     a  Entry number  One Touch  ABBR  No  or Program Keys to be  programmed001 to 200   indicates ABBR  No s 001 to 200  200 stations  maximum    001 to 920   When the SD Media Card Memory is installed   2001 to 2080   indicate
93. 2nd Feeder Option  Module I F PCB B Detection Signal  CN602 2 ov  CN724 14  nRESET OP   2nd Paper Feed sj 2nd Feeder Option  Module I F PCB bi Detection Signal  CN602 1 oy  CN726  pia Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function  CN726 1  24V Front Cover  24V  24 VDC Power Supply  Safety Interlock  SW 3  CN726 2 24VGND Front Cover Ground  Safety Interlock  SW 5 ov  CN726 3  24VIR Front Cover  24V  24 VDC Power Supply  Safety Interlock  SW 1  CN728  ps Ae Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function  CN728 1  24VIR HVPS PCB  24 VDC Power Supply  CN501 10 Cover Open  24V          Sleep  amp   Shutdown 45V             87             UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200                                                                                                                         ps   e Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function  CN728 2 24VGND HVPS PCB Ground  CN501 9  OV  CN728 3 24VGND HVPS PCB Ground  CN501 8  OV  CN728 4 nCHGCTL HVPS PCB HVPS Charge Control  CN501 7 HE  9V   ON OFF   arge  Enable ov  CN728 5 nDBCH HVPS PCB Bee  t Developer Charge    eveloper S  CN501 6 Charge  4         Change   Enable ov  CN728 6 nDB HVPS PCB V Developer  CN501 5  5V      Voltage PWM Pulse   OV  CN728 7 nTRCTL HVPS PCB HVPS Transfer Control  CN501 4 HVPS O 45V     4   Change   ransfer  Enable ov  CN728 8 nTR HVPS PCB 5V Transfer  CN501 3   i    Voltage PWM Pulse   OV  CN728 9  5V HVPS PCB ij  5 VDC Power Supply  CN501 2 Slep amp       Shutdown  u QV  CN728 10  nTECTL HVPS PCB 5V
94. 32 MB to 2 GB  into the SD Memory Card Slot   Perform the SD Memory Card Firmware Writing Tool   After all firmware codes are copied  remove the SD Memory Card from the Slot     The SD Memory Card is now ready to use for firmware update    Refer to the Local Firmware Update Tool Ol and the SD Memory Card Firmware Writing Tool Ol      66    3 5 6     UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    Formatting the SD Memory Card    To make the Master Firmware SD Card  format the Card first by following the steps below  If the Card will  be used to update the Firmware of other machines  format the Card first with the Service Mode F9 15     Caution   Do not remove the SD Memory Card or turn the power OFF during Formatting or while Updating the  Firmware     Note   The Master Firmware SD Card can be installed or removed without turning the power OFF  however   an SD Memory Card formatted for DATA requires the power to be cycled OFF and ON after its  installation or removal     1  When a DATA SD Card is Not installed    1   2     CO OO ONOG RO           11   12   13   14     Disconnect the Telephone Line  LAN and or USB Cables   Unplug the AC Power Cord to turn off power   During a Lightning Storm  to prevent electrocution  disconnect the Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC Power Cord        Install the SD Card into the machine      Plug the AC Power Cord to turn on power      Press the    Function        Original Size     and the    3    keys sequentially      Input the ID  and press
95. 411 10K Wet soft 125K  cloth  3  Separation Roller 439   10K oru 125K  D    Refer to 2 3 2  F7 08  4  ADF Pad 437   10K Ls    cloth  5  White Sheet 526 10K Dry soft e  cloth  6  c  s 421 10K Dry soft    cloth  Paper Feed Module  Bias Transfer Roller Dry soft  7  BTR  906 10K cloth 85K Refer to 2 3 9   8  Pick Up Roller 1106  10K   Wetsoft   425K F7 12  cloth  Wet soft Refer to 2 3 8   9  Feed Roller 914 10K Se 3  cloth  Fuser Unit  10  Fuser Unit 1334     85K Refer to 2 3 7  F7 02  Note     1  Wet Cloth represents a soft cloth saturated with water   For stubborn toner accumulation  wipe with a soft cloth saturated with Isopropyl Alcohol first  then  follow up with a soft cloth saturated with water    2  The Maintenance Cycle is based on the Counter Information for each individual module   To verify the counter information  print the Total Counter List using the Service Mode  F7   Electronic  Counter   00  List Print     3  Cleaning  Replacement and Adjustment Cycle  Sheet  are based on using Panasonic s  recommended standard paper and supplies  These cycles may vary with the kind of paper used   Paper size  orientation  print duty  continuous interval print and or ambient conditions     61    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    3 5  Updating the Firmware    The Quick and Easy Methods of Updating the Firmware are to use the Network Firmware Program  Tool  FUP  using Ethernet LAN Port and a Crossover Cable or to use a Master SD Memory Card     3 5 1  Firmware Configuration    A  Hard
96. 54 Data Transfer Error  broken Data     Multiple contents are present and being processed while  the message finished  try again        554 Data Transfer Error  FAX module     Data transfer error occurred in the FAX module while  communicating with the LAN module  try again        554 MIME attachment not supported   message file     MIME attachment is not supported during this operation   resend using plain text in the message body only        554 MIME format not supported    MIME file type is not supported  resend using plain text in  the message body only        554 G3 Relay permission denied    The requested domain for Relayed Transmission is not  registered        554 Relay Address unknown    The telephone number of end receiving station for the  Relayed Transmission is unknown        554 Memory Full  FAX module     FAX Memory is full  try again later              554 Data Transfer Error          Other errors not listed above  try again later        9 4 2     Internet Fax Return Receipt Error Messages    Error messages that are printed on the Internet Fax Return Receipt when remote programming of the Auto  Dialer via Email fails        Error Message    Possible Cause   Action       Format Error   lt  command block  the      end    command is missing       The block termination command   dend  is missing in the      command    block  add the     end    command and try  again        Format Error    lt  begin block  the      begin    command is missing       The block start 
97. 577000000  20 14 0000000000000000  21 17 0040440A30080000  20 19 C8444B0577000000  1st digit 16th digit  201 555 1212          x            2  Remote Station Identification  The ID Priority is selctable by Fax Service Mode 1 No 006  See section 5 2 3       1st Digit  Manufacturer Code     Not used defined       Fax Diagnostic Codes       Data    Definition       Manufacturer Code    Manufacturer Code  New    Refer to 16th Digit        Brother       Casio    Konica       Canon    Kyocera       Sanyo       Sharp       Tamura       Toshiba       NEC       Oki       Hitachi       Xerox       Fujitsu       Matsushita       Mitsubishi       Murata          nm UJO  DW   gt   O  CO  CN  ol ol BA  o INi  O       Ricoh             142    2nd Digit       Not used defined    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200                                                                            Fax Diagnostic Codes  Definition  Dala       IBXTSE CSI  RTN DCN STOP Button  CIG   0   E      1 Received        2   Received      3 Received Received      4     Received    5 Received   Received    6   Received Received    7 Received Received Received    8       Pressed  9 Received     Pressed  A   Received   Pressed  B Received Received   Pressed  C     Received Pressed  D Received   Received Pressed  E   Received Received Pressed  F Received Received Received Pressed          3rd Digit       Not used defined                                                                         Fax Diagnostic Codes  Data Definiti
98. 7 x Synchronization Signal  OV  CN724  xx dia Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function  CN724 1  5V 2nd Paper Feed 45V  5 VDC Power Supply  Module I F PCB  CN602 14  CN724 2 5VGND 2nd Paper Feed Ground  Module I F PCB  CN602 13 ov  CN724 3 pENABLE OP   2nd Paper Feed 5V 2nd Feeder Motor  Module I F PCB na Feeder   Control Signal  otor  CN602 12 Enable ou  CN724 4 nPON OP 2nd Paper Feed 2nd Feeder No Paper  Module I F PCB w Feeder  9V Detection Signal  o Paper  CN602 11 Detection ov  CN724 5 nOPTION 2nd Paper Feed   2nd Feeder Option  Module I F PCB sid Poeder  gt  Detection Signal  CN602 10 Detection  00V  CN724 6 nPUCTL_OP  2nd Paper Feed 2nd Feeder Paper Pick  Module I F PCB SEET  up Control  CN602 9 Enable  nable ov  CN724 7 24VGND 2nd Paper Feed Ground          Module I F PCB  CN602 8       OV             86       UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200                                                                                                                                  in   n Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function  CN724 8 24VGND 2nd Paper Feed Ground  Module I F PCB  CN602 7 ov  CN724 9  24V 2nd Paper Feed 424V  24 VDC Power Supply  Module I F PCB  CN602 6  CN724 10   24V 2nd Paper Feed 424V  24 VDC Power Supply  Module I F PCB  CN602 5  CN724 11  CLOCK OP  2nd Paper Feed 5V CLOCK  Module I F PCB P  CN602 4 oV  CN724 12   nJAMDOR OP  2nd Paper Feed 5V 2nd Feeder Option  Module I F PCB   Detection Signal  CN602 3 ov  CN724 13  nCCHK OP   2nd Paper Feed 5V 
99. 7300 7200    PH Motor    ADF Motor    Document Eject Sensor  Read Point Sensor  Document Sensor    CIS  CRB  ADF Door Sensor    Exit Sensor Actuator    Exit Sensor    Exit Sensor PCB    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    General Disassembly Flowchart    2 Disassembly Instructions    2 1     TEC  Ajquiassy Ja jON    Tez  yun duejs       vec CES  82d IdS wun JAV    vec  82d Urn       gez CEZ LEZ LE 6   c  yun NSI Jun  aued  ouo yun Josn e npo y pao  Jedeg J8 JOM 19JSUeJ  serg    VEZ VEZ VEZ  JUN jeueg one  19 02 1X3 19 02 Jyb  y    Ge     Wun eAug                   VEZ  J9A02  Je23J    Le   J9 05 dot    VEZ  J9A09  U014          33    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    2 2  General Disassembly  Pertinent Disassembly Instruction sections are shown below     Caution   Reassembly is done in reverse order  Follow the instructions carefully  making sure that all parts are  properly installed to comply with EMI regulations and safety precautions              Automatic Document  Feeder  ADF  Unit   Scanner    2 3 2                   Control Panel Unit  2 3 3     PC Board  2 3 4     2nd Paper Feed  Module                 Bias Transfer Roller  2 3 9    Paper Feed Module  2 3 8                                2 3 10              Cover Assembly  2 3 1     Fuser Unit   Paper Exit Sensor  2 3 T        LSU Unit  2 3 6                           Drive Unit  2 3 5                 34    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    2 3  Disassembly Instructions    2 3 1  Cover Assembly     1  Rear Cover      1  Remove 1 S
100. 8  Install the G3 Assembly as illustrated      9  Secure the G3 Assembly with 3 Screws  M3 x 6      Note   Secure 2 Screws on Right Rear Side first  and  remaining 1 Screw     211       UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200   10  Install the Harness Clamp and insert the G3 Harness  into it as illustrated    11  Insert the G3 Harness into the Edge Saddle    12  Connect the G3 Harness to CN510 on the SC PC  Board    13  Proceed with the installation of other options  If  finished  reinstall all Harnesses and Covers    14  Reinstall the SD Memory Card if it was removed    15  Plug the AC Power Cord first  then reconnect the  Telephone Line Cable    16  Reconnect the LAN   USB Cable s  if disconnected     212    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    8 3  Installing the 2nd Paper Feed Module  UE 409080   8 3 1  Contents    Visually check the condition and contents of the box for completeness  or for any shipping damage before  starting the installation    Remove all tapes  and the packing materials used to secure the units during shipment    After unpacking  dispose of the packing materials appropriately                          No  Qty  Description Remarks  1 1 2nd Paper Feed Module  2 2 Bracket F  3 1 Bracket R1  4 1 Bracket R2  5 2 Flat Clamp  6 4   Screw  M3 x 8      mn           7 4  Screw  M4 x 8   mm  8 2   Washer head Screw  em    9 1 Installation Instructions This document                            Note   Refer to the Parts Manual for Part Number s   Packing  and Accessories in details    
101. 81   ul 607   ww 001   ww 001   ul 76    Ul v6                    30    41 89 in  1064 mm               ww 796  ut 98 8     ww 7604  ut BL er    Main Unit   Handset Option    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    1 5 4  Serial Number Contents    The contents of the 11 digit Serial Number is as follows   L5  Ls  Le   ES    Sequential Production Number  5 Digit Sequential Production Number       00001   99999   1   99 999 units  A0001   Y9999   100 000   329 976 units   Letters  I  and    O    are skipped     Model Number and Destination Code  Main Unit   3 Digit number or alphanumeric representation   Except Letters    I    and    O           For Example   6DD   UF 8300 EB 6DB   UF 8200 AU    6DE   UF 7300 EB 6DC   UF 7200 AU             Production Facility    Production Year  Starting with Year 2001  the last 2 digits of the year is  represented as  A   T        2001    11  2011     HOJO UOZZITrA      20  2020       10  2010     Production Month         January   July     February   August     March   September    April   October     May   November    June   December    31                1 6   LVPS FAN      Main Motor EN  Registration Solenoid TA  Clutch  Do   Main Switch  AM  Pick Up Solenoid NE  1 7  Sensors and PC Boards  PNL2  PNL1  HVPS    Paper Path Sensor  Actuator    Registration  Sensor Actuator    Registration Sensor  Paper Path Sensor       Registration  Sensor PCB       32       v    Clutches  Switches  Motors  Solenoids and Fan            ey             UF 8300 8200  UF 
102. CB POT PNL Key Signal  CN252 3 Key ZS  Scan Line   Scan oV                93          UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200                                                                                                                                                                                     i Wee Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function  CN235 4 nSCN 5  PNL2 PCB Bau PNL Key Signal  CN252 4 Key ve  Scan Line   Scan ov  CN235 5 nSCN 6  PNL2 PCB aay PNL Key Signal  CN252 5 Key Kan  Scan Line   Scan ov  CN235 6 KINZ PNL2 PCB aay PNL Key Signal  CN252 6 Key en  Key Line   Pressed ov  CN235 7 KIN6 PNL2 PCB n PNL Key Signal  Key  CN252 7   Key i Line   ressed ov  CN235 8 KIN5 PNL2 PCB aN PNL Key Signal  Key  CN252 8  gt  Key i Line   ressed ov  CN235 9 KIN4 PNL2 PCB E PNL Key Signal  Key  CN252 9 Key   Line   Pressed ov  CN235 10  KIN3 PNL2 PCB mor PNL Key Signal  Key  CN252 10 Key i Line   Pressed ov  CN235 11  KIN2 PNL2 PCB AN PNL Key Signal  Key  CN252 11  gt  Key   Line   ressed ov  CN235 12  KIN1 PNL2 PCB 2550 PNL Key Signal  Key  CN252 12   Key j Line   ressed ov  CN235 13   KINO PNL2 PCB nin PNL Key Signal  Key  CN252 13 Key   Line   Pressed ov  CN235 14  nLED5 PNL2 PCB y PNL LED Control Signal  CN252 14 K      el OV  CN235 15  nLED8 PNL2 PCB S   PNL LED Control Signal  CN252 15 LED t  ON OV  CN235 16  nLED9 PNL2 PCB 5V PNL LED Control Signal  CN252 16 LED li  ON OV                               94       UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200                                     
103. Confirm the device information and    destination s      Click  Next gt       Page 8    Enter Destination s     Manual Input   Device Address List      Device Name   PP 3010  IP Address       10 74 223 171  Password         Enter Destination s     Manual Input Device Address List            Location   089      Device Name   Panasonic DP      DP 3010  NPIO3CSED  Panafax DX 800   Panafax DX 800   Panasonic DP 3   Panasonic DP 3     Panasonic DP 3     Panasonic DP 3     Panasonic DP 3   Panasonic DP 3           Panasonic DP 3   Panasonic DP 4   Panasonic DP 4   Panasonic DP 4      zspbbbbbebbbbbbbbb       Destination s           EI  Destinations   More than one address can be specified      __  Device Name   Location Toon    DP 3010 107       Destinations                          xi     More than one address can be specified         Device Name  Location Laag    A DP3010 107              Network Firmware Update Tool xj    Click  Device Address List  and enter the destinaton address es      10 74 229 171          6  Specify the Firmware Code File using one of the  following methods     6 1 Select a Parent File Folder  Complete Set   If the archive file is already extracted into the  local Panasonic FUP Data folder  you can  select the Parent File Folder directly from  here  It is packaged as a set when the update  of multiple firmware code files is necessary     or    6 2 Select Independent File Folders  If the archive file is already extracted into the  local Panasonic FUP Data 
104. Connect the Handset Cord to the Handset as  illustrated     6  Connect the Cradle Assembly Cord to Handset Jack     7  Plug the AC Power Cord first  then reconnect the  Telephone Line Cable     8  Reconnect the LAN   USB Cable s  if disconnected     218    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    8 5  Installing the SD Memory Card  32 MB up to 2 GB   8 5 1  Contents       No  Qty  Description Remarks  1 1 SD Memory Card  RP SDxxx      32 MB   2 GB                      Note   1  The Panasonic SD Memory Cards listed above are included for your reference only   2  The suffix        may differ depending on the Destination     8 5 2  Installation    CAUTION   Unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation     1  Remove 1 Screw    2  Remove the SD Card Cover      3  Gently insert the SD Memory Card as illustrated   Logo facing toward the rea of the machine      Caution   Forcing the card into the slot may cause damage to the  card or machine      4  Reinstall the SD Card Cover and 1 Screw     5  Plug the AC Power Cord first  then reconnect the  Telephone Line Cable     6  Reconnect the LAN   USB Cable s  if disconnected        Caution   Do not remove the SD Memory Card or turn the power OFF during Formatting or while Updating the  Firmware     Note    1  When a New  Blank  SD Memory Card is detected for the first time  a prompt for Formatting will  appear on the LCD  The machine will format the SD Card for DATA  used for Fax Image  1 000  Station Auto Dialer  JOB MIB Data  etc    and 
105. DER  1 Invalid Selecting a pre programmed sender s name and Email  SELECTION 2 Valid Address before each transmission    146  POP TIMER      0 to 60 min    Setting the time interval for the machine to check for    3 Emails on the POP Server    0   Does not check the POP Server for Email    147  AUTO POP RCV 1 Invalid Selecting whether the machine automatically downloads   2 Valid an Email from the POP Server    148  DEL POP ROV  1 Invalid Selecting whether the Email will be deleted automatically  MAIL  2 Valid after retrieval from the POP Server    149  DEL POP ERR    1 Invalid Selecting whether to delete the Email that includes an  MAIL 2 Valid incompatible file attachment from the POP Server    150  IFAX RET 1 Invalid Selecting whether to send a return receipt when receiving  RECEIPT Wei Valid from another Panasonic Internet Fax    151  EMAIL HEADER  1 All Selecting the header information to print when an Email  FMT Kei Subject   is received   Normally used for Troubleshooting  It shows   From   To the path of the Email transmission before arriving at your  3 Off machine         204       UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200                                                                                                 No  Parameter Ni elena Setting Comments   umber   152   SUB ADDR  1 Invalid Selecting whether to automatically route a received Email  ROUTING 2 Valid using ITU T sub address    153   TSI ROUTING  1 Invalid Selecting whether to route a received fax to an Email   2 Vali
106. Do not operate nor reset the power of the device while it is updating the firmware code  otherwise  the firmware update will fail and the device may not boot up again    5  If the Network Firmware Update fails and the unit does not reboot automatically for more than 20  minutes  you may need to recover the firmware update again via a Parallel USB port using the  Local Firmware Update Tool  or with the FROM card     3  Click  Device Address List  button  xl  Click  Device Address List  and enter the destinaton address es    Destination s     Device Name Location  Address  Password            Sm Cancel       Page 7    Network Firmware Update Tool  LAN     4  Enter the device location on the network by using  either Manual Input or Device Address List  methods   Manual Input Tab  Device Name  Type the name of the device you  are updating  i e  DP 3010   IP Address  Type the IP Address of the device  you are updating  this information can generally  be located through the Key Operator or Service  Modes   Password  Enter the device password  Note  If the default password is used on the  device there is no need to enter it in this box  When compete select the    gt  gt    button to add the  destination to the list   Device Address List Tab  Locate and select the device you would like to  update on the Device Address List   Select the    gt  gt    button to add the destination to  the list   Note  Multiple destinations can be added to  update more than one device   Click  OK     5  
107. Function    Clear  keys sequentially to exit the Service  Mode     3 6 3  ADF Original Read Edge  amp  ADF Main Scan Adjustments    1  Place the Original Document on the ADF    2  Insert Letter or A4 size paper into the 1st tray and change the tray setting to the appropriate paper size   Empty all the remaining trays  including the bypass tray  to disable them    3  Press the    Function        Original Size   and the    3    keys sequentially    4  Input the ID  and press the    Set    key to enter the Service Mode  default ID is 00000000      69    O OO Jo 0    10   11     UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200      Perform the Service Mode F2  Single Copy Test       Check the Image size ofthe Copy and the Original as Portrait      Perform the Service Mode F6 91  Original Read Edge ADF   to adjust the ADF Original Read Edge     If the gap is less than the Original  input a     value  If bigger than the Original  input a     value      Perform the Service Mode F6 90  ADF Image Read Start   to adjust the ADF Main Scan for Side    position    If the gap is less than the Original  input a     value  If bigger than the Original  input a     value   Press the  Stop  key first and press the  Function    Clear  keys sequentially to exit the Service  Mode     70    3 7  Signal Waveform    3 7 1  Glossary of Electrical Abbreviations    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200                                                                                                                                        
108. Instructions  For Facsimile      4 7 2  Jam Error Codes  J Code                          Section Jam Location  A ADF  B Paper Transport   Exit Area  C Paper Entry Area             Jam Error Codes  J Codes  Table  Code Contents Section  J01  The Registration Sensor did not detect paper within a predetermined time after the Paper C  Feed Roller started rotating   1st Feeder Unit   J02  The Registration Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the  Paper Feed Roller started rotating   2nd Feeder Unit                       J43  Paper Jam in the Registration Sensor or Paper Path Sensor  B C  J44  Paper Jam in the Paper Exit Sensor   J71  Original was longer than 39 3 in  1m   A     Information Code 031 is printed on the Transaction Journal instead     J72  Read Point Sensor does not go ON within several seconds after the original starts  feeding     Information Code 030 is printed on the Transaction Journal instead     J74  The Exit Sensor does not go ON within a predetermined time after the Sensor is  activated    J75  The Exit Sensor does not go OFF within a predetermined time after the Sensor is  activated    J92  The Original was pulled out when feeding an original    J93  The Original remained in the ADF    J94  The ADF does not go off after the predetermined time    Unexpected Jam timing  i e  Original is too short  etc                                    131      Sensor and Switch Location    Read Point Sensor    CIS  Contact  Image Sensor     ADF Door 
109. L LCD Back Light Control Signal  nLEDSLP Energy Saver Lamp LED Control Signal  nLPOW Power Control Signal          72    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200       Glossary of Electrical Abbreviations       Signal Name    Function                                                                                                                                                       nMMCTL Main Motor Control Signal  nMMHALF Motor Rotation Speed Control  nMMLD Main Motor Rotation Signal  nMPOW1 Power Supply Control Signal  nOPG3B G3B Detection Signal   nOPTION 2nd Feeder Option Detection Signal  nPLPOSISEN Paper Lead Position   nPNLRST PNL Reset Signal   nPNON OP No Paper Sensor detect Signal  nPON OP 2nd Feeder No Paper Detection Signal  nPRDY Printer Ready   nPRINT Print Start   nPRTRST Printer Reset   nPUCTL OP 2nd Feeder Paper Pick up Control  nPURGE Paper End Detection Signal  nRESET OP 2nd Feeder Option Detection Signal  nRING Ring Detection Signal   nSNDKY PNL Key Signal   nSBSY Busy Status   nSCN 1  PNL Key Signal  Scan Line   nSCN 10  PNL Key Signal  Scan Line   nSCN 11  PNL Key Signal  Scan Line   nSCN 2  PNL Key Signal  Scan Line   nSCN 3  PNL Key Signal  Scan Line   nSCN 4  PNL Key Signal  Scan Line   nSCN 5  PNL Key Signal  Scan Line   nSCN 6  PNL Key Signal  Scan Line   nSCN 7  PNL Key Signal  Scan Line   nSCN  8  PNL Key Signal  Scan Line   nSCN 9  PNL Key Signal  Scan Line   nSLPKY Energy Saver Key Signal  nSNRCLK LSU Motor Clock   nSNRCTL LSU Motor Control Signal  nSNRLD LSU
110. NL1 PC Board CN238     3 7 8   G3B PC Board    CN363  Refer to SC PC Board CN510     3 7 9   Registration Paper Detect Sensor PC Board    CN805  Refer to SPC PC Board CN734     3 7 10  Paper Exit Sensor PC Board    CN803  Refer to SPC PC Board CN734     3 7 11  No Paper Sensor PC Board  Refer to SPC PC Board CN736     3 7 12  Low Toner Sensor PC Board    CN803  Refer to SPC PC Board CN729     3 7 13  HVPS    CN501  Refer to SPC PC Board CN728     3 7 14  LVPS    CN103  Refer to SPC PC Board CN712     96       UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200                                                                                                                                                                   CN102  LVPS Sianal N Destinati      Pin No  ignal Name estination Signal Waveform Function  CN102 1 ACL Fuser Unit AC Power Supply  Live    AC200 240V  s  CN102 3 ACN Fuser Unit AC Power Supply   Neutral   AC120V     AC200 240V  g  3 7 15  2nd Feeder PC Board  CN600  2nd Feeder  PCB Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function  Pin No   CN600 1 B 2nd Feeder DAN 2nd Feeder Motor  Motor 1   Control Signal  OV  CN600 2 AA 2nd Feeder DAY 2nd Feeder Motor  Motor 2 S Control Signal  OV  CN600 3  24VA 2nd Feeder T  24 VDC Power Supply  Motor 3 Sleep  amp  S  Shutdown    0y  CN600 4  24VA 2nd Feeder  24 VDC Power Supply  Motor 4 Sleep  amp     Shutdown    QV  CN600 5 BB 2nd Feeder DAY 2nd Feeder Motor  Motor 5 N Control Signal  OV  CN600 6 A 2nd Feeder DAY 2nd Feeder Motor  Motor 6    Cont
111. Note 2   072  CONTI  ERROR  1   Off  unlimited  Selects the continuous total error criteria of Off 3 6 or  2   3 lines STD 12 lines in Standard mode  If continuous total error  3   6 lines STD exceeds this setting  the unit will transmit RTN PIN   4   12 lines STD  Available if No 73 Error Detect is set to  RATE     073  ERROR DETECT  1   Lines Selects the error detect condition Lines Rate   2   Rate  074  RTN RECEIVE 1   Disconnect Selects whether to disconnect the phone line or  2   Continue continue when  RTN  is received   075  CODING 1 MH  MH only  Selects the coding scheme   2   MR  MH or MR   3   MMR  MH  MR or  MMR   4   JBIG  076  BATCH TX 1   Off Selects whether the batch transmission is available   2 0n  077  RX JAM LENGTH   1   Off  unlimited  Selects the maximum length of a received document  2 2m that can be printed   078    Not Used  079  080  DOC TOP FEED   99 Adjusts the distance between the scanning sensor  pe ON position and the scanning start position    99  081  DOC END FEED   90 Adjusts the distance between the scanning sensor   gt  OFF position and the scanning end position    127  082  JAM LENGTH 121m Selects the maximum length of the original that can  2 2m be scanned   083  Not Used                172       UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200       Function Parameter Table                                                                   No  Parameter Selections Function  084  LINE AS NO 1   Ring  ring  Selects whether to ring or send a busy tone to the  PAPE
112. Order Number  MGCS080901CO0  H13    Service Manual    Facsimile       SEN e UF 8300   8200     Mi UF 7300   7200      Version 1 0         Z  WARNING    This service information is designed for experienced repair technicians only and is not intended for use by the general public     It does not contain warnings or cautions to advise non technical individuals of potential dangers in attempting to service a product   Products powered by electricity should be serviced or repaired only by experienced professional technicians  Any attempt to service  or repair the product or products dealt within this service information by anyone else could result in serious injury or death        IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE    There are special components used in this equipment which are important for safety  These parts are marked by A  in the Schematic  Diagrams  Circuit Board Diagrams  Exploded Views and Replacement Parts List  It is essential that these critical parts should be replaced  with manufacturer s specified parts to prevent shock  fire or other hazards  Do not modify the original design without permission of       manufacturer            Panasonic Communications Co   Ltd  2008                Panasonic Unauthorized copying and distribution is a violation of law              General Annotations      Panasonic Communications Company of North America  and other Panasonic Sales  Companies reserve the right to change any information enclosed herein without prior  notification   This includes 
113. PNL Key Signal  CN251 2 Key    Scan Line   Scan ov  CN234 3 nSCN T  PNL2 PCB N PNL Key Signal  CN251 3 Key Ke  Scan Line   Scan ov  CN234 4 nSCN  8  PNL2 PCB aay PNL Key Signal  CN251 4 Key Ke  Scan Line   Scan ov  CN234 5 nSCN 9  PNL2 PCB Bis PNL Key Signal  CN251 5 Kay na  Scan Line   Scan ov                            92             UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200                                                                                                                                                                                  jes big Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function  CN234 6 nSCN 10  PNL2 PCB sa PNL Key Signal  CN251 6 Key ZS  Scan Line   Scan ov  CN234 7 nSCN 11  PNL2 PCB   PNL Key Signal  CN251 7 Key  3 3V  Scan Line   Scan ov  CN234 8 nLED7 PNL2 PCB m  PNL LED Control Signal  CN251 8 LED  ON ov  CN234 9 nLED6 PNL2 PCB xu PNL LED Control Signal  CN251 9 LED  ON oV  CN234 10  nLED3 PNL2 PCB m PNL LED Control Signal  CN251 10 LED  ON oV  CN234 11  nLED1 PNL2 PCB  m PNL LED Control Signal  CN251 11 LED  ON OV  CN234 12  nLED4 PNL2 PCB zer PNL LED Control Signal  CN251 12 LED  ON ov  CN234 13  nLEDSLP PNL2 PCB 5V Energy Saver Lamp LED  CN251 13 LED ki Control Signal  ON oV  CN234 14   5VP PNL2 PCB 45V  5 VDC Power Supply  CN251 14  CN235  iu Wee Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function  CN235 1  5V PNL2 PCB 45V  5 VDC Power Supply  CN252 1  CN235 2 nSCN 3  PNL2 PCB 7 PNL Key Signal  CN252 2 Key  3 3V  Scan Line   Scan ov  CN235 3 nSCN 4  PNL2 P
114. R 2   Busy  keep line busy    remote station when the recording paper runs out or  the unit cannot receive because of any trouble   085    Not Used  086  087  DARKER LEVEL  0   Lightest Contrast Selects the contrast level of original   088  NORMAL LEVEL   0c       19  089  LIGHTER LEVEL   15   Darkest Contrast Lightest lt        Darkest  090   Not Used  091  092  SMOOTHING 1   Off Selects whether the smoothing function is available   2 0n  093   Not Used  094  095  REDUCTION  70 100  Selects Print Reduction Ratio      RATIO  096     Not Used  109  110  MAC ADRESS Indicates the MAC Address   111  Not Used  112  INSERT EMAIL  1   Off Selects whether the Text Template  email message   TXT   On is programmable and added on all email sent in the  message body above the top line of text   Up to 40  characters can be programmed in the User  Parameters    Note   After enabling this feature  aside from entering the  text in the User Parameters  it also has to be  activated in each Auto Dial Number before it will  take effect  It does not work for Direct Dialed  Numbers   113     Not Used  114  115  TIME ZONE 1   Scroll Selects the setting method for Time Zone   2   Direct Scroll  Allows using  Scroll Keys  to scroll through  the Time Zone Table   Direct   Allows you to input the Time Zone directly       key to be used as a switch between       116  OVERWRITE 1  Yes Selects whether the Overwrite Warning is included  WARNING 2   No on the Internet FAX Result Receipt when  programming th
115. T POD   0  0  CH      Off    Soft    Loud       91 94    Not Used       95    PAPER SIZE FA    Factory use only     Wn   OH      Japan     USA CAN    Europe     Other    1  for USA   Canada   2  for Europe   3  for Taiwan           96 97       Not Used             159       UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    5 1 5  F6 Mode  Adjust Parameters  For Copier     Set the machine to Service Mode  and press the    6    key   i  Press the  Start  key to enter the F6 Service Mode   i  Enter the desired code number  or press the    w        a    keys   If you wish to select another code number  press the    w        a    keys   i  Press the  Set  key   i  Enter the desired function code number and press the  Set  key   When the  Clear  key is pressed  the selected code input will not be accepted     Press the  Stop  key   4    Press the    Function    and the    Clear    keys sequentially to exit the service mode   v    Reboot the machine after setting the parameter s  to activate the setting s      Note   1  The Factory Setting is different for each model   2  To change the input value      press the    4      p    keys   3  The machine may accept a       input value that exceeds the specified Setting Range for the  parameters in the table  however  the actual registered value will not exceed the Upper Lower  Limitation value                                                           F6 Mode  No  Item Remarks sening  Range  00 03   Not Used  04  PRINTER REGISTRATION Delay time is adjusted fr
116. To Edit the Retrieved or Backup Internet Parameters File     1  To  From    Subject   2   sender to  end    Your Machine s Internet Parameters Email Sample    FH  set parameters 1234567890   zla xl      File Edit view Insert Format Tools Message Help            Bsn     8   amp y  f  V   U HM     BMS d  GA To   FAx    GA Cc   1     Subject    set parameters 1234567890         From   Your Machine   lt ifax2 panasonic com gt   Subject  Your Machine s SYSTEM PARAMETER List  To  user1  panasonic com     Delete this header before sending the email        Your Machine s SYSTEM PARAMETER List       STATION   PANASONIC     EMAIL   ifax2   panasonic com     DATE TIME   MMM dd yyyy 12 34    st Internet parameters         IP ADDRESS  192 168 3 21     SUBNET MASK 1255 255 255 0     SMTP SERVER  es1 panasonic com    DEF ROUTER  192 168 3 22     DNS SERVER  192 168 3 1     2 ND DNS SERVER 0000     POP SERVER  es1 panasonic com    POP USER NAME  ipfax2        sender  a   d C  PANASONIC TEC  cm   02  PCC ifax2   pcc panasonic com   G end    select domain      01 pcc panasonic com  02 panasonic com    end    relay domain   panasonic com  pcc panasonic com  sales panasonic com  panasonic com   G end   G system  domain panasonic com    a   manager user1  panasonic com     b   relay  rlypass       C   remote  1234567890       d    G end    ldap   Server daper      a  login sonic777      b  password  sbste7       C   base psonic789      d    G end    mib   com Dame  commu       a    com name2 comm
117. U E     CL    2  ONAE   dO d 18vN3u Hey EZ     NAS    A   L 7 ONSAS IE V19 TOSNd    AS                                   Interlock SW        FROM SLOT                            2nd Paper Feeder Module          Polygon Motor                         Pick Up Solenoid    s osmi     ob anons le  kosa    See    zbo Jz EEN  FFA    i ulu  RIESEN  adu  ECEE I Ho8du    ONE  4 TLOSHOU  H3dNV3    ONOAVZ    QNOAvZc  WIAYC                                                                                                                                                                                               Paper Tray                         OL          ENEM     om      uou        movz    Zones   9 Aree       LIAC                                     Main Motor                                        IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE  PARTS WITH A  AMARK ON THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM                                                 INCORPORATE SPECIAL FEATURES IMPORTANT FOR SAFETY     WHEN SERVICING  IT IS ESSENTIAL THAT ONLY  THE CRITICAL COMPONENTS IN THE PARTS IDENTIFIED    MANUFACTURER S SPECIFIED PARTS ARE USED FOR  WITH A A MARK IN THE SCHEMATIC                                Regist  Solenoid    EX z anon S   t Fu 168938    E  anorrz     119 308nd                   k Up    ic    P  Solenoid    HARDWARE KEY             120   220 240 VAC     24 VDC      12 VDC    5 VDC  viren 40 0 VDC    UF 7300   7200 only                                                                            FLASH  SEEN       
118. XB PCB is defective    408 XMT D   Transmitter received RTN after it Receiver receives data with error   Line  transmitted EOP  MPS  or EOM  quality is poor    Receiver is defective   Modem  etc    SC PCB or FXB PCB is defective    409 XMT D   Transmitter receives PIN after it Receiver receives data with error due to  transmitted a post message  such as  poor line quality  and receiving operator  EOP  MPS  EOM  etc  requests voice contact    Receiver is defective   Modem  etc    SC PCB or FXB PCB is defective    410 RCV D Received DCN while waiting for post  Interface or line is faulty   command   EOP  MPS  EOM  etc   Transmitter is defective    411 RCV B Received DCN after transmitting Transmitter is not ready for polling    Polling  NSC  communication   Password does not match between  transmitter and receiver    412 G3 RX B D  No response within 12 seconds in Transmitter is defective   NSS DCS MPS wait state   After SC PCB is defective   transmitting FTT    414 RCV B  No response received after Password does not match between    Polling  transmitting 3rd NSC  transmitter and receiver   Transmitter is defective   No original   document jam  etc     415 XMT B Remote side attempted to receive Inform the remote side that your    Polling  message from your machine in polling   machine does not have the polling             communication        transmission feature        136       UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200       Fax Information Codes                                             
119. Y COUNTER TIMING 0   At feed 0  1  At exit  44 49   Not Used  50  AUTO CONTRAST ADJUST   0  No 1  1  Yes  51  DEPT  COUNTER  COPY  0   No 0  1  Yes  52  DEPT  COUNTER  FAX  0 No 0  1  Yes  53 58   Not Used  59  OPER  ADD TONER 0   Stop 1  ALARM 1   Continue  60  AUTO TRAY SELECTION 0  No 1  1  Yes  61 63  Not Used  64  DEPT  COUNTER  SCAN  0 No 0  1  Yes  65  DEPT  COUNTER  PRINT  0 No 0  1  Yes  66 68  Not Used  69  REDUCE N IN 1 SPACE 0 No 0  1  Yes  70  PMCYCLE 0  No 0  1  1 5K  2  25K  3  5K  4  10K  5  15K  6  20K  7  30K  8  40K  9  60K  10  85K  11  90K  12 120K  13 150K  14   200 K  15   240 K  71 74   Not Used  75  FUSER TEMP SWITCHING   1  Paper1  Low Temp  for Thin Paper  2  2   Paper2  Normal Temp    3   Paper3  76 78   Not Used  79  IMAGE PROCESS 0   Errordif 0  METHOD 1   Dither  80  Not Used  81  FOOLSCAP SIZE 0  B4 0  for Taiwan   1  FLS1 1  2 FLS2                158       UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200       F5 Mode       No     Item    Function    Default Setting       82 83    Not Used       84    PAPER TRAY PRIORITY     Set   6 gt S       85    SIDE VOID  ADF       No    Yes       86    PM CYCLE  OPTICS       No   40K    60K    120 K    240 K    360 K    480 K    600 K       87    PM CYCLE  ADF       No   40K   60K   120K   240K    360 K    480 K    600 K       88    USB PORT FUNCTION      Off    Once    On       89    LAN SPEED DUPLEX      Auto     10 Half    10 Full     100 Half    100 Full       90    BEEP SOUND    N gt   OIR Gobh   A Oh  A oO OT POD O NO O
120. _xxxxxx exe or UF 7200_AU_xxxxxx exe  To    Firmware Data Folder  C  Panasonic   Panasonic FUP   Data    3  Preparing the Main Unit for the Firmware Upgrade  Make sure the unit s Application Password is the same as the tool s password   Make sure the unit is in an idle state  e g  not making copies  not printing  etc       63    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    4  Upgrading the Main Unit s Firmware Code  Start the Network Firmware Update Tool and select the following Firmware Code Folders in the  C  Panasonic Panasonic FUP Data folder  and then follow the display instructions to upgrade the  Main Unit s Firmware Codes              Parent Firmware File Folder Sub Firmware File Folder  V UF 8200_AU_xxxxxx or   SC_STD   UF 8200AxVxxxxx xx    UF 7200_AU_xxxxxx   fcb   UF 82 G3BAAVxxxxx YC                When you select the Parent Folder  the following  Firmware Type window appears  Proper Sub File Folders  are selected automatically by selecting the Firmware  Type    The transferring order is set up automatically           OK       Note    1  Manual mode must be used  when updating the designated version of the firmware or changing the  type of the firmware    Please refer to the Section 2 2   Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool  File Selection  Tab  of the Operating Instructions    2  While updating the firmware code  the display may become garbled  however  it will return to normal  upon completion of the firmware update    3  If the firmware update fails and the unit does
121. a Panasonic FUP    5  Data    C  UsyDrvi     EC  Program Files v      ces                                           1                                     Page 9    Network Firmware Update Tool  LAN     6 1c Select the Firmware Type based on the options  installed in the machine  and click  OK      Select the Firmware Type E    Standard Firmware      Standard Firmware  PCL Firmware    n ript Firmware         6 1d Firmware Code File selection is completed  P    Select the Archive File  Parent Folder or Independent Folder s  that the firmware code file slare stored in   Click  Next gt         Select a Parent File Folder  Complete Set     Continue to Section 7  Folder Name  C  Panasonic Panasonic FUP Data DP 2310_3010_PU_0303    Comment DP 2310 3010 PCL Firmware         i       C Select Independent File Folders  PNL FolderName  C PanasonicYPanasonic FUPYData DP 2310 3010 PU 0303  Version SFDL2PNLAAV10000 PU             SC FolderName  C  Panasonic Panasonic FUP Data DP 2310_3010_PU_0303  Version DP SFDL2DAV10000 PU          SPC  FolderName   CAPanasonicYPanasonic FUUPYData DP 2310 3010 PU 0303  Version SFDL2SPCAAV10000       FAX Folder Name  Version                   6 2a Select Independent File Folders xi    Select the Archive File  Parent Folder or Independent Folder s  that the firmware code file slare stored in     Select  Select Independent File Folders  and                      i C Select a Parent File Folder  Complete Set   click  Browse     for PNL  eee  Comment  PNL Folde
122. ables you to test DNS to verify that it is working  properly  This utility is not available on Windows 98 Me   From the DOS command line  type    NSLOOKUP    to display the following output     C   gt nslookup  Default Server  sv1 labo pcc com  Address  192 168 1 1    NS Name Server  Record in Domain  From the DOS command line  type  Is  t NS   Domain Name   to display the following output      gt  Is  t NS labo pcc com    sv1 labo pcc com    labo pcc com        NS server   sv1 labo pcc com    MX Mail Exchange  Record in Domain  From the DOS command line  type  Is   MX   Domain Name   to display the following output      gt  Is  t MX labo pcc com   sv1 labo pcc com   labo pcc com  MX 10 sv2 labo pcc com    A  Address  Record in Domain  From the DOS command line  type  Is  t A   Domain Name   to display the following output      gt  Is  t A labo pcc com   sv1 labo pcc com     labo pcc com  NS server   sv1 labo pcc com    sv1    sv2  ec5  ec4  efl    192 168 1 1  192 168 1 2  192 168 1 4  192 168 3 4  192 168 3 5        To leave from this menu  type  exit  on the command line        Testing Unit Using the TELNET Command   TELNET is a terminal emulation protocol  TELNET enables PCs and workstations to function as dumb  terminals in sessions with hosts on internet works    From Windows 2000   XP   2003   Vista  use the TELNET to test the communication of TCP IP and  SMTP Protocol manually to the Unit  This method eliminates the SMTP Server     For better understanding  type  teln
123. ace of the roller  with water  Sect  2     ra    Yi  Is the ADF Roller worn out     Y  No Replace the ADF Roller   Sect  2     re  y  Does the ADF Roller drive No  properly  Y  Yes Does the ADF Roller s gear No  system function properly  d  Yes  defective parts   jat                       115    4 4 2     Document Does Not Feed or Multiple Feeds                                                                               UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200                                                                                                 V  Is the ADF Unit closed      Y  Yes E  Close the ADF Unit firmly      Y  Is the adjustment ofthe No  Separator Pad normal  Y  Yes Is the Separator Pad worn No  out  Y  Yes Clean  or adjust the Separator  Pad Pressure  Sect  2     V  Replace the Separator Pad   et  V  Is the ADF Roller clean  No  Y  Yes Clean the surface of the roller  with water  Sect  2          Ye  Is the ADF Roller worn out     Y  No Replace the ADF Roller   Sect  2        Y  Does the ADF Roller drive No  properly  Y  Yes Does the ADF Roller s gear No  System function properly  P  Yes Adjust the gear system  or replace  defective parts                                               116    4 4 3          Co   sam    y Mode  ple                   Document Jam  030  or Skew                        UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200          Close the ADF Unit firmly                                v          Clean  or replace Sensor PCB                                V          C
124. ace the LVPS              No    A       Yes          Y  Check CN on the SC   SDR PCB  and the CIS  harness           Y  Does the problem still  occur              Yes       Y    Replace the CIS  Assembly           Are CN  SC  SDR PCB   and CN  CIS Assembly   connected properly        No  PY    Connect them correctly                   Yes             2  Replace the SCPCB   3  Replace the SDR PCB        1  Replace the Scanner Block           No       Yes          V  Does poor transmitted copy  appear when transmitting to  a specific receiver     1  Check CN  SC PCB    and CN  FXB PCB         Replace if necessary     2  Check the telephone line cable           No     o            Yes  Y       Telephone line quality is poor              The receiving unit may be  defective                 119       Replace the SC PCB           4 5 3     Dialing Problems       Y  Does the unit proceed to                         1  Set documents on the ADF correctly   2  Check the telephone line connection                             Y          Check the registered telephone number                                   Check the dialed telephone number                    Yes  Phase B   No  3  The called party is busy   4  Refer to Sect  4   Le    Y  Are you using One Touch es  or ABBR dialing   No    Y  Are you using direct dialing    i  No  Y  Is the Monitor Volume too   Yes       loud  or too low                 No    Let    Y          Adjust the monitor volume by pressing the   4    or   gt   curser
125. address setting        207       UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    8 Options and Supplies    8 1  Installing the Internet Fax   Email   Network Scanner Module   UE 404093     8 1 1  Contents    Visually check the condition and contents of the box for completeness  or for any shipping damage before  starting the installation    Remove all tapes  and the packing materials used to secure the units during shipment    After unpacking  dispose of the packing materials appropriately              No  Qty  Description Remarks  1 1 Hardware Key NWS KEY  2 1 Installation Instructions This document                   Note   Refer to the Parts Manual for Part Number s   Packing  and Accessories in details     8 1 2  Installation    CAUTION   Unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation      1  Remove 1 Screw  and the SD Card Cover    2  Remove 7 Screws    3  Remove the Rear Cover     Caution   Remove the SD Memory Card if it was installed      4  Loosen 6 Screws    5  Remove the SC Cover        208    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200   6  Install the Hardware Key into the connector  CN517   on the SC PC Board     Caution   The connector is keyed  to prevent damage to the SC  PC Board  install the Hardware Key as illustrated  Do    not force the Hardware Key into the connector if facing  the wrong way      7  Proceed with the installation of other options  If  finished  reinstall all Harnesses and Covers    8  Reinstall the SD Memory Card if it was removed    9  Plug the AC Power Cord first
126. aged cord can cause fire or electric shocks     Never touch a power cord with wet hands  Danger of electric shock exists     If the power cord is damaged  or insulated wires are exposed  contact the authorized  Panasonic dealer for a replacement  Using a damaged cord can cause fire or electric  shocks     Stop operation immediately if your machine emits smoke  excessive heat  unusual noise  or abnormal smell   or if water is spilt onto the machine  These conditions can cause fire  Immediately switch Off and unplug the  machine  and contact the authorized Panasonic dealer     Do not disconnect or reconnect the machine while the power switch is in the On position  Disconnecting a live  connector can cause arcing  consequently deforming the plug and cause fire     When disconnecting the machine  grasp the plug instead of the cord  Pulling on a cord forcibly can damage it   and cause fire  or an electric shock     When the machine is not used over an extended period of time  switch it Off and unplug it  If an unused  machine is left connected to a power source for a long period  degraded insulation can cause electric shocks   current leakage or fire     Be sure to switch Off  and unplug the machine before accessing the interior of the machine for cleaning   maintenance or fault clearance  Access to a live machine s interior can cause an electric shock     Once a month  unplug the machine and check the power cord for the following  If you notice any unusual  condition  contact you
127. ality Problems       Is the LED Array abnormal                                                                                                                                   Check with F4 Mode  Check Output    Yes  No 120 Lamp  j  No  Replace the CIS Assembly   Are there any foreign particles  or Yes  paper pieces in the scanning area  Y  No Remove the foreign particles  or paper pieces  from the scanning area   rat  V  Is the scanning area dirty  Yes  V  No 1  Clean the Scanning Glass   2  Clean the White Sheet      g Yes  Are the Transmitting Rollers dirty   Y  Na Clean the rollers      Yes       Isthe Scanner Assembly abnormal                 No       Y       1  Check SC PCB    2  Check CIS Assembly    3  Replace the SC PCB  Sect  2      4  Replace the CIS Assembly  Sect  2                114    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    4 4   4 4 1     Document Feeder  ADF     No Document Feed                                                                               Y    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200          Clean  or adjust the Separator                                                                                                                            Adjust the gear system  or replace    V  Is the ADF Unit closed  No  Y  Yes ee  Close the ADF Unit firmly   re  y  Is the adjustment of the No  Separator Pad normal  Y  Yes Is the Separator Pad worn No  out   Yes  t Pad Pressure  Sect  2     Replace the Separator Pad   rt  V  Is the ADF Roller clean  He  V  Ne Clean the surf
128. aper     6 3 3  Paper Feed    Media Tray   The main motor drives the Pick Up Roller after the Pick Up Solenoid is energized  which engages the Pick  Up Roller Clutch and feeds a sheet of paper  The paper is pushed to the Paper Feed Roller  which  overdrives the paper slightly causing a buckle to ensure the paper is aligned with the stationary Registration  Roller    While triggering the Registration Sensor notifying the CPU paper is ready to feed           Feed Roller                                     Pinch Roller  Registration Roller                                                                            Registration Sensor   Pick Up Roller  Paper Path Sensor Pickup Solenoid    6 3 4  Laser Scan Unit  Exposure     6 3 4 1  Operation Theory    The light beam from the Laser Diode  light source  is modulated by the digital signal  nVIDEO  and  converted to parallel light waves by the Collimator Lens  The beam is then sent to the rotating Polygon  Mirror  polygon scanner   where it is reflected through the F  Lens and then focused onto the OPC Drum  surface  The diameter of the beam is about 80 um  and the light moves across the surface of the OPC Drum  in the scanning direction of right to left  As the drum rotates  sub scans   a static image is formed where the  laser beam touches the drum surface    The laser beam is also deflected to the Timing Sensor  This sensor controls the start timing of scanning on  the drum  providing a consistent left margin  The CPU uses the Ti
129. ase ensure that the machine is installed near a wall outlet and is easily accessible       This section explains the Warnings and Cautions used in the machine and or this manual        A WARNING  Denotes a potential hazard that could result in serious injury or death     A CAUTION  Denotes hazards that could result in minor injury or damage to the machine        a This section also explains the Warnings and Cautions used in the machine and or this manual           S 9 These symbols are used to alert operators to a specific operating procedure that must not    Q     These symbols are used to alert operators to a specific operating procedure that must be    be performed     emphasized in order to operate the machine safely            N WARNING    Power and Ground Connection Cautions    e 99o ADO ee    Ensure that the plug connection is free of dust  In a damp environment  a contaminated connector can draw a  significant amount of current that can generate heat and eventually cause fire if left unattended over an  extended period of time     Always use the power cord provided with your machine  When an extension power cord is required  always  use a properly rated cord    e 120 V 15 A or AC 220   240V 10 A   If you use a cord with an unspecified current rating  it may be underrated  and the machine  or plug may emit  smoke  orbecome hot to the touch     Do not attempt to repair  pull  bend  chafe or otherwise damage the power cord  Do not place a heavy object  on the cord  A dam
130. ations  maximum    001 to 920   When the SD Memory Card is installed   2001 to 2080   indicates One Touch numbers from 01 to 80   4  This header must be deleted before the email is sent to your machine for reprogramming of Auto  Dialer    5  The information following the         sign is ignored by your machine  therefore  you can leave it as is or  delete it if you wish     Note   1  The email address and the telephone number cannot be programmed via email when    Auto Dialer Number has been used for communication reservation     Received documents are stored in the image data memory of the machine     While the machine is communicating or printing   2  When the email address and telephone number are programmed via email  a program result email is  sent back   3  Some email applications automatically insert a line feed in the middle of a line when the number of  characters in a line exceed a specific number  Turn    Off    the automatic line feed  or define the number of  characters per line to prevent a line feed  or the data will be ignored     9 3 1  Deleting the Entire Auto Dialer    If you wish to delete the entire Auto Dialer data in your machine  type the following command in the body of  the email message      command  delete     Qend    This command can also be inserted before the  begin to  end block  to erase the entire Auto Dialer data  first  then reprogram it with new data    This method will also prevent the  Overwrite Warning Message  that is sent back from yo
131. ault   values    Note  Turn the Power Switch to the OFF and back to the  ON position to enable the parameter settings    02  JOURNAL CLEAR Clears the Journal contents    03  AUTO DIAL CLEAR Clears the One touch  ABBR Numbers and Phone Books    04  PROGRAM DIAL CLEAR Clears the Program keys    05  LOGO ID PSWD CLEAR Clears the Logo  ID  Polling Password    06  LBP ERROR LOG CLEAR   Clears the Printer Error Log     07  SHIPMENT SET Deletes all setting information  except parameter number  80 and 81  then set default values     08  FLASH MEMORY CLEAR   Deletes all information in the Flash Memory   09  ALL JOB CLEAR Clears all Jobs stored in Flash Memory                                                  185    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    52 7  FAX Service Mode 8  Check  amp  Call     5 2 7 1  Overview    This feature enables the Authorized Servicing Dealers to manage and improve the machine maintenance to  their customers by alerting them of equipment problems  It also can be used as a Supply Sales Tool by  alerting the Dealer that the unit is running Low on Toner  The function overview is as follows     1  The machine s printer error information is stored in the Printer Report    2  The printer report can be manually printed when required    3  When printer errors occurs  the unit can automatically transmit the Service Alert Report to the pre   registered telephone number or email address    4  When the unit detects Low Toner or PM counter reached the maintenance timing  it can
132. autodialer via set to Valid    Email from a PC    731 RCV LAN Dialer full while Relayed Dial buffer for manual number dialing  Transmission Request was received    70 stations  is being used    741 XMT  PSTN   Unable to dial Deleted the registered station name   Polling before dialing with Timer Controlled  Communications  etc   742 XMT PSTN   Unable to forward to the pre  Communication error with the pre   NYSE Fax   LAN   programmed Supervisor s Fax programmed Supervisor s Fax machine  Forward machine or PC  or PC    USA and Canada Only   Busy  No Response  etc    800 Relay PSTN   The machine was requested to relay  Comm  a document but has no Relay Hub  capability   814   Conf  XMT   PSTN   The remote station does not have  Conf  Relay XMT nor Confidential  Polling Communication capability   Relay  Comm   815  Conf  RCV   PSTN Mailbox full   816 Conf  PSTN   The received Polling Password did  Polled not match   825  Conf  ROV   PSTN   Parameter settings of the remote  Conf  station are not properly set   Polled  850 Relay   Relay Communication is rejected  The dept  code of the Fax Driver   Comm  Panafax Desktop is mismatched with  the registered code in the machine   870  MEMXMT PSTN Memory overflow occurred while Memory overflow on the Fax   MEMRCV   LAN  storing documents into memory   871   MEM XMT   PSTN   Memory management file number File number and page number overflow  MEM RCV   LAN and page number exceeded while on the Fax   storing documents into memory   880   
133. between  relay   domain to  end block  Register up to 10 Domain Names that have been  authorized to access your machine for Relayed XMT Request   30  characters maximum    5   system to  end   Defines the Internet Parameters to be set in section  5  between   system to  end block  Register the following Internet Parameters    a  Default Domain  50 characters maximum    The syntax is   domain    Default domain name     b  Manager s Email Address  60 characters maximum    The syntax is   manager    Manager s Email Address     c  Relay XMT Password  10 characters maximum    The syntax is   relay    Relay XMT Password    Quotation marks  enclosing the password  required    d  Remote Password  10 characters maximum    The syntax is   remote    Remote Password    Quotation marks  enclosing the password  is required    6   ldap to end   Defines the LDAP Parameters to be set in section  6  between  ldap to   end block  Register the following Internet Parameters    a  LDAP Server Name  60 characters maximum    The syntax is   server    LDAP Server Name    b  LDAP Login Name  40 characters maximum    The syntax is   login    LDAP Login Name     c  DAP Password  10 characters maximum    The syntax is   password    LDAP Password    Quotation marks  enclosing the password  is required  as shown in the example above    d  LDAP Search Base  60 characters maximum    The syntax is base    LDAP Search Base     7   mib to  end   Defines the MIB to be set in section  7  between  mib to  end bloc
134. bject    line of your email and follow the steps below      set parameters password   X   To store the Internet Parameters     set abbr password     To store the Auto Dialer    where the  password  is the Remote Password programmed in your machine s User Parameters     i e  123456789    Make sure that the CC     Bcc    lines and the body of the email message are Blank     222    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200      Create a New Email Message  fill out the  To  and  From  Address line and the Subject line information  for section  1  below   To   Your machine s email address   From    This field is normally not visible when creating new email message s    It is your default email address  email application   for retrieving each Parameters and for  error message notification   Subject   To Store data  type    set parameters password     set abbr password      Open the backup  Internet Parameters and or Auto Dialer text file  Copy the body text and paste it on  the body of the newly created email message     Delete any headers that may be present in the body of the email  as unsupported data will be rejected   The information following the         sign is ignored by your machine     Edit a parameter and or add additional parameters     When finished  use the  File Save as     command and save the updated file with   txt  extension as a  backup     Send the email message to your machine to update the Internet Parameters and or Auto Dialer     223    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    9 2  
135. ce Mode and that the PC can ping it successfully before  proceeding     For other models    If the device password  Service Mode F7 01   Key Operator ID Code  or Operation Password   was changed from the default value  0000 or 000   it is not possible to program the firmware code   In this case  enter the password in advance to the Default Password in the Configuration dialog  box  or enter the password at each communication     For the 3 digit Key Operator Password devices  only the first three digits  000  of the default value  are singled out of the 4 digit  0000  value     Make sure the device is not in use  i e  copying or printing  when performing a firmware update   Note  It is recommended to update the firmware at night due to lower activity of the device     Ensure the device is not in Service Mode and that the PC can ping it successfully before  proceeding     Preparing the Firmware Code    Copy the firmware Code file s  to the following folder     C  Panasonic  Panasonic FUP  Data    Note  An Archive File  i e  DP 2310 PU 030327 exe  extracts the Firmware Code Files automatically    into the designated folder without needing to paste the file into the folder manually  In this case  the file may be downloaded to the desktop or to any other easily accessible location on the hard  disk drive     Network Firmware Update Tool  LAN     4  Using the Network Firmware Update Tool    1  Please close all applications that are currently running     Note  When using the Network
136. ce the Toner Cartridge                                      Y  1  Clean the BTR with a soft  dry                                                       Roller surfaces clean     1  S  FH y  5 Is the printout in Service Yes  S Mode 3 normal  Y  No  Y No  Is the Toner Cartridge Y  operational  1  Clean the Corona Wire as  Ves illustrated below   Are there any foreign particles  Yes  or stains on the BTR   No  cloth   2  Replace the BTR   Y  Is the Laser Unit  LSU  No  normal  v  Yes  Replace the Laser Unit  LSU    M    Y  Are the Fuser  and Pressure   No             Yes    Y          Clean  or replace the rollers                    Carefully wipe the Corona Wire in the Toner Cartri ge by sliding a dry Cotton Swab    from end to end a few times        105    Corona Wire    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    4 3 6  Horizontal Dark Lines             Paper Travel   gt           START  gt                                                                                                                                                              Is the printout in Service Yes  Mode 3 normal   No    Check the Scanner mechanism      Y  Is the Toner Cartridge No  operational  Y  Yes Replace the Toner Cartridge   Y  Are there any foreign Yes  particles  or stains on the BTR  i  No 1  Clean the BTR with a soft   dry cloth   2  Replace the BTR   Y  J No  Is the Laser Unit  LSU  normal     Yes Replace the Laser Unit  LSU    la    V   No  Is the Power Supply Unit  normal      HVPS  1  Check all conn
137. chine    Plug the AC Power Cord to turn on power    Reconnect the Telephone Line  LAN and or USB Cables    Reprogram the F5  amp  F6 Parameters according to the lists printed in Step 1  if the settings are other  than factory default     Note     After the update is completed  the machine reboots itself and returns to standby mode    Selecting the  Auto Mode   prompts the unit to check the configuration and installed options  and all  the necessary firmware is updated automatically    Confirm that the update was successfully completed by checking the Firmware Version with F9  Parameters F9 02 xx     Caution     3 5 5     If the unit does not boot up properly in Step 9   refer to 3 5 7   Firmware Emergency Recovery     Creating a Master Firmware SD Memory Card using a PC    1  Install the  SD Memory Card Firmware Writing Tool  to your PC   The Tool can be downloaded from your sales company s Web Site  Please refer to the Tool s  Operating Instructions file for additional details     2  Preparing the Firmware Code  Access the Service Web site to download the latest Firmware Code  When performing the  self extraction wizard for preparing the Firmware Code File  the Archive will be extracted automatically  into the designated folder     Example    From    Firmware Code File  UF 8200_AU_xxxxxx exe or UF 7200_AU_xxxxxx exe  To    Firmware Data Folder  C   Panasonic   Panasonic FUP   Data    3  Preparing the Master Firmware SD Memory Card    1   2   3     Insert the SD Memory Card  
138. chspannungsbauteil kann zu elektrischen Schl  gen f  hren     Versuchen Sie nicht  die Maschinenkonfiguration zu   ndern oder Teile zu modifizieren  Eine unbefugte  Modifikation kann zu Rauch oder Br  nden f  hren     COADO       VerbrauchsmaterialienSchutzmaBnahmen    Niemals Toner  Tonerkassette oder Tonerabfallbehalter in offenes Feuer werfen  In der Kassette verbleibender  Toner kann eine Explosion verursachen und zu Verbrennungen und oder Verletzungen f  hren           N ACHTUNG    Vorsichtsma  regeln zu Aufstellung und Transport    Platzieren Sie die Maschine nicht in der N  he von Heizk  rpern oder fl  chtigen  entflammbaren oder  brenbaren Materialien wie Vorh  nge  die Feuer fangen k  nnen           Stellen Sie die Maschine nicht in einer hei  en  feuchten  staubigen oder schlecht bel  fteten Umgebung auf  L  ngerer Betrieb  unter diesen Bedingungen kann zu Br  nden oder elektrischen Schl  gen f  hren     Beim Aufstellungs  nderung des Ger  ts wenden Sie sich an Ihren Panasonic Fachh  ndler     Beim Transport der Maschine ziehen Sie den Netzstecker von der Steckdose ab  Wenn die Maschine bei eingestecktem Netzkabel    Die Maschine auf eine ebene und feste Oberfl  che stellen  Wenn sie geneigt wird  kann die Maschine umkippen und Verletzungen verursachen       und  stecker bewegt wird  kann das Netzkabel besch  digt werden  was zu Br  nden oder elektrischen Schl  gen f  hren kann     Bedienungs Schutzma  nahmen    Bringen Sie keinen Magneten in die N  he des Sicherhei
139. command     begin    is missing in the      begin    block  add the     begin    command and try again        Format Error    lt  begin block  the      end    command is missing       The block termination command   dend  is missing in the      begin    block  add the     end    command and try again        Format Error    lt  system block  the      end    command is missing       The block termination command   dend  is missing in the      system    block  add the     end    command and try again        Format Error    lt  sender block  the      end    command is missing       The block termination command   dend  is missing in the      sender    block  add the     end    command and try again        Format Error   lt  domain block  the      end    command is missing       The block termination command   dend  is missing in the      domain    block  add the     end    command and try again        Format Error    lt  program block  the      end    command is missing       The block termination command   dend  is missing in the      program    block  add the     end    command and try again        Format Error    lt  system block  the      system    command is missing       The system block start command   Qsystem   is missing in  the     system    block  add the     system    command and try  again        Permission denied     054 Fax  Forward parameter is set to  Valid      Set the Fax Forward parameter to  Invalid         10          Permission denied     Fax machine is  bu
140. correct   3  Fuser temperature is low   4  Thermistor is defective   5  Fuser Lamp connector is disconnected   6  Fuser Thermostat is defective   7  Fuser Lamp is defective   8  SPC PCB connector is disconnected   9  1  2  3  4  5  6            SPC PCB is defective      Exhaust Fan connector is disconnected      Exhaust Fan is defective      LVPS connector is disconnected      LVPS is defective      SPC PCB is defective      Inclination Sensor detected Inclination of the machine   Check the machine is placed properly  and reset the  machine by unplugging the power cord from the outlet  and plug the power cord again        E4 10   Exhaust Fan Motor Rotation   Fuser Unit Side   Inclination Detection                   E5  System Error  Code Function Check Points    E5 11  Printer Engine Communication   SC SPC PCB connector is disconnected   Abnormal   SC SPC PCB is defective     E5 12   Main CPU SPC Interface Error   SC SPC PCB connector is disconnected     SC SPC PCB is defective     1  2  1  2  E5 19  Scanner Line Synchronization 1  SC SPC PCB connector is disconnected   2  1  2  3                  SC SPC PCB is defective     Sort Memory defective       SC PCB connector is disconnected     SC PCB defective        E5 40   Sort Memory Abnormal             E7  Optional Unit Error  Code Function Check Points    E7 90   Hardware Key Abnormal 1  Incorrect Hardware Key is installed   2  Hardware Key is defective                       Note   Error codes will appear only when the optio
141. crew  and the SD Card Cover  605     2  Remove 7 Screws    3  Remove the Rear Cover  604      Caution   Remove the SD Memory Card if it was installed      2  Exit Cover      1  Remove the Rear Cover  604     Refer to 2 3 1   1 Rear Cover      2  Remove 3 Screws     3  Remove the Exit Cover  602      Caution   When reinstalling the Exit Cover  make sure 2 Latches  are fitted inside of the Inner Cover               3  Control Panel Unit      1  Remove the Rear Cover  604     Refer to 2 3 1   1 Rear Cover      2  Remove the Exit Cover  602     Refer to 2 3 1   2 Exit Cover      3  Open the Right Cover  614      4  Remove 2 Screws     5  Remove the Control Panel Unit        35    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200   6  Disconnect the Harness on the PNL1 PC Board   CN230       4  Top Cover      1  Remove the Rear Cover  604     Refer to 2 3 1   1 Rear Cover      2  Remove the Exit Cover  602     Refer to 2 3 1   2 Exit Cover      3  Remove the Control Panel Unit    Refer to 2 3 1   3 Control Panel Unit      4  Open the ADF Cover Assembly         5  Remove 3 Screws    6  Lift he ADF Tray Assembly      7  Remove 2 Screws    8  Release the Latch Hook on the Top Cover  601         36          UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200   9  Release 2 Latch Hooks and remove the Top Cover   601       5  Front Cover Assembly      1  Remove the Rear Cover  604     Refer to 2 3 1   1 Rear Cover      2  Remove the Exit Cover  602     Refer to 2 3 1   2  Exit Cover      3  Remove the Control Panel Unit    Refer to 2
142. d Address preprogrammed in Phone Book using the  originating fax s Numeric ID  TSI frame information     154   ROUTE HEADER   1 Originator   Selecting the type of Email header to be included in the  FMT 2 Relay  From  field of each routed faxes    Station Originator   The originating fax machine s TSI will appear in the     From    field of the routed Email    Relay Station    The routing station s Email address will appear in the     From    field of the routed Email    155   PRINT ROUTED   1 Inc  Only Selecting whether a received fax to be routed is always  DOC 2 Always printed or only when the routing operation fails    156 PRT FORWARD   1 Inc  Only Selecting whether a memory received fax or Email to be  DOC 2 Always forwarded is always printed or only when forwarding is   incomplete    157 TRANSACTION   1 Invalid Selecting whether the machine sends a transaction  JRNL 2 Valid journal to the pre programmed Email address    158 PC REMOTE  1 Invalid Selecting whether the machine will accept commands  UPDATE 2 Valid from an Email application to     a  Program the Internet Parameters   b  Program the Auto Dialer   c  Allow retrieval of the Journal   159   SUBJ  LINE  1 Invalid Selecting whether the  Subject  line can be programmed  ENTRY 2 Valid during each transmission    160 DEFAULT 1 Invalid Selecting whether the machine accepts to insert the  DOMAIN  2 Valid Default Domain when entering Manual Number Dialing    161 DNS SERVER 1 Invalid Selecting whether to use the DNS Serv
143. d exposure to  these adverse conditions can cause fire or electric shocks     Place the machine on a level and sturdy surface that can withstand the weight of the machine   Refer to the Specifications section for the weight of the machine   If tilted  the machine may tip over and cause injuries     When relocating the machine  remove the toner and or developer  and pack the machine with proper  packing materials for shipping     When moving the machine  be sure to unplug the power cord from the outlet  If the machine is moved with the  power cord attached  it can cause damage to the cord which could result in fire or electric shock      N CAUTION    Operating Safeguards    Do not place a magnet near the safety switch of the machine  A magnet can activate the  machine accidentally  resulting in injuries     Do not use a highly flammable spray  or solvent near the machine  It can cause fire     When copying a thick document  do not use excessive force to press it against the scanning  glass  The glass may break and cause injuries     Never touch a labelled area found on  or near the heat roller You can get burnt  If a sheet of  paper is wrapped around the heat roller  do not try to remove it yourself to avoid injuries or  burns  Switch Off the machine immediately  and wait until it cools down     Do not use conductive paper  e g  folding paper  carbon paper and coated paper  When a  paper jam occurs  they can cause a short circuit and fire     Do not place any heavy object on t
144. d in     C Select a Parent File Folder  Complete Set   Folder Name  Comment             Select Independent File Folders    PNL Folder Name  C  Panasonic Panasonic FUP Data DP 2310_3010_PU_0303 Browse               Version SFDL2PNLAAV10000_PU   SC FolderName    C  Panasonic Panasonic FUP Data DP 2310_3010_PU_0303 Browse       Version OP SFDL2DAV10000_PU   SPC FolderName    C  Panasonic PanasonicFUP Data DP 2310_3010_PU_0303 Fees  Version SFDUZSPCAAVTOODI          FAX Folder Name Browse         Version                Page 11    Network Firmware Update Tool  LAN     Page 12    7     The version check for the specified devices Network firmware update rool aH X  st a rt S a u t o m at i C a   ly The Network Firmware Update Tool is retrieving the firmware information from the specified devices        Version check start  10 74 229 171    If O destinations fail the version check go to the Version check completed 1074 2291171    next ste p  Destinationfs  that failed Version Check  0  Click Next  to go the next step     Click  Next gt       Note  If a timeout error occurs  please confirm  that the device is not currently in Service Mode  and also that the Device   s IP address pings  successfully  You may need to go back and  change some of the settings within the tool  before proceeding with the update                          Verify that the information you want to update is TXT E  correct before proceeding  Voce an csl ar senda paa vr ec Pu   Then click  Next gt    CREE ens  Note 
145. d select the following Firmware Code Parent File Folder in  the C  Panasonic Panasonic FUP Data folder  and select the Firmware Code Type then follow the    64    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    display instructions to upgrade the Main Unit s Firmware Codes   You must process each firmware file separately in this manner and sequence              Parent Firmware File Folder Sub Firmware File Folder Firmware File  VUF 8200 AU xxxxxx or VSC STD UF 8200AxVxxxxx xx   UF 8200AxVxxxxx  xx bin  V UF 7200 AU xxxxxx   fcb   UF 82 G3BAAVxxxxx YC  UF 82 G3BAAVxxxxx WC bin                      When you select the Parent Folder  the following Firmware Type    prerez                   Window appears  Proper Firmware Files are selected automatically by          selecting the Firmware Type   The transferring order is set up automatically     OK       Note     1    2  3    3 5 4       While updating the firmware code  the display may become garbled  however  it will return to normal  upon completion of the firmware update      Please refer to the service manual for additional details      The suffix   xx  for the Folder Name or File Name may not exist depending on the destination  location     Updating the Firmware using the Master Firmware SD Memory Card    Caution   Do not remove the SD Memory Card or turn the power OFF during Formatting or while Updating the  Firmware     Note     1     2     When a New  Blank  SD Memory Card is detected for the first time  a prompt for Formatting will  appea
146. dels and the Destinations   2  Availability may differ as per destination  Please ask your sales company for detail   3  Genuine SD Memory Cards depict an SD Logo on their label     Panasonic s 512 MB Sample is shown below         28    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    1 5  External View    1  Standard Configuration           For USA Only     Complies with FDA radiation  gt   performance standards  21 CFR  Subchapter J                                                                                          17 72 in  450 mm   19 80 in  503 mm     Right View           17 32 in  440 mm   17 48 in  444 mm     Front View    CLASS 38 INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AND INTERLOCKS DEFEATED AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM   Rayormement laser classe JA invesible en cas d ouverture et de d  faut de s  curit    EXPOSITION DANGEREUSE AU FAISCEAU  Um be ge  ffneten Deg den Aert von Klasse 36 unsichtbare Laserstrahlung Tu verhindern  muss Ge Stromversorgung des Lasers unterbrochen werden  RADIACI  N LASER DE CLASE 38 INVISIBLE CUANDO SE ABRE LA PUERTA CON EL BLOQUEO IMVAUDADO  EVITE LA EXPOSICION A LOS RAYOS CXPOGITION DANGERCUSX  AU FAISCEAU   LUOKKA 3B NAKYMATONTA JA VAARALLISTA LASERSATEILYA  JOS LAITTEEN KANSI AVATAAN KESKEN SKANNAUKSEN JA Won Ure be ge  finsten Deckt den Andit von Fane 30 urav Lanting  SUOJALUKITUS OHITETAAN  V  LT   SUORAA ALTISTUMISTA S  TEELLE zu VOTE cern  mess de Sewmwensongung des Laser wteteocten worden      KLASSE 3B USYNLIG LASERSTI ING NAR ABEN OG SIKKERHEDSL  S
147. e ADF Cover Assembly     7  Turn the ADF Drive Assembly upside down     8  Release the Paper Transfer Motor Harness from 7  Clamps      9  Unhook the Tension 2 Spring  332     10  Remove 3 Screws    11  Remove the Paper Transfer Motor Assembly      12  Remove 4 Screws    13  Remove the Paper Transfer Motor Assembly        44       UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200      Paper Feed Motor gt      14  Open the ADF Cover Assembly    Refer to 2 3 1   4  Top Cover      15  Remove the Stamp Unit  422     Refer to 2 3 2   2 Stamp Unit      16  Remove the Separation Roller Cover    Refer to 2 3 2   3 Roller Assembly      17  Remove the Paper Guide  433  and CIS Assembly    Refer to 2 3 2   4 CIS  Contact Image Sensor   Assembly     18  Remove 1 Screw    19  Remove the Plate Holder  509      20  Remove 1 Screw   21  Remove the Plate Holder  509              o         22  Remove 4 Screws    23  Remove the Separation Guide Plate Assembly      24  Disconnect the Harness on the Paper Feed Motor     45    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200     25  Remove 1 Screw    26  Remove the ADF Motor Assembly        2 3 3  Control Panel Unit   lt PNL1 PC Board and PNL2 PC Board gt      1  Remove the Control Panel Unit    Refer to 2 3 1   3 Control Panel Unit     2  Disconnect all the Harnesses on PNL1 PC Board    3  Remove 4 Screws    4  Remove the PNL1 PC Board  1804  from the Spacer     Note   Remove the PNL1 PC Board by nipping the spacer  with a pliers as illustrated      5  Remove 20 Screws    6  Remove the PNL2
148. e Auto Dialer via email   117    Not Used  119  120  FORWARD ALL  1   Off  COM    On   Euro and Other  Destinations   121  FAC LOCAL 1 7 Inc  PRINT 2   ON ALWAYS         Euro and Other  Destinations              173       UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200       Function Parameter Table                                                                                                       No  Parameter Selections Function  122  LDAP 1   Off Selects whether to use the LDAP Server  Special  2 0n characters used in the LDAP  may not be recognized  and display incorrectly   123  ONE RING 1   Off When Function Parameter No  45  Ring Detect  SOUND 2   On Count  is set to 1 Ring  and this parameter is enabled   USA and  On   the machine will only ring once out loud   Canada Only  answering on the second ring count   124     Not Used  199  200     See Note 5  299  Note 1  Continuous Polling  Station Mode   This feature allows you to Store or Add documents into a Polled file in memory   To enable the Continuous Polling feature set the Function Parameter No  003 to    2 STN      Station    Depending on the setting of the User Parameter  Facsimile     No  119  QWERTY KEYBOARD      one of the following operations is available    1  One Touch  The upper  40   401  Key is reserved for  Store 4 Polling  function  and cannot be changed   To prepare document s  to be polled  simply place the document s  on the ADF  then press the       40  Key on the Keyboard  407   LOWER Indicator turned OFF  to Store
149. e sure the settings of the machine  and delete the backup data from the SD  Memory Card or from the PC     58    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200                                                             3 2  Required Tools  No  Tools No  Tools   1  Soft Cloth 7  Pliers   2  Isopropyl Alcohol 8  Cotton Swab   3   Phillips Screwdriver   2  9  Brush   KS 660   Conductive Grease  4  Stubby Phillips Screwdriver   2  10   Available from Shin Etsu Silicones of America  Inc   URL  http   www shinetsusilicones com   Molykote EM 50L Grease  5  Slotted Screwdriver  3 32 in  11   Available from Dow Corning   URL  http   www dowcorning com   6  Tweezer  3 2 1  Preventive Maintenance Method  No  Part Description importan Comments  Action  1  Print the RAM DATA for reference and as a precaution   1  Memory Data Check 2  After completing the task s   print and compare the RAM  DATA with the previously printed one   1  Clean the Rollers with Wet soft cloth  Water    Note    2 E E ER S For stubborn toner accumulation  wipe with a soft cloth  saturated with Isopropyl Alcohol first  then follow up with a  soft cloth saturated with water    1  Clean the Scanning Glass or White Reference Sheet with    Check  amp     3  Scanner Unit Clean Isopropyl Alcohol when required   2  Clean it with Wet soft cloth   4 Transmitter Unit Check  amp  1  Remove any foreign obstacles   Clean 2  Clean the Rollers with Wet soft cloth  Water    1  Check the Harnesses    5  Inspection Items Check 2  Check the Connectors  
150. eceived the unit will re boot automatically and  return to standby  The unit doesn t boot automatically when you select an independent file   The  display returns to  Update in Progress   Cycle the power Off On to reset the unit if the firmware  code file transfer is finished and the display shows Completed     For Parallel Connected Unit    Every time the machine finishes receiving a firmware code file the unit deletes  rewrites the  firmware code and then re boots  Set the unit back to Parallel Firmware Update in Service Mode  after boot up to continue the firmware update     When the transfers of all the firmware files are x     finished  click  Finish  to close the tool     Note  For USB Connected Unit only   When the unit returns to standby  Plug  and Play of the printer will popup   Click  Cancel  to close the Printer Plug  and Play window     A Firmware Deletion confirmation screen will  appear     Click  Yes  to delete the firmware code files  that you used for the update  or click  No  to  keep the firmware code files in your PC for  future use        Selected file s  are transferred   Each file is transferred to the Spooler one by one     File Name  Ba  Completed DP SFDL24AY00008_PU BIN  E Completed SFDL2SPCAAV10000 BIN  E amp  Completed SFDL2PNLAAV10000 PU BIN             E Cancel         Local Firmware Update Tool    would you like to delete the original firmware code files   C  Panasonic Panasonic FUP Data DP 2310_3010_PU_030327    No    Page 13    Local Firmware
151. ecting whether the QWERTY Keyboard functions as a  KEYBOARD so Quick Name   One Touch Dialing Keys or as Quick Name Search Keys  Search of the station name              One Touch   Each key  1 40  is assigned with an Email Address or  a Telephone Number for quick dialing     Quick Name Search   Entering the first letter of the station  Search name for  quick name search of the programmed station and  quick dialing           202    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200                                                                         No  Parameter Sering Setting Comments  Number  121   AUTO RESET 1 OFF Selecting the control panel reset time   TIME 2 30 sec   T 1 min   4 2 min   5 3 min   6 4 min    122  DIAL PREFIX        Setting the Dial Prefix number  Max  4 digits   When the  machine detects 10 digits telephone number  excluding  any characters  such as          being dialed  it will  automatically append the preset Dial Prefix number   When the telephone number is less or more than 10  digits in length  the Dial Prefix number is not appended    125   CONFIRM  1 Invalid Selecting whether to confirm the destination    STATIONS 2 Valid Invalid   The document can be sent without confirmation   Valid   The document cannot be sent unless the destination is  confirmed   126   USER AUTH  1 Invalid Selecting whether use the User Authentication function  Copy 2 Valid for Copy  Fax  Printer  and Scanner   Fax  Printer  Scanner  132   VIA FAX  1 Invalid Selecting whether use the FAX Server
152. ectors  and  Yes voltages on the Power    Supply Unit    2  Check the Connector  and  voltage on the Power Supply                                  Unit  HVPS    3  Replace the Power Supply  Unit  HVPS    ka    V  Are the Fuser  and Pressure   No  Roller surfaces clean  i       Yes Clean  or replace the rollers                    106    4 3 7              Paper Travel mp       Dark Background    CSTART  gt                    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200          Check the Scanner mechanism                                                                                                                                      voltages on the Power Supply                         Is the printout in Service Yes  Mode 3 normal  Y  No  V  Is the recording paper damp     Yes  Y  No f  Replace the recording paper     N  Is the Toner Cartridge e  operational  V  V Replace the Toner Cartridge   es      No  Is the Laser Unit  LSU  normal     Yes Replace the Laser Unit  LSU    pi    N  Is the Power Supply Unit si   HVPS  normal  H  Ves 1  Check all connectors  and  Unit  HVPS    2  Replace the Power Supply Unit   HVPS    ra  V  Are the Fuser  and Pressure No    Roller surfaces clean           Y       Yes    Fu          Clean  or replace the rollers                    107    4 3 8  Light Print             Paper Travel         Y          UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200                                                                                                                                        
153. ei zugeschalteter Netzspannung die SC   und oder andere Leiterplatten besch digt werden     AUSSCHALTEN der Netzspannung   lt Zur Bezugnahme gt     1  Das Telefonkabel abtrennen    2  Das die LAN USB Kabel abtrennen   falls angeschlossen    3  Das Netzkabel abtrennen     Abziehen      Manche Modelle haben Netzkabel  einen Netzschalter       Es ist zwar unwahrscheinlich  aber theoretisch m glich  dass bei Arbeiten am Ger t   w hrend eines Gewitters ein t dlicher elektrischer Schlag durch Blitzeinschlag auftritt Als  Vorsichtsma nahme immer zuerst das Telefonkabel abtrennen  bevor das Netzkabel  abgezogen wird           Technische    nderungen jederzeit vorbehalten  Panasonic Communications Co   Ltd  beh It sich das  Recht vor  jederzeit und ohne Mitteilung Verbesserungen des Produkt Designs durchzuf hren     Important Notice for Installation    Caution   Depending on your machine s model  it may weight approximately 47 40 Ib   21 5 kg  without any options   To prevent injuries  use the appropriate number of personnel and lift or move  the machine as illustrated   Do not lift the machine by the Paper Tray as it may cause damage and or bodily  injury           Lift Location  Note     Refer to the Operating Instructions when installing the machine     Operating  Instructions       Precautions    For Your Safety    To prevent severe injury and loss of life  read this section carefully before servicing the Panasonic machine to ensure  proper and safe operation of your machine   Ple
154. elephone Features  1 Directory Search Dialing Yes  2 Directory Search   LDAP Email age  3 Directory Search  LDAP Fax  Yes       A    One Touch Auto Dialers    80  40 x 2  Upper Lower        5 Abbr  Auto Dialers    500  max  920        6 Total Auto Dialers    580  Max  1 000     Plus an additional 420 stations  available to select from  when  the optional SD Memory Card   Max 2GB  is installed                                                        7 Program Dials 80  8 Max  Number Digits  Fax  36  9 Max  Number Digits  Email  60  Max  Station Name  1 Characters s  11 Full Number Dialing     Buffered Dialing  Yes Max  50 stations  12 Direct Dialing     Monitor Dialing  us NAICS ORE  13 Automatic Redialing Yes Up fO OUI arb HOCH  intervals  14 Manual Redialing Yes Pressing the REDIAL PAUSE  button  15 Line Monitor Speaker Yes  16 Chain Dialing  Hybrid Dial  Yes In Monitor Dialing mode only  17 Pulse   Tone Dialing Yes 10 pps   DTMF  18 Pulse to Tone Change Yes  19 Flash Key Yes       17    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200       Description                                                                                                    Items UF 8200 AU  UF 7200 AU  Remarks  UF 8300 Others  UF 7300 Others   20 Handset Option  21 Fax Mistake Dial Prevention Yes  Transmission Features  1 Direct Transmission Yes  2 Memory Transmission Yes Page Retransmission  3 Quick Memory Transmission Yes  Max  630 stations  4 Multi Station Transmission M Sue Touch N   Sequential Broadcasting  es Numbe
155. emory Card  if the Card includes all  necessary firmware codes  is required for the Standard or all option configurations  which includes the  G3 Fax  The easiest way is to use  Auto Mode  for updating all necessary firmware at once     Web site      Firmware Code    SD Memory Card Firmware Writing Tool    l Download  el    oee o   SC m   RITI     TE  Bun Zr    Create the Master SD Memory Card using a PC          Update the Firmware using the Master SD Memory Card   Selecting  Auto Mode  updates all necessary firmware at once      Note   If the SD Memory Card will be used to update the Firmware of other machines  format the Card first  with the Service Mode F9 15  Refer to 3 5 6   Formatting the SD Memory Card      3 5 2  Updating through a LAN Port    The firmware code can be easily updated when the main unit is connected to a LAN   The Network Firmware Update Tool can also be used by connecting to the machine using a crossover  cable  if the unit is not connected to a LAN     1  Install the Network Firmware Update Tool to your PC  The Tool can be downloaded from your sales company s Web Site  Please refer to the Tool s  Operating Instructions file for additional details     2  Preparing the Firmware Code  Access the Service Web site to download the latest Firmware Code  When performing the  self extraction wizard for preparing the Firmware Code File  the Archive will be extracted automatically  into the designated folder     Example    From    Firmware Code File  UF 8200_AU
156. ent Jam   is over 2 m   017 Incorrect paper size loaded in the Paper size is incorrect   Paper Tray   030 XMT B Read Point Sensor does not go ON Document is not set properly   within 10 seconds after the document   Defective Read Point Sensor   starts feeding   031 XMT C   Transmitting document was longer The document may jam   COPY than 2 meter  or 78 7 in   Defective Read Point Sensor   041   STANDBY   B  C    Out of Toner  No toner   RCV D Defective Low Toner Sensor   COPY  043   STANDBY   B  C   Low Toner  Toner is getting low   RCV D Defective Low Toner Sensor   COPY  045   STANDBY   No Toner Cartridge  Toner Cartridge has not been installed   Defective Toner Cartridge Sensor   060   A   Printer Cover is open  Cover is not firmly closed   Connectors are not firmly connected   061   A   ADF Door is open  Door is not firmly closed   Connectors are not firmly connected   302 XMT B  C   No response of 2nd G3 PCB  2nd G3 PCB is defective   RCV D  400 XMT B   T1 timer  35   5 sec   elapsed without  Incorrect number was dialed and the             detecting 300 bps signal        START button was pushed    Telephone line was disconnected while  dialing    SC PCB or MJR PCB is defective   Receiver is defective   It may only be  transmitting CED        139       UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200       Fax Information Codes                                                    Code Mode  Phase Description of Problem Cause   401 XMT B   DON was returned from receiver Your machine s ID Number i
157. er Firmware SD Memory Card from the machine    Plug the AC Power Cord to turn on power    Reconnect the Telephone Line  LAN and or USB Cables    Reprogram the F5  amp  F6 Parameters according to the lists printed in Step 1  if the settings are other  than factory default     65    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    2  When a DATA SD Card is installed    1  2   3           OO OO JO Om P     11   12   13   14   15   16   17       Before starting  print the F5 F6 Parameters List  Copy Service Mode F9 03 00      Disconnect the Telephone Line  LAN and or USB Cables   Unplug the AC Power Cord to turn off power   During a Lightning Storm  to prevent electrocution  disconnect the Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC Power Cord        Remove the DATA SD Card from the machine      Install the appropriate Master Firmware SD Memory Card into the machine      Plug the AC Power Cord to turn on power      Press the  Function    Original Size   and the  3  keys sequentially      Input the ID  and press the  Set  key to enter the Service Mode  default ID is 00000000      Perform the Copy Service Mode F9 07 00  Update From Master SD Card       The firmware is copied into the machine     Selecting the  Auto Mode   copies all the necessary firmware at once    After the update is completed  the machine reboots itself and returns to standby    Unplug the AC Power Cord to turn off power    Remove the Master Firmware SD Memory Card from the machine    Reinstall the DATA SD Card into the ma
158. er Message  Fixed    2  Customer ID   3  Firmware Version           MACHINE IS RUNNING OUT OF TONER   Up to 16 characters  User Identification Code     4  Transmission   Reception   Copy   Print Counters    189    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    5 2 7 5  CALL COUNTER REPORT    FOR RRR e eh DATE MMM dd yyyy       TIME 16 56 xxx    kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk     gt  SCHEDULED REPORT   CALL COUNTER HAS REACHED PRE SET VALUE  lt     kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkak    LAST PRINT ERROR   MMM dd yyyy 20 07 E04 01 00 00000013  SERIAL NUMBER    1  CUSTOMER ID   ABC COMPANY    2  FIRMWARE VERSION   SC   PNL   SCANNER  SDR    PRINTER           3  COUNTER INFORMATION     CURRENT PM CYCLE  F7 02 TOTAL COUNT   13 240000  F7 03 PM COUNT 5 13  F7 04  P7  0 5  au     F7 06 OPC DRUM COUNT  F7 07 PROCESS UNIT COUNT  F7 08 ADF PM COUNT  PFD  scs    BUE gs   RINT COUNT  F7 12 PAPER TRAY COUNT   PC SCAN COUNT  F7 13   FAX TRANSMIT COUNT  F7 14   FAX RECEIVE COUNT  F7 15   FAX PRINT COUNT  F7 16   TEN EE  F7 17 3 AAR LTR COUNT  F7 18 3 reed  F7 19   FLS LG COUNT  F7 20   SERVICE MODE ID  F7 21 COPY PRINT COUNT  F7 22 COPY SCAN COUNT              4  PRINT ERROR   NO  DATE  amp  TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT   NO  DATE  amp  TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT    MMM dd yyyy 20 07 E04 01 00 00000013  02 MMM dd yyyy 20 04 E04 01 00 00000013        Panafax PCC    eek UF XXXX     kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk k  PCC Manual   kk kk kx x kx a 123    
159. er for the Internet    2 Valid communication    162   TIFF VIEWER 1 None Selecting whether to include the URL address in the   URL  2 English Email message body   3 English Jap  anese   163   ROUTING  1 Invalid Selecting whether to add the Header Print information of  HEADER 2 Valid the Routing Station on the top edge of each routed   pages    164   IFAX XMT  1 Included Selecting whether to include the header when sending a  HEADER 2 Not included   document to an addressee in the same Domain as   Email only  specified in the Default Domain parameter   This is useful   when using the machine to scan documents back to your   PC    Note  When sending to a Domain other than as specified  in the Default Domain parameter  the header will  be included regardless of the selection    168   CC BCC  1 Invalid Selecting whether to allow the CC BCC Email  STATION 2 Valid address es  to be entered                    205       UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200       No     Parameter    Setting  Number    Setting    Comments       169    DHCP CLIENT    1    Invalid        2    Valid    Select whether the machine would automatically acquire   the Network Parameters from the DHCP Server   Such   as IP Address  Subnet Mask  Default Gateway IP   Address  etc     Note  If you change the setting of this parameter  the  machine will reboot automatically        170    SMTP  AUTHENTI      1    Invalid       Valid    If you transmit to the SMTP server  the user name and  password are used for authentication 
160. ers  4 Numeric ID Yes 20 Digits  Special Communications  1 Password XMT   RCV Yes  2 Selective Reception Yes TSI Check  3 Relay XMT Request No  4 Relay XMT Center No  5 Confidential XMT   Polling No  6 Confidential Center No  7 Mailbox XMT   Polling No  8 Mailbox Center No  9 File XMT No  10 Received Fax Forward Yes Received File Transfer  11 Sub address XMT Yes  12 Sub address Auto Routing Yes  13 NYSE Yes For USA and Canada only  14 Internet Fax Relay XMT Yes a Pax EE  15 Email Relay XMT Yes PC Internet Fax  gt  G3FAX  16 Panafax Desktop Yes  Others  1 Fax Access Code Yes  2 PIN Code Access Yes For USA and Canada only  3 Intelligent Redial  Al  Yes 5 Files  4 Department Code Yes 50 Departmental Codes  5 Power Saver Mode Yes  6 Self Diagnostic Function Yes  7 Remote Diagnostic Function Yes Specific Destinations only  8 Check  amp  Call Function Yes  9 V 24   Encryption Interface No  10 User Authentication Yes Specific Destinations only  11 Job Tracking Yes Specific Destinations only  12 RightFax Server Yes Specific Destinations only  Firmware Update  1 Local Update  SD Memory Card Yes  USB Port Yes  2 LAN  Network  Yes          20    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200                                                                                     1 1 2  Printer Function  Description  oe UF 8300 8200 7300 7200 SES   Interface   1 Centronics Parallel UE No   2 LAN  Network  Yes Ethernet 10Base T 100Base TX   3 USB Port Yes USB1 1   4  EEE 1394 No Firewire  Printer Function   1 Pri
161. et  in the DOS Command line to bring up the Telnet screen     128    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    Essential to input 25  after the IP address  to select the  Port 25    For example      Windows XP   C  Documents and Setting             gt  telnet ef1 labo pcc com 25    C  WINDOWSsielnet ef1 labo pcc com 25   or CAWINDOWS gt telnet 192 168 3 5 25    Press the Enter Key     220 ef1 labo pcc com DPxxxx V xx       helo  250 Hello    mail from test  250 Sender OK    rcpt to fax 9 labo pcc com  250 Receipient OK       data  354 Email  end with  CRLF   CR LF         Press the Enter Key   Panasonic Internet Fax  test   test    Press the Enter Key    Press the Enter Key    Press the Enter Key      Press the Enter Key     250 OK  Mail accept       uit  221 Closing transaction channel          129    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    4 7  Error Codes  For Copier     The self diagnostic functions detect troubles in the important components of the copier  When trouble  occurs  the machine stops     Note   Some Codes are not used in the UF 8300 8200 7300 7200 and are reserved for future use     4 7 14  User Error Codes  U Code        Note   Uxx and a message will appear on the Display Panel        User Error Codes  U Code  Table  Code Item Check Points  U06 CLOSE RIGHT COVER   Right Cover is open     Right Cover Sensor is disconnected     Right Cover Sensor is defective     Jam Cover is open     Jam Cover Sensor is disconnected     Jam Cover Sensor is defective     Toner Cartridge is incorrec
162. ezifische Bedienverfahren hinzuweisen  die  vermieden werden m  ssen     Diese Symbole werden verwendet  um Bediener auf spezifische Bedienverfahren hinzuweisen  die    genutzt werden m  ssen  um die Maschine sicher zu betreiben     Dieses Symbol dient dazu  die Bediener darauf aufmerksam zu machen  dass eine hei  e  Oberfl  che vorhanden ist  die Verbrennungen verursachen kann         NWARNUNG    Vorsichtsma  regeln zu Strom  und Erdungsverbindungen    Stellen Sie sicher  dass die Steckerverbindung staubfrei ist  In einer feuchten Umgebung kann ein  verschmutzter Secker eine betr  chtliche Menge Strom aufnehmen  die Hitze erzeugen und nach l  ngerer Zeit  in diesem Zustand zu Br  nden f  hren kann     Verwenden Sie immer das mit dem Ger  t mitgelieferte Netzkabel  Wenn ein Verl  ngerungskabel erforderlich ist   verwenden Sie immer ein Kabel mit geeigneter St  rke        AC 220 240V 10A   Wenn Sie ein Kabel mit einer nichtspezifizierten Stromst  rke verwenden  kann die Maschine Rauch  abgeheben oder sich au  en stark erhitzen     Versuchen Sie nicht  das Netzkabel zu modifizieren und vermeiden Sie Ziehen  Biegen  Scheuern oder  anderweitige Besch  digung  Stellen Sie keine schweren Gegenst  nde auf das Netzkabel  Ein besch  digtes  Netzkabel kann zu Br  nden oder elektrischen Schl  gen f  hren     Niemals ein Netzkabel mit nassen H  nden ber  hren  Dabei besteht die Gefahr elektrischer Schl  ge     Wenn das Netzkabel besch  digt ist oder isolierte Dr  hte freiliegen  wenden S
163. f  hren     Die Papierf  cher langsam ziehen  um Verletzungen zu vermeiden     Beim Entfernen von fehleingezogenem Papier stellen Sie sicher  dass keine abgerissenen Papierreste in der  Maschine verbleiben  Ein in der Maschine verbleibendes St  ck Papier kann Feuer fangen  Wenn ein Blatt  Papier um die Heizwalze gewickelt ist oder wenn ein besonders schwieriger Papierfehleinzug behoben  werden muss  versuchen Sie nicht  es selber zu entfernen  Dabei besteht die Gefahr von Verletzungen oder  Vebrennungen  Schalten Sie das Ger  t sofort aus und wenden Sie sich an Ihren Panasonic Fachh  ndler     Beim Zugriff auf Innenteile des Ger  ts zum Beheben von Papierfehleinzug usw  immer darauf achten  nicht  heiBe Stellen zu ber  hren  sonst besteht die Gefahr von Verbrennungen      gt  ecoeoo eo    Sonstiges    E Beim Beheben eines Papierstaus oder einer anderen St  rung das geeignete Verfahren entsprechend der  Bedienungsanleitung befolgen     F  r Ihre Sicherheit     N ACHTUNG    VerbrauchsmaterialienSchutzma  nahmen  a gt  Verwenden Sie immer nur Batterien des vorgeschriebenen Typs     Sonstiges    E Die Maschine hat eine eingebaute Schaltung zum Schutz gegen Stromspitzen durch Blitzschlag  Falls in der Nahe ein  Gewitter mit Blitzschl  gen auftritt  sorgen Sie f  r ausreichenden Abstand vom Ger  t und ber  hren Sie das Ger  t nicht   bevor das Gewitter beendet ist    W Wenn Sie Flackern oder verzerrte Bilder oder Rauschen in Audio Video Ger  ten in der N  he feststellen  kann es se
164. f the document is not successfully transmitted   034 ENERGY SAVER  1 Invalid Select Energy Saver mode and time   MODE 2 Power 1 Invalid   2 Power Saver   3 Sleep   4 Shutdown Mode  Saver timer 1 240 min    3 Sleep  4 Shutdown             200       UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200                                                                                                       No  Parameter   emng Setting Comments  umber  035   DAYLIGHT TIME  1 Off Selects whether to enable the daylight time feature    2 Mar 2nd  3 Apr 1st  036   RING  1 Invalid All ring patterns   PATTERN DRD   2 Valid Select a ring pattern for automatic answering   1  A Standard ring pattern   2  B Double ring pattern   3  C Triple ring pattern  Short Short Long    4   D All other triple ring patterns  except the type C  described above   037   RCV TO         Enter 8 digits password used to print out the received  MEMORY document in memory by using Function 8 5  RCV TO  MEMORY   When Function 8 5 is set to ON  this  parameter will not be shown on the LCD display  If you  wish to change the password  Function 8 5 is set to OFF  first   038  ACCESS CODE         Enter 8 digits Access Code to secure the machine from  unauthorized use   039   PIN CODE  1 None Selecting the access method  Prefix or Suffix  to dial a  ACCESS 2 Suffix number with PIN Code   3 Prefix  043  PASSWORD         Setting a 4 digit XMT Password and selecting whether  XMT the machine performs and checks the XMT Password of  the receiving statio
165. f you  know that packets on a network always go through London to get from New York to Berlin  but the  communication is failing  A TRACERT to the Berlin address shows all the hops up to the point  where the router in London should respond  If it does not respond  the time values are shown with  an asterisk      indicating the packet timed out     126    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    b  To determine whether a router is slow and needs to be upgraded or additional routers should be  installed on the network  You can determine this by simply comparing the time it takes for a packet  to get through a particular router  If its return time is significantly higher than the other routers  it  should be upgraded     To use this utility  from the DOS command line  type  tracert   IP Address or Hostname gt     Tracing the Route to SMTP POP Server    C  WINDOWSs gt tracert sv2 labo pcc com  Tracing route to sv2 labo pcc com  192 168 1 2   over a maximum of 30 hops     1 4ms 2ms 2ms 192 168 3 254  2 4ms 5ms 5ms sv2 labo pcc com  192 168 1 2     Trace complete          Managing Network Route Tables  In the simplest case a router connects two network segments  In this model  the system used to join  the two segments needs to know only about these segments   The routing table for router R1 in this case is simple  the following table shows its key routes              Network Address Netmask Gateway Interface  192 168 3 0 255 255 255 0 192 168 3 254 192 168 3 254  192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 192
166. fications                Item Specification  Mirror 6 faces  Revolution 20 078 74 rpm             6 3 4 5  Cylindrical Lens and F  0 Lens    Each of the Polygon Mirror surfaces has a slight imperfection  This prevents the beam from scanning the  OPC Drum surface at the constant interval in the sub scan direction  The Cylindrical Lens and F  0 Lens  are used for correcting this uneven laser scanning     6 3 4 6   F 0 Lens    This lens ensures that the beam scans across the surface of the OPC Drum at a constant rate  The beam is  refracted to parallel light as it passes through the lens to ensure that the dots at the edge of the drum and at  the center of the drum are equally spaced  This lens also provides a set focal length for laser beam     F  9 Specifications                Item Specification  Scanning Width 207 43 mm  Focusing Light Spot Size 80 x 90 um             6 3 4 7  Timing Sensor    This sensor detects the laser beam and determines the start timing for scanning  A pin photodiode is used  as the Timing Sensor     Signals detected by the timing sensor       6 3 5  Fuser Unit    A 600 W Heat Lamp  Halogen Lamp  heats the surface of the teflon coated Heat Roller to approximately  190  C  374  F   a Thermistor monitors the Heat Roller temperature  and the CPU controls the ON OFF  timing of the lamp     197    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    Heat Lamp   Halogen Lamp           Thermostat    Thermistor  Heat Roller                            Paper Exit Sensor   Pressure Rol
167. file management number  G3 Fax   Internet Fax    Max  999 pages   With 2nd G3 Option installed   Max  999 pages Channel   5  One Mailbox accepts a maximum of 20 print jobs  A 256 MB up to 2 GB SD Memory Card stores  approximately 50 420 pages of PCL bitmap print data   6  Once the SD Memory Card is installed  the standard Fax  amp  Internet Fax Flash Memory and the  Network Scanning D RAM is no longer used   7  Max  page number may differ depending on the manufacturer of the SD Memory Card     25       UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200  1 2  Control Panel    For USA and Canada  Panafax UF 8200                            supen  Panasonic   vam   Stop      z  8000    a Scan file Email Report Ko e e wo Copy  eoo00     Dn  ms mw moz  an cm am 00    mm e 0069  ea m m l  D A Panafax  Print Data Status Active  Panafax UF 7200    sure  Panasonic  w 1x0 3    pl Redial    O Pause  B EO m a  Print     Scav file Email Stam Abbr     Dial          Sub addr  CE LED GE OO  ND CN  UNO CU GO GD e  c CHO ER CD D UD ER D CB Ge       Monitor   ui Ee G   omo LS ESO o   GE HG GG ESO ESO 6 ESO EH Ea   a JEN Panafax  Print Data Status Active  For Other Destinations  Panafax UF 8300   Panasonic UF 8300 duse v        Function a gt  PE    ner  aver Pause    ai eet     Paar e  Tra  Di  mi m Email  Print Scan file Email Report amp Clear ER Abbr     C     C      ex ntras  lesolution      gt   Dial   gt  Flasi  Se  ESS      Hi 1  TJ TTTTITTTT e                            m m  NI    Dy  Print Data Status Active    
168. folder  you can  select independent file folders from here to  upload firmware for separate modules in the  device     Network Firmware Update Tool  LAN     Network Firmware Update Tool E xj    Select the Archive File  Parent Folder or Independent Folder s  that the firmware code file sJare stored in        Select a Parent File Folder  Complete Set   Folder Name Browse   Comment       C Select Independent File Folders    PNL FoldeName      Browse    Version       SC Folder Name Browse    Version    SPC Folder Name Browse    Version    FAX Folder Name Browse    Version        lt  Back Next  gt  Cancel       Note  Files are chosen automatically in the automatic mode  so the screen of step 6 is not shown     6 1a Select a Parent File Folder  Complete Set     Select    Select a Parent File Folder  Complete  Set    and click  Browse         6 1b Select the name of Parent File Folder  For  Example  DP 2310 3010 PU 030228   and  Click  OK      Network Firmware Update Tool xj    Select the Archive File  Parent Folder or Independent Folder s  that the firmware code file s are stored in        IN Nani  Browse        Comment       Select Independent File Folders    PNL Folder Name Browsen      Version    SC Folder Name Browse    Version    SPC Folder Name Browse    Version             FAX Folder Name Browse    Version                     CiPanasoniciPanasonic FUPY1DatalDP 2310 3010 PU 03032         CI compaq  Documents and Settings  C  IntelPRO    C  Panasonic    C3 Panasonic DMS    E  
169. gs in the Printer Driver Properties dialog box   Ex  Multi sized printing        Cannot print  System error         Change the resolution to 300 dpi in the Printer Driver properties dialog  box              4 10 5  System Error  CD Drive Related Error During Installation        Error Message    Possible Solution s        Cannot read the drive             Insert the CD into the drive  and click    Retry           151    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    5 Service Modes    5 1  Service Modes  For Copier     These Service Modes are provided to assist the technician in checking for abnormalities in the copier and a  means of making adjustments to the Input Output of major components     Caution   The factory default parameters are preset  country dependent  for optimum performance and in  compliance with the local telecommunication regulations standards  and do not need to be changed   Changing some of these parameters may cause the unit to be no longer compliant or become inoperable     5 1 1  Service Mode Procedure    1  To select the Service Mode  The service mode is selected when the  Function      Original Size  and the    3    keys are sequentially  pressed  Input the ID to enter the Service Mode  default ID is 00000000  and press the    Set    key  then  F1 will appear in the display    2  To exit the Service Mode  The service mode is reset when the  Function  and the  Clear  keys are pressed sequentially     5 1 2  Copier Service Mode Functions                                
170. h  24V  Front Cover Safety  Interlock SW 45V  CN737 2  24VIR Main Motor 6  24 VDC Power Supply  424 VDC through  24V  Front Cover Safety  Interlock SW 45V  CN737 3 24VGND Main Motor 5 Ground  OV  CN737 4 24VGND Main Motor 4 Ground  OV  CN737 5 nMMCTL Main Motor 3 Main Motor Control  Main Motor  5V Sianal  Control g  Enable oV  CN737 6 nMMLD Main Motor 2   Main Motor Rotation  Main Motor  5V Sianal  Rotation g  Enable oV  CN737 7 nMMHALF Main Motor 1 im Motor Rotation Speed   9V H   control  H  1908 35 RPM  OV  O     954 18 RPM  CN738  e a Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function  CN738 1 FANPER Fan Motor 1 424V  24VDC Fan Power                   91          UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200                                                                                                                                              Ee   e Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function  CN738 2 24VGND Fan Motor 2 Ground  OV  CN738 3 FANNERR Fan Motor 3 5V Fan Error Detection  s Signal  OV  CN741  ge d Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function  CN741 1 LDCCHK Paper Tray detect 12V  1 2 VDC Power Supply  Sensor 3    CN741 2 GND Paper Tray detect Ground  Sensor 2  oV  CN741 3 nCCHK Paper Tray detect Paper Tray detect Signal  Sensor 1  detection  3 7 4   PNL1 PC Board  CN230  Refer to SC PC Board CN501   CN234  ee VEJ Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function  CN234 1 nSCN 1  PNL2 PCB a PNL Key Signal  CN251 1 key Ve  Scan Line   Scan ov  CN234 2 nSCN 2  PNL2 PCB ga 
171. he contents of the Function Parameter List may vary depending on the country   s regulations   2      mark will be shown on the left side of number when setting was changed from default     176    5 2 4 2  Page Memory Test    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    A test pattern prints out for checking the page memory and printer mechanism using the following    procedure     Press the    w        a    keys to select    3  Print Report List      Press the  Set  key     Vv    Press the    w        a    keys to select    3  Page Memory Test        Press the    Set    key     w       Press the  Stop  key to exit the service mode     oeeoeeeeeee   TEST PATTERN PRINT seeeeeeeeeeee   DATE MMM dd yyyy       TIME 12 07 xxx    SC  SC BOOT  PNL  PRINTER    SCANNER  SDR       FAX MODEM  SC2    ek ek sk kk UF XXXX FRR RRR KKK KK ded ek k kk ke x kk       PCC Manual    TX RX PRT CPY  MEMORY SIZE  MAC ADDRESS  SHIPMENT SET       177      000123 000456 000789 000666     12MB     08002301D3E5     Panafax PCC        kkkkkkk   123     k kkkkkkkk     5 2 4 3  Printer Report    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    All printer errors are logged on the Printer Report which can be printed by the following procedure     Press the    w        a    keys to select    3  Print Report List      Press the  Set  key     Vv    Press the    w        a    keys to select    4  Printer Report        Press the    Set    key     Vv       Press the    Stop    key to exit the service mode     KRKKKKKKKKKKKK PRINTER REPORT       ee
172. he machine  An off balance machine can tip over  or the  heavy object can fall  causing damage and or injuries     Keep the room ventilated when using the machine for an extended period of time to minimize  the ozone density in the air     When copying with the document cover open  do not look directly at the exposure lamp   Direct eye exposure can cause eye fatigue or eye injury     Pull the paper trays out slowly to prevent injuries     When removing jammed paper  make sure that no pieces of torn paper are left in the machine   A piece of paper remaining in the machine can cause fire  If a sheet of paper is wrapped  around the heat roller  or when clearing a jammed paper that is difficult or impossible to see   do not try to remove it by yourself  Doing so can cause injuries or burns  Switch Off the  machine immediately  and wait until it cools down     eeoeooooooo    Consumable Safeguards    Never heat the drum cartridge  or scratch its surface  A heated  or scratched drum can be  hazardous to your health     Do not mix new and old batteries together  as they can burst or leak  causing a fire or  injuries  Be sure to use the specified type of batteries only     Others    a When clearing a paper jam or other fault  follow the appropriate procedure given in this manual     The machine has a built in circuit for protection against lightning induced surge current  If lightning  strikes in your neighborhood  maintain an ample distance from the machine  and do not touch it  unti
173. heck all connectors  and    voltages on the Power Supply  Unit  HVPS     2  Replace the Power Supply Unit   HVPS                  Are the Fuser  and Pressure  Roller surfaces clean     No                Yes    Y       Clean  or replace the rollers                 109    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    4 3 10  Improper Fusing  Printed image does not bond to the paper        r                    4 3 11  Voids in Solid Areas        gt                       START  gt     V          Is the recording paper damp  Yes             No       Lei    Y          Replace the recording paper              Y          Is the Fuser Unit normal     No                Paper Travel   gt        V          Replace the Fuser Unit   See Note              START                   Y                                                       START  Is the recording paper damp   _Yes  No    Replace the recording paper        N  Is the Toner Cartridge s  operational  Y  Replace the Toner Cartridge   Yes  ra  V  Are the Fuser  and Pressure No          Roller surfaces clean   Yes                Ea    Y          Clean  or replace the rollers              110    4 3 12  Black Dots                Paper Travel   gt     C START  gt           UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200                                                                   4 3 13  Recording Paper Creases       Paper Travel                                                                                                                 
174. hort  2   Long       169       UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200       Function Parameter Table                                                                      No  Parameter Selections Function  024  CED FREQ  1   1080 Hz  non ITU T   Selects the CED frequency 2100 1080 Hz  2   2100 Hz  025  COMM  START   1   First Selects the communication start up condition  XMT  UP 2   Second and Polling     Used when Echo Suppression is disabled    026  NON  1   Off  Invalid  Selects own mode  Panafax mode    STANDARD 2   On  Valid   027  SHORT 1   Off  Invalid  Selects the short protocol mode   PROTOCOL B 2   On  Valid   028  SHORT 1   Off  Invalid  Selects the short protocol mode  When activated  it  PROTOCOL D 2   On  Valid  allows the machine to automatically store the modem  speed for each Auto Dial Number   029  REMOTE DIAG   1   Off  will not accept   Selects whether the machine accepts Remote  2   On  accepts  Diagnostics from the service station   030  CED  amp  300 bps  1 75ms Selects the pause interval between the CED and the  2 1 sec 300 bps signal    Used when Echo Suppression is disabled    031  RTC   EOLx12  1   Off  EOLx6  Selects the RTC signal  EOLx6 or EOLx12   2   On  EOLx12   032  V34 TX START   2400 33600bps Selects the transmission modem start speed for V 34  communication  33600 2400 bps    Press the    w        a    keys to select the symbol rate    033  V34 RX START   2400 33600bps Selects the receiving modem start speed for V 34  communication  33600 2400 bps    P
175. ie sich wegen Ersatz an Ihren Panasonic   Fachh  ndler  Verwendung eines besch  digten Netzkabels kann zu Br  nden oder elektrischen Schl  gen f  hren     Sofort den Betrieb stoppen  wenn Ihre Maschine Rauch  starke Hitze  ungew  hnliche Ger  usche oder Geruch abgibt   oder wenn Wasser auf die Maschine gesch  ttet wurde  Durch diese Bedingungen k  nnen Br  nde verursacht werden   Schalten Sie die Maschine sofort aus  ziehen Sie den Stecker ab  und wenden Sie sich an Ihren Panasonic Fachh  ndler     Versuchen Sie nicht  die Maschine abzutrennen oder neu anzuschlie  en  w  hrend der Netzschalter auf Ein  steht  Durch Abziehen eines stromf  hrenden Steckers kann ein Lichtbogen entstehen  durch den  Verformungen und Br  nde verursacht werden     Beim Abtrennen des Netzsteckers immer am Stecker und nicht am Kabel ziehen  Wenn ein Stecker  gewaltsam abgezogen wird  kann er besch  digt werden und Br  nde oder elektrische Schl  ge verursachen     Wenn die Maschine l  ngere Zeit   ber nicht verwendet wird  schalten Sie sie aus und ziehen den Netzstecker ab   Wenn eine nichtverwendete Maschine l  ngere Zeit an einer Stromquelle angeschlossen bleibt  kann beeintr  chtigte  Isolierung zu elektrischen Schl  gen  Stromlecks oder Feuer f  hren     Schalten Sie die Maschine immer aus und ziehen Sie den Stecker ab  bevor Sie auf das Innere der Maschine  zugreifen  um Reinigung  Wartung oder Fehlerbehebung auszuf  hren  Zugriff zu Teilen im Maschineninneren  kann zu elektrischen Schl  gen f  h
176. iguration for the specified Subnet Mask is as  follows  IP Address  192 168 3 4  Subnet Mask  255 255 255 0  Default Gateway  Default Router IP  Address   192 168 3 254  DNS Server  192 168 1 1 and the Domain Name  labo mgcs com   obtained from the Host Name        Using    PING    to Test Physical Connectivity   The Packet Internet Groper  PING  is a command line tool included with every Microsoft TCP IP client   any DOS or Windows client with the TCP IP protocol installed   PING is a simple utility that is used to  send a test packet to a specified IP Address or Hostname  then  if everything is working properly  the  packet is echoed back  returned      Sample command line PINGing and parameters are shown below  There are several available options  that can be specified with the PING command  However  for our examples  we will use two options   n  and  w  which are commonly used when the response from the destination location is too long      n count   The number of echo requests that the command should send  The default is four    w timeout   Specifies the period PING will wait for the reply before deciding that the host is not  responding     PINGing the Unit    C  WINDOWS gt ping ef1 labo pcc com  Pinging ef1 labo pcc com  192 168 3 5  with 32 bytes of data     Reply from 192 168 3 5  bytes 32 time 5ms TTL 253  Reply from 192 168 3 5  bytes 32 time 4ms TTL 253  Reply from 192 168 3 5  bytes 32 time 4ms TTL 253  Reply from 192 168 3 5  bytes 32 time 4ms TTL 253       PING
177. in  dass die  Maschine elektromagnetische St  rungen erzeugt  Schalten Sie sie aus  und wenn die St  rungen verschwinden ist die Maschine  die Ursache der St  rungen  F  hren Sie das folgende Verfahren aus  bis die St  rungen beseitigt sind      Die Maschine und das Fernsehger  t und oder Radio weiter voneinander entfernt aufstellen    9 Die Maschine und das Fernsehger  t und oder Radio anders aufstellen oder ausrichten       Ziehen Sie den Netzstecker der Maschine  von Fernsehger  t und oder Radio ab und stecken sie in Steckdosen ein   die zu getrennten Stromkreisen geh  ren       Die Fernseh  und oder Rundfunkantennen und kabel anders ausrichten  bis die St  rungen aufh  ren  Bei einer  AuBenantenne den   rtlichen Elektriker um Unterst  tzung bitten       Verwenden Sie eine Koaxkabelantenne     12    Table of Contents    Specifications Table             00000000000001aene 14  1 1  Fax  Printer  Network Scanner and  Internet Fax Functions                             14  1 2  Control Panel                                           26  1 3  System Combination                                27  14  Options List nisn ri ee 28  1 5  External View                                           29  1 6  Clutches  Switches  Motors   Solenoids and Fan                                   32  1 7  Sensors and PC Boards                           32  Disassembly Instructions                       33  2 1  General Disassembly Flowchart              33  2 2  General Disassembly                   
178. in your machine is running low    2  Toner Order Tel   Up to 36 digits    3  Toner Order Fax    Up to 36 digits    4  Customer ID Up to 16 characters  User Identification Code    5  Toner Cartridge No  Refer to the Supply list    180    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200  5 2 5  Fax Service Mode 4  Modem Test     5 2 5 1  Binary Signal    This Service Mode is used to check the binary signal output  Signals can be output to the line using the  following procedure     Press the    w        a    keys to select    4  MODEM Test     Press fe    Set    key    Press the  v       A  keys select    1  LINE 1    When the optional 2nd G3 is installed   Press he  Set  key    Select    q  Signal Test       Press the  Set  key    Press i   d  sied number    Press the  Set  key     Press the  Stop  key twice to exit the service mode        Binary Signal Table       Number Signals  1 V21 300bps   V2Tter 2400bps  V27ter 4800bps   V29 7200bps   V29 9600bps  V17 TC7200bps  V17 TC9600bps  V17 12000bps  V17 14400bps                                        CO  O HNJOJG BY  WIND       181    5 2 5 2  Tonal Signal    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    This Service Mode is used to check the tonal signal output  Signals can be output to the line using the    following procedure     Press the    w        a    keys to select  4  MODEM Test      Press the  Set  key     Vv    Press the    w        a    keys to select the    2  Tonal Test        Press the    Set    key     Vv       Press the desired number and press the
179. ing the Default Gateway  Default Router IP Address     CAWINDOWS gt ping 192 168 3 254  Pinging 192 168 3 254 with 32 bytes of data     Reply from 192 168 3 254  bytes 32 time 5ms TTL 253  Reply from 192 168 3 254  bytes 32 time 4ms TTL 253  Reply from 192 168 3 254  bytes 32 time 4ms TTL 253  Reply from 192 168 3 254  bytes 32 time 4ms TTL 253       125    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    PINGing the SMTP POP Server    CAWINDOWS gt ping sv2 labo pcc com  Pinging sv2 labo pcc com  192 168 1 2  with 32 bytes of data   Reply from 192 168 1 2  bytes 32 time 5ms TTL 253    Reply from 192 168 1 2  bytes 32 time 5ms TTL 253  Reply from 192 168 1 2  bytes 32 time 5ms TTL 253  Reply from 192 168 1 2  bytes 32 time 5ms TTL 253       If for some reason  the physical connection is missing  the echo reply will not be received from the  destination and the following output is displayed     CAWINDOWS gt ping fmrt7 labo pcc com  Pinging fmrt7 labo pcc com  192 168 4 1  with 32 bytes of data     Request timed out   Request timed out   Request timed out   Request timed out     Ping statistics for 192 168 4 1    Packets  Sent   4  Received   0  Lost   4  100  loss    Approximate round trip times in milli seconds    Minimum   Oms  Maximum   Oms  Average   Oms       If the physical destination is far and it s connected by WAN  Wide Area Network   the PING option  command default value must be changed to compensate for the expected delayed response     e g    n 10    The number of echo requests that
180. inted only No  when receiving from a  specific transmitter  Y    Yes Telephone line quality is poor    Refer to 4 5                                 The transmitting machine  may be defective                   112    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    4 3 15  Abnormal Printing    CC START D       Y  Is the recording paper loaded   No  in the Cassette properly  i                   Yes 1  Adjust the Paper Width Guide   2  Adjust the Paper Length Guide     3  Ensure the paper is under the Paper  Separation Clips              Y  Is the recording paper size  and  No                                                                thickness within specification  Y  Yes   Replace with correct paper     le   Y  Is a Panasonic Toner No  Cartridge being used  Y  Yes   Replace with a Panasonic Toner Cartridge     rt             Y  Are all switches  and sensors   No                                                          operating properly     Yes  Adjust clean  or replace     ra  y l   Yes  Are there any foreign particles  or paper pieces in the receiver  unit  Remove the foreign particles  or paper pieces  E from the receiver unit   No  Do the rollers rotate properly                       Y  1  Check all rollers  gears  drive clutches  and  springs   2  Adjust  or replace any defective parts     Yes             m            Is the receiving mechanism No  operating correctly              Y  Yes   Adjust or replace any defective parts                      La       113    4 3 16  Scanned Copy Qu
181. ion  CN519 6 GND SPC PCB Ground  CN302 2  OV  CN519 7  5V SPC PCB 45V  5V DC Power Supply  CN302 1  CN520  Mo Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function  CN520 1 L2 MJR PCB Telephone Line Signal  CN301 1 Line  Signal  CN520 3 L1 SPC PCB Telephone Line Signal  CN301 3 Line  Signal  3 7 3  SPC PC Board  CN701  ys us Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function  CN701 1 LDAPNT Document  1 2 VDC Power Supply   1 2V  Sensor 3  CN701 2 GND Document Ground  Sensor 2  OV  CN701 3 nAPNT Document ADF Paper Detection  45V    Sensor 1 Sensor Signal  OV  CN701 4 LDCPNT Ejection  1 2 VDC Power Supply   1 2V  Sensor 3  CN701 5 GND Ejection Ground  Sensor 2  OV  CN701 6 nCPNT Ejection 5V ADF Paper Ejection  Sensor 1 m Sensor Signal  OV                            82          UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200                                                                                                                                              CN704  Refer to SC PC Board CN504   CN706  pis dig Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function  CN706 1 LDBPNT Read point 12V  1 2 VDC Power Supply  Sensor 3 sle  CN706 2 N C  Read point No Connection  Sensor 2  CN706 3 nBPNT Read point 5V ADF Read Point  Sensor 1 E Detection Signal  OV  CN706 4 LDADF ADF Door 41 2V  1 2 VDC Power Supply  DOOR Sensor 3    CN706 5 N C  ADF Door No Connection  Sensor 2  CN706 6 pADF DOOR  ADF Door 5V ADF Door Open Close  Sensor 1    Signal      OV  CN709  pis Ae Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function 
182. it takes approximately 3 to 12 min  to format depending  on the manufacturer  SD Memory Card size or Data Access Speed of the SD Card    2  To Update the Firmware or to Format an SD Memory Card using the F9 15 Service Mode takes  approximately 5 sec  Refer to 3 5 6   Formatting the SD Memory Card      219    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    9 Network Imfomation    9 1  Programming or Retrieving Parameters via Email  9 1 1  General Description    Command   Password    M parameters    get  lt  abbr  jnl    Internet Fax    Email                   Internet                                                      Internet Parameter  M    Auto Dialer      Transaction Journal      Edit    Back up       Command   Password  parameters    VL un  Internet Fax     gt         Email A   Internet                                                             9 1 2  Using Email to Program or Retrieve Parameters    This feature is a powerful tool  which provides a convenient and easy way of retrieving or programming  Internet Parameters  Auto Dialer Dialing Numbers  Program keys and Journal retrieval from your PC by    sending a text email message to your machine Using your email application s  Subject   line as a  command input field  you can request your machine to perform the following commands                          Subject     Line Command Function  1  set parameters password   Programs the Internet Parameters  2  get parameters password   Retrieves the Internet Parameters  3  set abbr password 
183. k   Register the following Internet Parameters    a  Community Name  1   32 characters maximum    The syntax is   com name1    Community Name  1  gt    b  Community Name  2   32 characters maximum    The syntax is   com name2    Community Name  2  gt    c  Device Name  32 characters maximum    The syntax is   device    Device Name     d  Device Location  32 characters maximum    The syntax is   location    Device Location    8  This header must be deleted before the email is sent to your machine for reprogramming of Internet  Parameters    9  The information following the         sign is ignored by your machine  therefore  you can leave it as is  or    delete it if you wish     225    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    9 3  To Edit the Retrieved or Backup Auto Dialer Data File     1  To  From    Subject    Your Machine s Address Book  Auto Dialer  Email Sample       NI  set abbr 1234567890      E  xl         File Edit View Insert Format Tools Message Help  e       E  send    Ba ER        v   H r  BBS       To    IFAX      Cet   I  1   Subject   set abbr 1234567890                 From   Your Machine   lt ifax2 9 panasonic com gt   Subject  Your Machine s SYSTEM PARAMETER List  4   To  user1  panasonic com     Delete this header before sending the email        Your Machine s ONE TOUCH ABBR  List        STATION     PANASONIC  5     EMAIL   ifax2 O panasonic com     DATE TIME   MMM dd yyyy 17 45   RISI     begin  A   b C d   e      Oor SALES DEPT ifaxlink ifax panasonic com 1111 5551
184. ktop at the time of installation  suec NT ET Megane  cde    3  If you are using a USB connected machine  make sure the USB    click the Start button on the Taskba r  poi nt to Firmware Update Driver is installed on your PC    All  Programs    Panasonic  gt  Panasonic caution  Fi rmware U pd ate   the n select Local If you are not experiencing a problem with your machine  it is not recommended to update    the firmware  Follow each step carefully  If you make a mistake or interrupt the process    Firmware U pd ate Tool  during the programming phase  your machine may not boot up again   Click Next to begin   Copyright  C  2003  i Panasonic Communications Co   Ltd   C   IC k  Next gt     All rights reserved  Version 3 00          4 Select the Firmware Update Driver USB or E  Parallel depending on how the machine is  connected to the PC     Click  Next gt       Select the Printer Driver to be used and then click Next     Printer Drivers        vare Update  USB  USBODI  Firmware Update  Parallel  LPT1     Note  The    Firmware Update Driver  USB   is  only displayed if you installed it with the Cancel    unit as Plug and Play  N          Page 8    5    5 1    Local Firmware Update Tool  Parallel USB Port     Specify the Firmware Code File by the  following methods     Select a Parent File Folder  Complete Set        Step 5 1  If the archive file is already extracted into  the local Data folder  you can select the  Parent File Folder directly here   It is chosen as a set when the u
185. l the lightning stops      f you notice flickering  distorted images  or noises on your audio visual units  your machine may  be causing radio interference  Switch it Off  and if the interference disappears  the machine is the  cause of the radio interference  Perform the following procedure until the interference is corrected     Move the machine  and theTV and or radio away from each other     Reposition or reorient the machine  and theTV and or radio     Unplug the machine  TV and or radio  and replug them into outlets operating on different circuits     Reorient the TV and or radio antennas  and cables until the interference stops  For an outdoor  antenna  ask your local electrician for support     Use a coaxial cable antenna     F  r Ihre Sicherheit    Um schwere Verletzungen  m  glicherweise mit Todesfolge  zu vermeiden  lesen Sie diesen Abschnitt sorgf  ltig durch  bevor  Sie den Panasonic verwenden  um richtige und sichere Verwendung Ihrer Maschine sicherzustellen     E Dieser Abschnitt erkl  rt die Warnungen und Vorsichtsma  regeln  die in dieser Bedienungsanleitung verwendet werden     A WARNUNG weist auf eine potenzielle Gefahr hin  die zu schweren Verletzungen oder Tod f  hren kann     A Achtung beschreibt Gefahren  die zu leichten Verletzungen oder Schaden an der Maschine f  hren k  nnen        li Dieser Abschnitt erkl  rt auch die grafischen Symbole  die in dieser Bedienungsanleitung verwendet werden     Q  amp  Diese Symbole werden verwendet  um Bediener auf sp
186. lean the surface of roller                               Y          Remove the foreign particles  or papers from the document                        No  Is the ADF Unit closed  y  Yes  Do all sensors No  operate normally   Yes  Does the Feed Roller have   NO  drive  and sufficient friction   Yes  with water   Is the document path clear No  of foreign particles  or paper   Yes  path   No    Is the Transmitting       mechanism operating  properly           Yes    Y          Adjust  or replace any  defective parts                 117    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    4 5  Communications    This section explains general troubleshooting procedures for the 400 series of Information Codes  These  errors are primarily caused by poor telephone line quality  loss  noise  echo  etc    This unit is furnished with  Service Mode 1 to assist in troubleshooting line quality problems    It is suggested that both the transmitting unit and receiving unit be adjusted  This section gives relevant  parameters in Service Mode 1 for the transmitting and receiving sides  If no improvement is realized after  the parameters are adjusted  it is recommended that the parameters be returned to the default settings     4 5 1  Communication Trouble    Perform a communication test after changing settings                          Y  Is this an international Yes  communication  d  No Transmitting Side Receiving Side   021   Off  gt  On  018   14400 bps  gt  12000 to 2400 bps     024   2100 Hz  gt  1080 Hz    030
187. lgr    Spring    The Thermostat is mounted 2 5 mm away from the Heat Roller  If the ambient temperature reaches 190   C   374   F   the Thermostat is opened  and power is removed from the Heat Lamp  The surface of the  Thermostat is not as hot as that of the Heat Roller  When the Thermostat opens  the surface of the Heat  Roller may reach 210   C  410   F   and the system displays E4 01  If the Thermistor opens  the system  displays E4 01  If by chance the Thermostat malfunctions a Thermal Fuse opens    The Pressure Roller is kept in contact with the Heat Roller through 2 pressure springs  which apply a  pressure of approximately 0 36 kg cm  3 56 N cm   Drive is supplied from the Main Motor via Intermediate  Gears     198    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    7 Installation  Refer to the Operating Instructions  For Basic Operations      Note   Some models  i e  USA GSA models  may have the Power Switch     Fax Parameter Table  AU  for reference                                                                                                             No  Parameter E etting Setting Comments  umber  001   CONTRAST 1 Lightest Setting the home position for the CONTRAST    HOME  2 Lighter   3 Normal  4 Darker  5 Darkest  002   RESOLUTION  1 Standard Setting the home position for the RESOLUTION    HOME  2 Fine  3 S Fine  4 600dpi  5 Halftone   Fine   6 Halftone   S Fine   7 Halftone   600dpi   004  STAMP  HOME    1 Off Setting the home position for the STAMP   2 On To select the stamp f
188. lick the Start button on the Taskbar  point to  All  Programs    Panasonic    Firmware    Update then select Uninstall Local Firmware Update Tool     3 Follow the instructions on your screen to uninstall  Remove  the program     4 The completion message is displayed when the uninstall is completed     Note     The Firmware Update drivers are not deleted by the Uninstaller  If you wish to delete the Firmware  Update drivers  please carry out in the following procedure     1  Onthe Printers and Faxes selection of the Control Panel  choose the Firmware Update driver and  select  Delete  from the right click menu to delete the driver     2  Choose  Server Properties  from a right click menu without choosing any drivers  and remove the   Firmware Update  driver on the Driver tab     3  If you want to install the USB Firmware Update driver again  please carry it out after deleting a USB  port by running FupUninst exe which can be found in the Cleanup UsbPort folder of the software  setup disk or folder     Page 6    Local Firmware Update Tool  Parallel USB Port   3  Preparing the Firmware Update    3 1 Preparing the Unit to Accept the Firmware Code    Please refer to the Service Manual for instructions to set the unit to Firmware Update Mode  Service  Mode      3 2 Preparing the Firmware Code    Copy the firmware Code file s  to the following folder   C  Panasonic Panasonic FUPData    Note  An Archive File  i e  DP 2310 PU 030327 exe  extracts the Firmware Code Files automatically 
189. lling password as the other party is  using   2  Check the password of the remote unit                                   Y          1  Setthe polling password  or no   check mode    2  Check the password of the remote unit                                   Y  Is Polling reception OK  bus  Yes  rt  V  Is Polling transmission OK  No  Yes  ra  V  Any other problems  Yes  No  rt    V          See Sect  4 3   Troubleshooting using information codes                     Note     No check Mode means that password is not set     122    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    4 6  Troubleshooting the LAN Interface  4 6 1  Checking Network Configuration    START    Y  Print the current Internet Parameters List                Ask the customer for the Preinstallation  Information form filled out by the Network  Administrator    Verify this information with the Internet No   Parameters List that you just printed  Re enter the Internet Parameters correctly   Are the Internet Parameters entered  correctly into the unit                       Yes       Y  Locate a PC connected to the same Subnet  Mask as the unit          Y  From the DOS Prompt  enter the following  command line utility  ipconfig  all             Y  Does the displayed Network configuration   match the following settings of the unit  Internet Parameters                                 No   Default Gateway IP Address   DNS Server IP Address  Ask the Network Administrator to verify  Subnet Mask  the proper inf
190. lly transmit the Call  Counter Report to the pre registered telephone number or email address     Note   The Service and Maintenance Alert Reports are managed in the same manner as the normal memory  transmission  Retry  Incomplete  File List  Display while it is transmitting  Journal      186    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200                                        Error   Error Tx Remarks  Code Log  Report  Ex xx O S Refer to the Mechanical Error Code  E Code  Table   Sect  4 7 3    E13 O Out of Toner   JXx O Refer to the Jam Error Code  J Code  Table   Sect  4 7 2    Uxx Refer to the User Error Code  U Code  Table   Sect  4 7 1    U13 O M Low Toner   Note     TX  Transmission  Report  S  lt  Service Alert Report  M  lt  Maintenance Alert Report    187    5     2 7 3  SERVICE ALERT REPORT FORMAT    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    FOR loko RRR RR RRR RR KKK KK KK KK KKK KKK KKK DATE MMM dd yyyy       TIME 16 56    xxx     kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk     gt  SERVICE ALERT REPORT  lt   Fe sk ske oe se ske ske oe se ske se se sk ske se se ske ske se ske ske kk ke e sek    LAST PRINT ERROR   MMM dd yyyy 20 07 E04 01  SERIAL NUMBER   1  CUSTOMER ID   ABC COMPANY   2  FIRMWARE VERSION  SC  PNL  SCANNER  SDR   PRINTER        3  COUNTER INFORMATION     CURRENT PM CYCLE    F7 02 TOTAL COUNT i 13 240000  F7 03 PM COUNT    F7 04  F7 05    F7 06 OPC    DRUM COUNT    F7 07 PROCESS UNIT COUNT    F7 08 ADF  F7 10  F7 11  F7 12  F7 13  F7 14  F7 15  F7 16  F7 17  F7 18  F7 19  F7 20    PM COUNT  
191. mber of options that are used to manipulate the routing tables  some  are shown below       MASK  If this switch is present  the next parameter is interpreted as the netmask parameter     Netmask  If included  specifies a sub net mask value to be associated with this route entry  If not specified  it  defaults to 255 255 255 255     Gateway  Specifies the gateway     METRIC  Specifies the metric   cost for the destination     127    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    All symbolic names used for the destination are looked up in the network database file NETWORKS   The symbolic names for the gateway are looked up in the host name database file HOSTS    When the packet does not reach the specified destination even when the physical connection is  properly made  check the registered persistent routes on the same subnet as the Unit by typing  route  print  in the DOS command line  The output display is shown below     CAWINDOWS gt route print  Active Routes     Network Address Netmask Gateway Address    192 168 3 254    Interface Metric  192 168 3 2    0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0    127 0 0 0    192 168 3 0  192 168 3 2    192 168 3 255    224 0 0 0    255 0 0 0  255 255 255 0  255 255 255 255  255 255 255 255  224 0 0 0    127 0 0 1  192 168 3 2  127 0 0 1  192 168 3 2  192 168 3 2    127 0 0 1  192 168 3 2  127 0 0 1  192 168 3 2  192 168 3 2    255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 192 168 3 2 192 168 3 2       6  Host Name Query on DNS Server  Windows 2000   XP   2003   Vista also has a tool that en
192. ming Sensor to detect abnormal signals     195    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    Collimator Lens Cylindrical Lens  Laser Diode    _    Timing Sensor      a              Reflection Mirror    Cover Glass    6 3 4 2  Laser Beam    The laser beam is pulsed On and Off by the digital signal  nVIDEO  to form a latent image of two different  voltage potentials on the drum  as shown below     Laser Scanning Direction                    E      o  u RL  Z 9999    9999 Turn Laser Beam ON and OFF  x 00 0  000  000 corresponding with the images   5 e  sose      Laser Beam  ON   Drum discharged   a         O   Laser Beam  OFF   va E ce  ON      OFF    Laser Diode Specification  Item Minimum   Standard   Maximum  Oscillation Wavelength 770 785 800 nm  Output Light Power  OPC Drum Surface  0 315 0 350 0 385 mW                         6 3 4 3  Collimator Lens    The Collimator Lens converts light from the Laser Diode to parallel light  This aids in scanning and provides  better convergence to a dot     5 mm       Collimator Lens    196    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    6 3 4 4  Polygon Scanner   The Polygon Scanner consists of a 6 sided Mirror directly driven by a brushless DC Motor at a rate  20 078 74 rpm  The laser beam is reflected across the OPC Drum by the mirror faces and produces the  scan  One mirror face is equal to one main scan  This unit features stable line scanning speed  precision  mirror surface reflection angle  reflect free surfaces  and instant start     Polygon Scanner Speci
193. n  1  312   031  ADF Document Sensor Original is detected  1    312   2  Check Output  Press the    Start    key to start and press the    Stop    key to reset   F4 Mode  Check Output   No  Item Function Lee v  120  Lamp When the SDR PCB P705 9 signal The CIS shall be replaced  level changes to OV from 3 5V  Lamp  as the Assembly  operates   160   ADF Paper Feed Motor Rotating   ADF paper feed motor rotates at STD   516    STD speed rotating  speed   161  ADF Paper Feed Motor Rotating   ADF paper feed motor rotates at FINE   516    FINE speed rotating  speed   162   ADF Paper Feed Motor Rotating   ADF paper feed motor rotates at S    516    S FINE speed rotating  FINE speed   163   ADF Paper Feed Motor Reverse   ADF paper feed motor rotates in  516   Rotating reverse at 300dpi speed    300dpi speed rotating   164   ADF Paper Feed Motor Reverse   ADF paper feed motor rotates in  516   Rotating reverse at 100  speed    10096 speed rotating   165   ADF Paper Feed Motor Reverse   ADF paper feed motor rotates in  516   Rotating reverse at 200  speed    20096 speed rotating   175  ADF Stamp Solenoid When the ADF PCB CN25 2 signal  424           level changes to OV from  24V   Solenoid operates for 1 second           156          UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    5 1 4   F5 Mode  Function Parameters  For Copier     Set the machine to Service Mode  and press the    5    key   i  Press the  Start  key to enter the F5 Service Mode   i  Enter the desired code number  or press the    w      
194. n memory or during communication   Power failure occurred   700 XMT PSTN  Communication terminated by Opera   RCV LAN  tor pressing the  STOP  key   711 RCV LAN  Incorrect LDAP settings  LDAP Server Name  LDAP Login  Name  LDAP Password and or LDAP  Search Base are incorrect   712 XMT LAN  Unknown email address replied from  Mail Server received an incorrect email  the Mail Server  address   Dependent on Server s Mail  application   714 XMT LAN ILAN Interface error  The 10Base T 100Base TX cable is not  RCV Cannot logon to the LAN  connected   An unexpected LAN problem occurred   Check the SC PCB connector   715 XMT LAN  TCP IP connection timed out  Incorrect IP Address is set   Verify the IP Address  Default Router IP  Address  SMTP Server IP Address   716 XMT LAN  Cannot logon to the LAN  Incorrect SMTP Server IP Address is  set   No email application is activated on the  Mail Server   717 XMT LAN  Incomplete SMTP Protocol Mail Server s hard disk may be full   transmission  Mail Server is defective   718 XMT LAN  Page Memory Overflow occurred Check the document size and  while receiving printing data  The resolution   paper size selected within your Ask originator to re send in a supported  application to print is larger than the   size and resolution   paper size loaded in the Tray s    719 RCV LAN  Received data via LAN is in a format   Ask the originator to re send with a  that is not supported  supported file attachment     In a TIFF F format     Image data conforming t
195. n when transmitting   044   PASSWORD         Setting a 4 digit RCV Password and selecting whether  RCV the machine performs and checks the RCV Password of  the transmitting station when receiving   046   SELECT RCV  1 Invalid Selecting whether the machine performs selective  2 Valid reception   052  DIAG         Setting the password for Remote Diagnostic Mode   PASSWORD Please ask your Panasonic Authorized Dealer for details   053   SUB ADDRESS         Setting a password  up to 20 digits  for secured sub   PSWD address communication   054  FAX FORWARD   1 Invalid Selecting whether the machine performs Fax Forwarding  2 Valid to the specified destination   056 COVER SHEET   1 Off Setting the home position of the Cover Sheet parameter  2 On in the Select Mode   058  LANGUAGE 1 A ENGLISH  Selects the default message language for the display   2 C FRENCH  3 SPANISH  065   PRINT 1 Invalid Selecting whether the machine prints out documents in  COLLATION  2 Valid sequence   077 DEPARTMENT   1 Invalid Selecting whether the machine performs the Department  CODE 2 Valid Code operation        201       UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200                                                                   No  Parameter Sering Setting Comments  Number  082   QUICK MEMORY  1 Invalid Selecting whether the machine performs Quick Memory  XMT Kei Valid XMT   Invalid   Stores all documents into memory first before dialing  the telephone number   Valid   Starts dialing the telephone number immediately afte
196. nal accessories are installed     133    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200       E13  Low Toner or Out of Toner             Code Function Check Points  E13  TONER IS RUNNING LOW 1  Toner Cartridge is incorrectly installed   or OUT OF TONER 2  Out of Toner        3  Low Toner Sensor is disconnected   4  Low Toner Sensor is defective    5  SPC PCB connector is disconnected   6  SPC PCB is defective              134    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200                                                                4 8  Information Code Table  For Facsimile   Fax Information Codes  Code  Mode   Phase Description of Problem Cause  001 RCV C  D  Leading edge of the recording paper   Recording paper jam   COPY fails to reach the Timing Sensor  Timing Sensor abnormal    1st Tray   002 RCV C  D  Leading edge of the recording paper   Recording paper jam   COPY fails to reach the Timing Sensor   2nd   Timing Sensor abnormal   Tray   007 RCV C D  1  Leading edge of the recording Recording paper jam   COPY paper fails to reach the Paper Exit   Paper Exit Sensor abnormal   Sensor   2  Recording paper has not  completely passed the Paper Exit  Sensor   008 Paper Tray is opened while paper is Paper Tray is opened   feeding   010 RCV B C  No recording paper  No recording paper or paper is not set  COPY properly   No Paper Sensor is defective   011   STANDBY   B C  Paper Tray is not installed properly  Connector is not installed properly   012 RCV C D  The length of the received document   Transmitter Docum
197. ng completed so that you can quickly locate the components that don t  work  It is best to organize your troubleshooting efforts by understanding what should be happening  then  you can trace the path and see where the problem is occurring     In our case  we use TCP IP for transportation of data from one system to another  which involves a whole  series of events occurring throughout a number of different layers    As with all networking  TCP IP works better when its plugged in  therefore  start your troubleshooting by  checking the Physical Connectivity first  the cable s      In our examples  we ll use several simple tools readily available in the DOS command line utility for  troubleshooting  There are many other utilities available for checking more detailed information  some are  Free of charge  others are available for a nominal fee     1  System Diagram Model  Ask the customer to provide you with the Pre Installation Information form  that was filled out by the  Network Administrator   A description or system diagram for the unit  including its physical address  email server and DNS  server is required     Network Configuration   Domain Name  labo mgcs com      PC Client    210 232 71 18     js2 labo mgcs com  SMTP POP Server DNS Server    L_    sv2 labo mgcs com      192 168 1 2                                        sv1 labo mgcs com   192 168 1 1     um    cS ee HII  Router  R1   192 168 1 253  EI    IO                                                               
198. nicians are required to bring back the Installation Instructions after installation  not leave  at the customer site  Service Technicians are required to keep the Service Manuals and Installation  Instructions in a confidential and safe place       When the SC PCB is replaced the MAC address will be different  make sure that the new MAC address    is recognized on the Network    When setting the Remote Registration function  there is a slight possibility of an unauthorized third  party attempt to access your machine s settings using an E mail function through the Firewall  When  using this function  we recommend configuring your network environment with a switching hub  and  encryption to prevent your device from being wiretapped    When moving the machine for repair  etc  there is a remote possibility that the stored data can be  vulnerable to unauthorized access  or getting corrupted  Convey this to the customer and obtain their  permission to Back up the data onto an SD Memory Card or a PC  and then delete it from the machine   While servicing replacing the machine  it is imperative that the customer s data is maintained in  strictest confidentiality to prevent security breach    Before updating the firmware  back up the machine s data to prevent losing the settings     a  Back up the setting data onto an SD Memory Card   b  Back up the setting data onto a PC via a Network using    Network Configuration Editor    c  Print out the Service Parameters     After servicing  mak
199. nput the ID  and press the    Set    key to enter the Service Mode  default ID is 00000000    e  Enter the desired code number  or press the     w        a    keys     2  To exit the Fax Service Mode  Press the  Stop  key     Note   The following buttons provide these functions in the Service Mode      Start    The new setting value is stored in the machine    e    Scroll the function parameter number down   ER      Scroll the function parameter number up     5 2 2  FAX Service Mode Table    The following service modes are provided to assist you in setting operational functions of the unit and  determining the condition of the unit                             No  Service Mode Description   00  Not Used   01  PARAMETER SET Allows changes to the function parameters  the home position   etc      02  RAM EDIT MODE Factory use only    03  PRINT REPORT  LIST Prints the Function Parameter List  Page Memory Test  Printer  Report  All Document File  Protocol Trace and Toner Order Form    04  MODEM TEST Generates various binary  tonal and DTMF signals  by the modem    05  Not Used   06  RAM INITIALIZE Initialize RAM and restore the default value of the function  parameters     Note  Turn the Power Switch to the OFF and back to the ON  position to enable the parameter settings        07  Not Used  08  CHECK  amp  CALL Allows input of information for Service Alert Report  Maintenance  Alert Report and Toner Order Form    09  SYSTEM MAINTENANCE Used for Firmware Update  Parameter Restore 
200. nt File  Protocol Trace and the Toner Order Form     5 2 4 1  Function Parameter List  A list of all Function Parameters can be printed by the following procedure     Press the    w        a    keys to select    3  Print Report List    Press the    Set    key    Select    q  Function Parameter List       Press the    Set    key     Press the  Stop  key to exit the service mode        175    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    Function Parameter List  Sample     Xo ek x xx FUNCTION PARAMETER  ce x  xxexexekekekeke    000  001  002  003  004  005  006  007  008  009    010  011  012  013  014  015  016  017  018  019    020  021  022  023  024  025  026  027  028  029    030  031  032  033  034  035  036  037  038  039    040  041  042  043  044  045  046  047  048  049    Xe kk x x x UF XKXXK KK k k    Note     MON TEL DIAL   Monitor  Monitor  ALARM STATUS   Timer  Timer  STOP COMM  JRNL  On  On  CONTINUOUS POLLING   Off  Off  NUMERIC ID SET  On  On     SPLAY   Name  Name    MONITOR   Off  Off  DC LOOP  Off  Off       TX LEVEL    11dBm   RX LEVEL    43dBm   DTMF LEVEL    5DBM   G3 RX EOL   0dB  OdB  G3 TX EOL   OdB  OdB     11dBm   43dBm   5dBm          14400bps      14400bps   V 34   On  On    14400bps  14400bps                   ECM   On  On   P TONE   Off  Off    G  INTERVAL   500ms  500ms  TCF CHECK   Normal  Normal  CED FREQ   2100Hz  2100Hz  COMM  START UP   1 st  1 st  NON STANDARD   On  On   SHORT PROTOCOL B   On  On  SHORT PROTOCOL D   On  On  REMOTE DIAG    On  On         
201. nting Size LGL   LTR   A4   2 Bypass No   3 Stapling No   4 Printing Resolution  dpi  600 x 600   300 x 300 dpi   5 Interface USB   Ethernet   6 OS Win 2000   Win XP   Win 2003     Win Vista   7 Printer Work Memory Size 22 MB Not expandable   8 GDI Yes   9 PDL  PCL6  No   10 PDL  PS3  No   11 Duplex Printing No   12 Collation Stack Yes   13 Status Monitor   Network Yes  USB No  14 Network Status Monitor Yes  15 Smoothing Yes       16 Applicable PC    IBM PC  AT or Compatible       17 Multi Task Operation                                  Printing while Fax XMT from Y  es  Memory  Printing while Fax RCV into Y  es  Memory  Fax XMT from Memory while Y  An es  Printing  Fax RCV into Memory while Yes  Printing  18 Output to separate tray for No  Printing  Fax  Copy  19 Font No  Requires Optional SD Memory  20 Secure Mailbox Yes Card  256 MB   2 GB            Max  10 mailboxes        21    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200                                                                   1 1 3  Network Scanner Function  Description  Items UF 8200 AU  UF 7200 AU  Remarks  UF 8300 Others    UF 7300 Others   Interface  1 Centronics Parallel I F No  2 LAN  Network  Yes Ethernet 10Base T 100Base TX  3 USB Port No  4  EEE 1394 No Firewire  Network Scanning Function  1 Scanning Device CIS  2 Scanning Speed  ADF   Mono Excludes  Initializing Time  ADF  150dpi  150 x 150  ua   SS  a E     SES factor  and Data XMT  REESEN  a       ms     i E  Letter size for USA and      Canada  A4 size for Other  
202. o A4 Letter  size   720 POP LAN   Unable to connect with the POP Incorrect POP Server Address is set   Server  POP Server is down   721 POP LAN  Unable to login to the POP Server  Incorrect User Name or Password is                set        139       UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200       Fax Information Codes                                                                      Code Mode  Phase Description of Problem Cause   722 RCV LAN Failed to obtain the Network LAN Cable is disconnected    Parameters  such as  IP Address  DHCP is not available   Subnet Mask  Default Gateway IP  Contact the Network Administrator    Address  etc   from the DHCP server   725 XMT LAN   DNS Server connection timed out  Incorrect DNS Server Address is set   POP DNS Server is down   726 XMT LAN  Received an error response from the  Incorrect POP Server Address is set   POP DNS Server  Incorrect SMTP Server Address is set    727 XMT LAN Received an Error or No Response Remote Internet Fax Errors  Busy or  from the Remote Internet Fax   SMTP   Job Number Overflow for Relay XMT   Direct XMT   Retry is possible    728 XMT LAN Remote Internet Fax Errors  Memory   Overflow or No Power    Retry is not possible    729 XMT LAN Failed to authenticate  SMTP SMTP AUTHENTICATION  User Name  AUTHENTICATION  when and or Password are incorrect   connecting with the SMTP server   Contact the Network Administrator     730 RCV LAN   Unable to program the Internet Verify that the Fax Parameter  158 is  parameters or the 
203. o accept the firmware code from Master SD Memory Card   If there is additional G3 firmware code file to be updated  use the Master SD Memory Card to update the  firmware using the  Auto Mode  again     3 5 8  Firmware Version    SC   UF 8200 or 7200 A A Vxxxxx AU    Destination Code  Fax   AU   USA Canada  EB  UK etc     Firmware Version  V 1xxxx     Language Code  A   A English  C French  amp  Spanish  etc                    Firmware Type  A   Standard    Model Number          G3   UF 82 G3B AA Vxxxxx YC                 YC  Fixed   Firmware Version  V1xxxx   AA  Fixed   2nd G3   Model Number             68    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    3 6  Adjusting the Printer Registration  LSU Image Side to Side    When installing the Paper Tray option  the following LSU Image Side to Side adjustment may be required   The Printer registration is adjusted at the factory   If copy image is abnormal  especially in the Rotation Copy mode  adjust it by the following procedure     3 6 1  Printer Registration    1  Insert Letter or A4 size paper into the 1st tray and change the tray setting to the appropriate paper size   Empty all the remaining trays  including the bypass tray  to disable them      Press the  Function      Original Size     and the    3    keys sequentially      Input the ID  and press the  Set  key to enter the Service Mode  default ID is 00000000       Perform the Service Mode F1 03  Print Test Pattern 1       Check the gap of the print pattern from the paper edge   Refer 
204. o not support  these file formats  and TIFF F format must be used when  sending to an Internet Fax machine    This setting can be temporarily changed when sending  an Internet Fax with the Select Mode  Fuction 8 6  FILE  TYPE NAME             182       SEND COMM     JOURNAL     UF 7200 only      1    Print       2    E mail       3       Both       Selecting whether the Communication Journal is printed   emailed or both   Print   Prints   Email   Emails to the address selected in the Sender  Selection     Both   Prints and Emails        206       UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200       No     Parameter    Setting  Number    Setting    Comments       184    EMAIL REPORT   UF 8200 only      1    OFF       2    ON    Selecting whether to send the transmission result  notification by Email    If  NOT FOUND    is displayed on the LCD when   specifying a station  check below     1  The registered station name and the character  strings entered when specifying a station are totally  the same  including symbols and space     2  The station registered as transmission result  notification is an Email address  G3 FAX station  cannot be used     Note  The transmission result notification cannot be sent  to stations registered to use the Direct Internet Fax  feature        186    IPv6     1    Invalid       Valid    Selecting whether to use the IPv6 environment           187       IPv6 AUTO  CONFIG           Invalid             Valid       Selecting whether to automatically configure the IPv6   
205. ocess    Charge   Charge Corona Exposure   LSU  Fusing   Heat Roller                                                  Development   Toner Area              Feed Roller                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  OPC Drum Pick Up Roller  Fusing   Pressure Roller Development   Cleaning   Conductive Roller    Transfer   Bias Transfer Roller  BTR     6 3 2 1  Charge    The Charge Corona applies a high  uniform positive charge to the surface of the Organic Photo Conductor   OPC  Drum  The charge level is approximately 900 VDC and remains because the OPC Drum has a high  electrical resistance when concealed in darkness     6 3 2 2  Exposure    The laser beam passes through the Collimator Lens  is reflected by the Polygon Mirror  and is focused onto  the drum after passing through an image forming  F  8  Lens and a Reflection Mirror  Wherever the laser  beam strikes the drum  the positive charge dissipates  A latent electrical image of two different voltages  potentials  which corresponds to the original page  is formed on the OPC Drum     6 3 2 3  Development   Cleaning    Development    Non magnetic Toner is supplied to the Conductive Roller by the Toner Supply Roller  The Toner on the  Conductive Roller is positively charged by friction with the Toner Supply Roller  and the Doctor Blade  ensures a thin
206. om registration roller  50    16  clutch ON timing  0 5mm  05 06  Not Used  07  REGISTRATION VOID Lead Edge Void can be adjusted  0    99  0 5mm  08  Not Used  09  TRAIL EDGE PRT TIM  Adjustment of trail edge void   9    15  0 5mm  10  Not Used  11  SIDE ADJUST  TRAY 1  Adjustment of LSU side side  1st Tray    8    7  0 5mm  12  SIDE ADJUST  TRAY 2  Adjustment of LSU side side  2nd Tray    8  7  0 5mm  13 38  Not Used  39  LSU UNIT PWM ADJUST Adjustment of PWM value of LSU   32    32  40  TRANS CURRENT Adjustment of Transfer Current   77    76  0 15uA  41 43   Not Used  44  FAXLASER DUTY ADJ  Printer Density Adjustment for FAX   99    99        Darker         Lighter   45  Not Used                160       UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200                                                                      F6 Mode  No  Item Remarks Setting  Range  46  PRINTER LASER DUTY ADJ  Printer Density Adjustment for Printer   99    99        Darker         Lighter   47 48   Not Used  49  TEXT IMAGE DENSITY Image density adjustment for Text mode   99    99        Darker         Lighter   50  Not Used  51  PHOTO IMAGE DENSITY Image density adjustment for Photo mode   99    99        Darker         Lighter   52 53   Not Used  54  TEXT MODE CONTRAST Adjustment of Contrast for Text Mode   128    127  55  Not Used  56  PHOTO MODE CONTRAST Adjustment of Contrast for Photo Mode   128    127  57 68  Not Used  69 STAMP POSITION ADJ  Adjustment of verification stamp position   50    50  0 3mm  70 90   N
207. ompliant products put on the EU market on or after July 1  2006   Therefore  please make sure to order and use only RoHS compliant spare parts listed in  this manual     The contents of this Manual  and the Specifications are subject to change without  notice    Panasonic Communications Co   Ltd  reserves the right to make improvements in  the product design without reservation  and without notice    Published in Japan        Important Notice    Please read these Instructions completely BEFORE installing any optional  accessories  Installing the additional board  or connector with the power ON  could damage the SC  and or other board s      How to turn OFF the Power   lt Reference gt     1  Disconnect the Telephone Line Cable   2  Disconnect the LAN USB Cable s     if connected   3  Unplug the AC Power Cord     Unplug     Some models may have AC Power Cord  the Power Switch       There is a remote possibility of electrocution when servicing the unit during a Lightning  Storm  As a precaution  disconnect the Telephone Line Cable first  before unplugging  the AC Power Cord           The specifications are subject to change without notice  Panasonic Communications Co   Ltd  reserves  the right to make improvements in the product design without reservation and without notice     Wichtiger Hinweis    Diese Anweisungen bitte ganz durchlesen  BEVOR optionales Zubeh r installiert  wird  Ansonsten k nnen bei Einbau der zus tzlichen Leiterplatte oder   Anschlie en des Steckverbinders b
208. on  Resolution  dpi   Paper Width  0   A4  1 S Fine A4  2 400 x 400 A4  3 300 x 300 A4  4 x z  5   z  6 z    7   3  8 z z  9 z z  A z E  B    E  C   E  D s z  E   z  F s B             143    4th Digit       Not used defined    5th Digit       Not used defined    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200       Fax Diagnostic Codes                                                                                                                                           bata Definition  Scanning Rate Resolution  0 20 ms line Std  1 5 ms line Std  2 10 ms line Std  3   Std  4 40 ms line Std  5   Std  6   Std  7 0 ms line Std  8 20 ms line Fine  9 5 ms line Fine  A 10 ms line Fine  B   Fine  C 40 ms line Fine  D   Fine  E   Fine  F 0 ms line Fine  Fax Diagnostic Codes  Definition  Data Deferr PEE Memor  dig DRINGIREN  Manual Non Memory  0   SEN  Communication  1 Used Manual   Non Memory  Communication  2   Auto Dialing Non Memory  3 Used Auto Dialing Non Memory  4   Auto RCV Non Memory  5 Used Auto RCV Non Memory  6   Remote RCV Non Memory  7 Used Remote RCV Non Memory  Manual  P   Communication Memo  Manual    er Communication Memory  A   Auto Dialing Memory  B Used Auto Dialing Memory  C   Auto RCV Memory  D Used Auto RCV Memory  E   Remote RCV Memory  F Used Remote RCV Memory                      144    eth Digit     Not used defined    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200                                                                                                                                      
209. op   are  TEE SE  Color No  3 Halftone 256 Halftone shades With Error Diffusion  Legal    4 Max  Document Size    8 5 x 14 in  216 x 356 mm        5 Scanning Resolution  dpi                          600 x 600  Mono 300 x 300 Default  300 dpi  150 x 150  Win 2000   Win XP   Win 2003     9 9 9 Win Vista  7 2 Sided Scanning No  8 File Format Multi page TIFF   PDF  9 Completion Notice Yes Auto Pop up on the PC Screen  10 Protocol TCP IP   Non Std       Network Address Features       1 One Touch Address Keys    80    Shared with Fax Internet Fax  One Touch Address  80 in Total       2 Abbr Address Numbers          20       Independent for Network  Scanner       22       UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200                         1 1 4  Internet Fax Function  Description  eins UF 8300 8200 7300 7200 means   Main Specifications   1 Communication Protocols SMTP   POP3   MIME   2 Max  Modem Speed NA   3 Coding Scheme JBIG MMR MR MH   Selectable     PDF formats are used for Scan              1 Max  Document Size    216 x 2000 mm    4 File Format TIFF   PDF to Email  current Internet Fax  standards do not support these  file formats    5 Line Interface RJ 45 Ethernet LAN   Scanner Mechanism  Legal       2 Effective Scanning Width    LTR  8 3 in  212 mm   A4  8 2in  208 mm     Letter size  for USA and Canada  A4 size Tor Other  Destinations       3 Scanning Resolution  dpi x Ipi  pel mm x lines mm     Std   203 x 98  8 x 3 85   Fine  203x 196  8 x 7 7   S Fine   203 x 391  8 x 15 4      406 x 391
210. ormation    Yes   Y  From the DOS Prompt  enter the following  command line utility   route print   Does the current routing table for the No             Gateway match         Ask the Network Administrator to correct                               Yes  Y the routing table on that Gateway   Does the Default Gateway respond to the No   ping IP  command    Yes Check the power switch  cables  and the  Y current settings of unit   Does the DNS Server respond to the No        ping IP  command         Ask the Network Administrator to check the  Default Gateway  and system status    Does the unit respond to the  ping host No   name  command      Yes  Y                                        Yes Ask the Network Administrator to check the  Default Gateway  and system status   Does the unit respond to the  telnet  No  command   l  Yes Replace the SC PCB          Ask the Network Administrator to verify the  POP SMTP account  and system status              123    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    4 6 2  Testing the TCP IP Network    It is beyond the scope of this Service Manual to cover Networking in detail  there are many excellent  manuals on this subject  but we hope the information in this section will aid with your troubleshooting efforts   In most cases  the Network Administrator will be able to provide you with needed information or assistance     When encountering Network problems during an onsite service call or during the installation stage  try to  isolate the steps that are not bei
211. ot Print Properly       Problem    Possible Solution s        Character is not printing in the  correct positions  or the  characters near the edges of  the page are missing       Check  that the paper size and orientation settings in the printer driver  to coincide with the application      Check if the specified paper is loaded in the Panasonic Device      Increase the Page Margins in the application  The Panasonic Device  requires minimum margins of 1 4 inch  5 mm  on all sides        The font type is incorrect      Check if the selected font is installed in the PC      Check if the selected font is being replaced with a proper printer font in  the Font Substitution Table of the Printer Driver Properties dialog box     Select  Always use True Type fonts  from the Font tab of the Printer   Driver Properties dialog box        The character is not smooth       Select an outline font instead of a bit map font        Fine line print cannot be  obtained       Select 600 dpi resolution        Poor photograph print quality       Select 600 dpi resolution        Different character  or symbol  from the document is printed       Check if the Panasonic Printing System  PCL  printer driver is selected        The printer does not print  anything  or prints irregular  images from the middle of the  1st page       Insufficient Printer Page Memory in the Panasonic Device  install an  Expansion D RAM Card  or change the resolution to 300 dpi in the  Quality tab of the Printer Driver Proper
212. ot Used  91  ORIGINAL LEAD ADF Adjustment of original detection timing   99    99  0 3mm  92  ORIGINAL TRAIL ADF Adjustment of trail edge detection timing   90   127  0 3mm  93 98   Not Used  99  F5 F6 INITIALIZE Initialize F5 F6 parameter settings        161       UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    5 1 6     Set the machine to Service Mode  and press the  7  key     F7 Mode  Electronic Counter       Y    Press the  Start  key to enter the F7 Service Mode     Y    Enter the desired code number  or press the    w        a    keys   If you wish to select another code number  press the    w        a    keys     Y    Press the  Set  key     Y    Enter the desired function code number and press the  Set  key   When the  Clear  key is pressed  the selected code input will not be accepted     Press the  Stop  key   4    Press the    Function    and the    Clear    keys sequentially to exit the service mode                                                                                            i  Reboot the machine after setting the parameter s  to activate the setting s    F7 Mode  No  Item Remarks  01 APPLICATION PASSWORD Password for Firmware Version update  Print job queue  functions  and various PC application operations    02  TOTAL COUNT Total count for all copies   prints    03  PM COUNT Preventive Maintenance count   04 05   Not Used   06  OPC DRUM COUNT PM count of the OPC Drum    07  PROCESS UNIT COUNT PM count of Process Unit    08  ADF PM COUNT PM count of originals fed th
213. out in Service Yes  Mode 3 normal     No  4  Y  i Yes  Is the recording paper damp   Y  NO Replace the recording paper   V  Is the Toner Cartridge No  operational  V  Replace the Toner Cartridge    Yes  Are there any foreign particles  Yes  or stains blocking the Laser  Beam path   No     y E     Are there any foreign particles   Yes  or stains on the BTR   No  2  Replace the BTR   Y  Are the Fuser  and Pressure   No    Roller surfaces clean                 Yes    ra    Y          Clean  or replace the rollers                    103    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    4 3 4  Ghost Images                                                                                                                                                                                        t  A   START  gt   AAA ZS  He  A     Is the printout in Service Yes       Mode 3 normal  d  No Check the Scanner mechanism   re  V  Is the recording paper damp    YeS  Y  No  gt   Replace the recording paper   Y  No  Is the Toner Cartridge i  operational   Replace the Toner Cartridge   Yes  Y  Are there any foreign particles   Yes  or stains on the BTR  Y  No 1  Clean the BTR with a soft   dry cloth   2  Replace the BTR   In   Y  Are the Fuser  and Pressure No  Roller surfaces clean  d  Yes  Clean  or replace the rollers   re             Y    104    4 3 5  Vertical Dark Lines                               UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200          Check the Scanner mechanism                                         2  Repla
214. parameters to default values   01   ALL JOB Clears all Jobs stored in Flash  CLEAR Memory   02   LBP ERROR Clears LBP Error log  LOG CLEAR  03   SHIPMENT SET   Clears All Jobs  All Preset Data   Parameter Initialize  amp  Resets the  Counters  Fax    04   LBP FUSER Clears the LBP fuser error   RESET  05  DEPT  Clears the Dept  Counter   COUNTER  CLEAR  06 FLASH Clears the Flash Memory   MEMORY  CLEAR  07   FIRMWARE  00   UPDATE FROM   Updates the firmware in the machine  UPDATE CARD with the Master Firmware SD  Memory Card   01 UPDATE FROM   Updates the firmware in the machine  USB using a PC via the USB port   08   Not Used  10  11   PARAMETER BACKUP Backup the Parameter   12  PARAMETER RESTORE Restore the Parameter   13 PAGE MEMORY SIZE Displays the page memory size  MB    14 SORT MEMORY SIZE Displays the sort memory size  MB            15       SD CARD FORMAT       Format the SD Memory Card        165       UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    5 2  Service Modes  For Facsimile     Caution   The factory default parameters are preset  country dependent  for optimum performance and in  compliance with the local telecommunication regulations standards  and do not need to be changed   Changing some of these parameters may cause the unit to be no longer compliant or become  inoperable     5 2 1   FaxService Mode Procedure    1  To enter the Fax Service Mode  a  Press the  Function  and the    7    keys   b  Press the    Monitor    key four times   c  Press the       Tone     key   d  I
215. part numbers in a label on the PCB   Caution      Pb free solder has a higher melting point than standard solder  typically the melting  point is 50   70  F  30   40  C  higher  Please use a soldering iron with temperature  control and adjust it to 700   20   F  370   10   C   Exercise care while using higher  temperature soldering irons  do not heat the PCB for too long to prevent solder  splash or damage to the PCB     Pb free solder will tend to splash when heated too high  about 1112  F 600  C       ECO SOLDER M705  available from Senju Metal Industry Co   Ltd     URL  http   www senju m co jp  is recommended when repairing PbF PCBs           General Annotations    9  Important Notice   Especially for countries belonging to the European Union      This product is fully compliant with the national laws transposed from the EU Directive on  the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances  RoHS  in electrical and  electronic equipment  effective July 1  2006 in the EU countries     In order for the product to comply with the RoHS Directive  the six particular substances   lead  mercury  cadmium  hexavalent chromium  polybrominated biphenyls  and  polybrominated diphenyl ethers  have been either totally eliminated or limited to the  concentration level below maximum allowed  Consequently spare parts have been  changed to RoHS compliant parts where applicable     Due to spare parts application of RoHS legislation  non compliant spare parts cannot be  used to repair c
216. pdate of  multiple firmware code files is necessary     or    Select an Independent File       Step 5 2  If the archive file is already extracted into  the local  Data folder  you can select an  independent file here   When updating multiple firmware files  you  must repeat the file selection operation     Select a Parent File Folder  Complete Set     5 1a Select  Select a Parent File Folder  Complete    Set   and click  Browse     button     5 1b Select the Parent File Folder  For Example     DP 2310 3010 PU 030327 and Click  OK      Local Firmware Update Tool x     Specify the Parent File Folder Independent File that the firmware code file s  are  stored in        Select a Parent File Folder  Complete Set     jim       Browse         C Select an Independent File          Click Next when you are done        el        Local Firmware Update Tool x     Specify the Parent File Folder Independent File that the firmware code file s  are  stored in           C Select an Independent File       Click Next when you are done        teen         Browse for Folder j    21x     C  Panasonic Panasonic FUP Data DP 2310_3010_PU_03032       71 BackUp  compaq    C3 Documents and Settings H                    IntelPRO  Panasonic  FE  TI Panasonic DMS  2 CT Panasonic FUP  E Data  x y       HEHE                                           C UsvDrv v     gt     can    N       Page 9    Local Firmware Update Tool  Parallel  USB Port     5 1c Select the Firmware Type and click  OK   i    Standard Firm
217. ply  Copy 830W  Maximum Less than 1000 W  Standby 12 7 W  Transmission 21 3W  Reception 730W 220   240 VAC Power Supply  Copy 730 W  Maximum Less than 1000 W       Ambient Conditions          1 Temperature    50   80   F   10   30   C                in FCC Rules Part 15    2 Relative Humidity 30   80 RH  UL60950 1   CSA C222  3 Safety No 60950 1 For USA and Canada  EN60950 1 For EU and Other Destinations  4 EMI Class B computing device peripheral For USA and Canada       5 Lead Free Solder  PbF           This Product uses Lead Free  PbF   PCBs       Refer to the inner Front Cover  and the Parts Manual for details       16       UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200       Items    Description       UF 8200 AU    UF 7200 AU   UF 8300 Others    UF 7300 Others        Remarks       Construction       1 Dimensions  W x D x H     17 3 x 17 7 x 14 2 in   440 x 450 x 360 mm     Excluding projections       2 Weight  Excluding paper     48 5 Ib  22 0 kg     Excluding consumable supplies  and options       Consumables                                                          1 Toner Cartridge Yield  10 K Letter A4 396 coverage  Options  1 Internet Fax   Email    Network Scanner Module EEN TOR  2 G3 Communication Port Kit Yes  Yes Use Genuine SD Memory Cards  3 SD Memory Card 32 MB  2GB only  ry  4 2nd Paper Feed Module Yes  5 Handset Kit Yes  Multi Task Operation  1 Multi Task Operation Yes  2 Direct XMT Reserve Yes  3 Memory XMT Reserve Yes  4 Number of Memory Job Files Yes Max  50 files  Dialing T
218. r  storing the first page   This feature is not available when the Fax Parameter  No 133  JOB BUILD  is set to    2 On      088  LINE  1 Auto Selecting the transmitting telephone line when the  SELECTION 2 Line 1 optional G3 Communication Port Kit is installed   3 Line 2 Auto   Selects the available telephone line for transmission  automatically   Line 1   Selects Line 1 as the only transmitting telephone line   Line 2   Selects Line 2 as the only transmitting telephone line   Note  Regardless of the setting selection above  the unit  will answer and receive on both telephone lines   097 SPECIAL TRAY   1 None Select a Special Tray that will not be used for printing  No 1 2 Tray 1 received faxes  Tray 1 or 2    One Tray must always be  3 Tray 2 available for receiving faxes  This setting is available  when the optional 2nd Paper Feed Module is installed   099 MEMORY SIZE      Displays the amount of Memory size   117  MULTI STATION  1 Invalid Selecting whether the machine allows sending the  Kei Valid document to multiple destinations  If the setting is     1 Invalid     the document can be sent to a single  destination only   118  FAX FUNC  1 Invalid Setting the number of digits required to determine the  DETECT 2 4 Digits entered number is a Fax Telephone Number   3 5 Digits Upon detecting the specified number of digits  the  GI 6 Digits machine will automatically switch to the Fax Mode when      it is in the Copier Mode   5 7 Digits  6 8 Digits  119  OWERTY 1 One Touch   Sel
219. r Dialing   Max 1000 stations when the SD  Memory Card is installed    Direct Deferred Yes ADF Deferred Transmission  Transmission  6 Deferred Transmission Yes Max  50 timers  7 Deferred Multi Station  Transmission i  8 Priority Direct Transmission Yes Priority ADF Transmission  9 Priority Memory  Transmission He  10 Batch Transmission Yes Real Time  up to 5 Files   11 90 Degree Rotation  Transmission SR  12 Cover Sheet Yes  13 Confidential Mail Box No  14 Multi Copy Transmission No  FAX  Back up with Flash  Memory   Te Memon BA LE ves Copy   Pintor  No Back up  with D RAM  16 Duplex Scanning Yes Scan twice  Fax once  Reception Features  1 Substitute Reception Yes  LTR A4 LGL  70   100   in 1   2 Fixed Reduction Yes Steps   Top  amp  Left  Alignment  LTR A4 LGL  70   100   in 1   3 Auto Reduction Yes Steps   Top  amp  Left  Alignment       Page End Approx  0 4 in  4 Overlap Printing Yes ride pp  5 Receive to Memory Yes  s an Ring Detector Yes Specified Destinations only  7 90 Degree Rotation N  Reception ie  8 Duplex Printing No  9 Junk Fax Prevention Yes          E mail Report       Yes       No             18    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200       Description                                                                                                                                                       Items UF 8200 AU  UF 7200 AU  Remarks  UF 8300 Others    UF 7300 Others   Polling  1 Polling Yes  2 Turnaround Polling No  3 Multi Station Polling Yes  4 Deferred Polling Ye
220. r Name  Version  SC Folder Name  Version  SPC Folder Name Browse       Version  FAX Folder Name Browse       Version             mm DS   zl       Page 10    6 2b Select the Firmware Code File Folder for PNL   For Example  SFDL2PNLAAV 100000 PU DIN     and click  OK      6 2c Repeat steps for other Firmware Code File  Folders if applicable  and click  OK      6 2d Firmware Code File selection is completed   Click  Next gt       Continue Below     Network Firmware Update Tool  LAN     Browse for Folder 2            C  Panasonic Panasonic FUP Data DP 2310_3010_PU_03032        E Panasonic       Panasonic DMS  Panasonic FUP                                     5  Data  E DP 2310 3010 PU 030328 i  C  Pn  SFDL2PNLAAV10ODO PU    Sc Pel    Q Sc Ps    Sc Std  oo of  Cancel      Network Firmware Update Tool E x     Select the Archive File  Parent Folder or Independent Folder s  that the firmware code file s are stored in                                            Select a Parent File Folder  Complete Set   Folder Name   Browse         Comment           Select Independent File Folders    PNL Folder Name    C YPanasonicYPanasonic FUPYDataXDP 2310 3010 PU 0303    Version SFDL2PNLAAV10000 PU       sc Folder Name ca  Bremsen       Version       SPC Folder Name Browse                  Version  FAX Folder Name p               S  Browse       Version          Network Firmware Update Tool x     Select the Archive File  Parent Folder or Independent Folder s  that the firmware code file s are store
221. r S etting Setting Comments   umber   136  RESTRICT D   1 Invalid Selecting whether the machine allows a manual input of  DIAL 2 Valid the destination and the use of the Redial button    If the setting is  2 Valid   manual input of the destination  and the Redial button are not available    The Fax Parameter No 137  RE ENTER D  DIAL  is not  available when the Restrict Direct Dial is set to  2 Valid     137  RE ENTER D   1 Invalid Selecting whether the machine reguires you to enter the  DIAL 2 Valid destination twice    If the setting is  2 Valid   the machine requires you to  enter the destination twice  and transmission takes place  only when the entered destinations are matched    If the setting is  2 Valid   the Monitor button cannot be  used    This feature is not available when the Fax Parameter  No 136  RESTRICT D  DIAL  is set to  2 Valid     140  LAN RLY XMT  1 Invalid Selecting whether the machine performs LAN Relay XMT  REQ 2 Valid Request    142  RELAY XMT 1 Invalid Selecting whether the machine accepts and performs G3   A K A  LAN Kei Valid Relayed Transmission   Relay Station Functions   RELAY  STATION ON  UF 770I    143  RELAY XMT 1 Off Setting how the COMM  Journal for Relayed  REPORT  2 Always Transmission is sent to the originator    3 Inc  Only Off   Don t send   Always   Always send   Inc  Only   Send only if communication has failed    144  EMAIL CHAR  1 Japanese Selecting the Character Set when receiving or sending  SET  2 English Email text    145   SEN
222. r Signal  LDEXITSEN  1 2 VDC Energy Saver Control  LDJAMDOOR OP  1 2V   LDPLPOSISEN  1 2V                                                                                                                                     LDPNON  1 2 VDC Energy Saver Control  LDRELSEN  1 2 VDC Power Supply  LDRNON OP  1 2V   MGND Ground   N C  No Connection   nA Motor Control Signal   nADUST LSU APC timing   nAPNT ADF Paper Detection Sensor Signal  nB Motor Control Signal   nBPNT ADF Read Point Detection signal  nCBSY Busy Command   nCCHK Paper Tray detect Signal   nCCHK OP 2nd Feeder Option Detection Signal  nCCHK OP Paper Tray detect Signal  nCHGCTL HVPS Charge Control  ON OFF   nCPNT ADF Paper Ejection Sensor Signal  nCTONG3B Ringer Detection Signal   nDB Developer    Voltage PWM Pulse   nDBCH Developer Charge      Change   nEXITSEN EXIT Sensor Signal   nFCTL Fuser ON OFF Control   nHKOFF External Phone Off Hook Detection Signal  nHSYNC Horizontal Synchronization Signal  nIRQGS3B G3B Interrupt Request Signal  nJAMDOR OP 2nd Feeder Option Detection Signal  nJAMDOR OP JAM Cover Sensor detect Signal  nLDON LD Light Enable   nLED1 PNL LED Control Signal   nLED3 PNL LED Control Signal   nLED4 PNL LED Control Signal   nLED5 PNL LED Control Signal   nLED6 PNL LED Control Signal   nLED7 PNL LED Control Signal   nLED8 PNL LED Control Signal   nLED9 PNL LED Control Signal   nLEDACT ACTIVE Lamp LED Control Signal  nLEDALM ALARM Lamp LED Control Signal  nLEDDAT DATA Lamp LED Control Signal  nLEDDBK PN
223. r authorized Panasonic dealer     The power cord is plugged firmly into the receptacle      The plug is not excessively heated  rusted  or bent      The plug and receptacle are free of dust      The cord is not cracked or frayed     Operating Safeguards    Qooo    Do not touch areas where these caution labels are attached to  the surface may be very hot and may cause  severe burns     Do not place any liquid container such as a vase  or coffee cup on the machine  Spilt water can cause fire or  shock hazard     Do not place any metal parts such as staples or clips on the machine  If metal and flammable parts get into the  machine  they can short circuit internal components  and cause fire or electric shocks     If debris  metal or liquid  gets into the machine  switch Off and unplug the machine immediately   Operating a debris contaminated machine can cause fire or electric shock     Do not try to alter the machine configuration or modify any parts  An unauthorized modification can cause  smoke or fire     Consumable Safeguards    O    Never dispose of toner  toner cartridge  or a waste toner container into an open flame  Toner remaining in the  cartridge bottle can cause an explosion  burns and or injuries     Installation and Relocation Cautions    AS SOY    Do not place the machine near heaters or volatile  flammable  or combustible materials such as curtains that  may catch fire     Do not place the machine in a hot  humid  dusty  or poorly ventilated environment  Prolonge
224. r on the LCD  The machine will format the SD Card for DATA  used for Fax Image  1 000  Station Auto Dialer  JOB MIB Data  etc    and it takes approximately 3 to 12 min  to format depending  on the manufacturer  SD Memory Card size or Data Access Speed of the SD Card    To Update the Firmware or to Format an SD Memory Card using the F9 15 Service Mode takes  approximately 5 sec  Refer to 3 5 6   Formatting the SD Memory Card      1  When a DATA SD Card is Not installed    1    2   3     CO OO Jo om P    10     11    12   13   14   19       Before starting  print the F5 F6 Parameters List  Copy Service Mode F9 03 00     Disconnect the Telephone Line  LAN and or USB Cables    Unplug the AC Power Cord to turn off power   During a Lightning Storm  to prevent electrocution  disconnect the Telephone Line Cable first before unplugging the AC Power Cord       Install the appropriate Master Firmware SD Memory Card into the machine      Plug the AC Power Cord to turn on power      Press the    Function        Original Size   and the    3    keys sequentially      Input the ID  and press the  Set  key to enter the Service Mode  default ID is 00000000       Perform the Copy Service Mode F9 07 00  Update From Master SD Card       The firmware is copied into the machine    Selecting the    Auto Mode   copies all the necessary firmware at once    After the update is completed  the machine reboots itself and returns to standby      Unplug the AC Power Cord to turn off power    Remove the Mast
225. r the Continuous Polling feature is  POLL 2 7 Stn  Tx only  enabled    3   Hub  Rx only  Stn   Place the document s  on the ADF  then press  the assigned One Touch Key to store or add  the documents into a polled file     See Note 1    Hub   When the polling command is initiated  the  machine will continuously poll originals from  the remote stations until it is interrupted by  pressing  Stop     004  NUMERIC ID 1   Off  will not accept    Selects whether the machine accepts and allows to  SET 2   On  accepts  set or change the Numeric ID                 167       UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200       Function Parameter Table       No     Parameter    Selections    Function       005    Destination Code   UF 8300 7300    only     000   Austria   001   U K    002   Canada  003   Denmark  005   Finland   007   Netherlands  008   Italy   009   Spain   010   Hong Kong  011   Australia  012   Switzerland  013   Norway  015   Portuguese  016   Ireland   017   Belgium  018   Sweden  019   Turkey   020   U S A    022   New Zealand  025   Japan   029   Poland   030   Czech   031   Russia   032   Greece   033   Hungary  034   Indonesia  035   South Korea  038   Malaysia  039   China   045   Thailand  048   South Africa  049   Singapore  050   Universal  051   East Euro  999   Initialize    Specified destinations only        006    ID DISPLAY    1   Number  Numeric ID   2   Chara  Character ID   3   Name  Station Name   4   Dial  Dialing Number     Selects the priority of displaying Printing
226. rameter List   COUNTER 2   On the counter information that is displayed in the  Function Parameter No  61   063    Not Used  067                171       UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200       Function Parameter Table                                                       No  Parameter Selections Function  068  NYSE FAX 1   Off Selects whether the machine will forward the   FORWARD 2 0n incoming and outgoing faxes to a specified station     USA and Note    Canada Only  Once this parameter is activated  Fax Forwarding  via Fax Parameter 054 is automatically disabled   an Access Code of  0000  is automatically  assigned and Fax Parameter 038 has a new setting  added called  NYSE     069  NYSELOCAL 1 7 Inc Selects the printing condition for the incoming faxes   PRINT 2   On  Always  after FAX Forwarding     USA and INC    Prints only if FAX Forwarding fails    Canada Only  ON     Always prints    070  LINE ERROR 128 lines 1  Selects the line disconnect condition during  256 lines reception  If the number of line errors exceed this  512 lines setting  the unit will disconnect the line   1024 line Press the    w        a    keys to select the symbol  2048 lines rate   Off  will not disconnect   2  Selects the transmit condition of RTP PIP or RTN   line  PIN    Available if No 73 Error Detect is set to  LINES     See Note 1   071   TOTAL ERROR 112556 Selects the transmit condition of RTP PIP or RTN   2   10  PIN   3   15   Available if No 73 Error Detect is set to  RATE     4   2096  See 
227. rding Resolution Fax 600 x 600 dpi  3 Recording Paper Size  Paper Tray Letter   Legal For USA and Canada  A4 For EU and Other Destinations       4 Effective Printing Width          LTR  8 1 in  207mm   A4  7 9in  201 mm        Letter   USA and Canada  A4   Other Destinations          19    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200       Items    Description       UF 8200 AU    UF 7200 AU   UF 8300 Others    UF 7300 Others        Remarks       Tray 1   2  Max  1100 sheets                                                                   5 Recording Paper Capacity 550 sheets LTR  A4    20 Ib  75 gim     6 Paper Stack Capacity 300 sheets   7 Collation Stack Yes Face Up   8 Consumable All in One Cartridge   9 Low Toner Warning Yes   Memory  1 Fax Memory  12 MB 3MB ITU T Image No 1  A4  Std   Standard Memory  Flash   720 pages   1 80 pages  Resolution     Optional Memory 32 MB to 2 GB   SD Memory Card   Max  1 020 to 12 750 pages   Refer to 1 1 5     2 Printer Page Memory 32 MB   3 Sort Memory 16 MB   Copy Quality   1 Halftone Yes 256 Level Error Diffusion   2 Resolution 600 x 600 dpi   3 Original Contrast Selection Yes 5 Levels   Lu Eas With Auto Picture   Text  ao  ves Recognition  PC Printing Data No   5 2 Sided Copy Yes 21 Only       Power Supply       99   132 VAC 47   63 Hz    120 VAC 50  60 Hz                   Single phase  1 Power Requirement  180 264 VAC47 63Hz     Loan  240 VAC 50 60 Hz  Single phase  2 Power Consumption  Standby 11W  Transmission 20W  Reception 830W 120 VAC Power Sup
228. ren        OS OG ee    Einmal im Monat die Maschine vom Netz trennen und das Netzkabel auf Folgendes pr  fen  Wenn ein  ungew  hnlicher Zustand vorgefunden wird  wenden Sie sich an Ihren Panasonic Fachh  ndler        Das Netzkabel ist fest in die Steckdose eingesteckt        Der Stecker ist nicht stark erhitzt  verrostet oder verbogen        Stecker und Steckdose sind frei von Staub    9 Das Kabel ist nicht gerissen oder aufgefasert     Bedienungs Schutzma  nahmen  Ber  hren Sie nicht Bereiche  wo diese Vorsichtsaufkleber an der Oberfl  che angebracht sind  da diese sehr  hei   sein k  nnen und zu schweren Verbrennungen f  hren k  nnen     Stellen Sie keine Fl  ssigkeitsbeh  lter wie eine Vase oder Kaffeekanne auf die Maschine  Versch  ttetes  Wasser kann zu Br  nden oder elektrischen Schl  gen f  hren     Legen Sie keine Metallgegenst  nde wie Heft  oder B  roklammern auf die Maschine  Falls Metall  oder brennbare Teile in die  Maschine geraten  k  nnen sie zu Kurzschl  ssen an internen Bauteilen f  hren und Br  nde oder elektrische Schl  ge verursachen     Falls Fremdk  rper  Metall oder Fl  ssigkeiten  in die Maschine geraten  sofort ausschalten und den Stecker abziehen  Den Panasonic   Fachh  ndler anrufen  Bedienung einer durch Fremdk  rper verschmutzten Maschine kann zu Br  nden oder elektrischen Schl  gen f  hren     Niemals die Maschinenabdeckungen   ffnen  die mit Schrauben festgeschraubt sind  wenn nicht spezifisch in  der    Bedienungsanleitung    angegeben  Ein Ho
229. ress the    w        a    keys to select the symbol rate    034  V34 TX SR 2400 3429sr Selects the transmission symbol rate for V 34  3429   3200 3000 2800 2400 sr    Press the     w        a    keys to select the symbol rate    035  V34 RX SR 2400 3429sr Selects receiving symbol rate for V 34  3429 3200   3000 2800 2400 sr    Press the    w        a    keys to select the symbol rate    036  Not Used  037  PROTOCOL 1   Off  not displayed  Selects whether to display the modem speed during  DISDPLAY 2 7 On  displayed  communication    Press the Job Status Key to display   038  Not Used  039  FLASH TIME 5 50 ms Selects the pause interval before activating the Flash  u key   100   1000 ms  040  FLASH TIME 5 50 ms Selects the pause interval before activating the Flash   PSTN    key   100   1000 ms  For Germany  Austria and Czech   041   PAUSE TIME 1   1 sec  Selects the pause interval from 1 sec    10 sec  for    dialing through a switchboard or for international  10   10 sec  calls   042  Not Used  043  REDIAL O   no waiting Selects the redial interval from 0 to 15 minutes in 1  INTERVAL   minute steps           15   15 minutes          170       UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200       Function Parameter Table                                                                No  Parameter Selections Function  044  REDIAL COUNT  0   no redial Selects the redial count from 0 to 15 times in 1 step    intervals   15   15 times Note   In order to comply with the TBR21 requirement for  the EC de
230. ress the    w        a    keys to select the symbol rate    9600 bps Note   TC7200 bps This parameter is applicable only when  TC9600 bps communicating with regular G3 machines  When  12000 bps communicating with Super G3  V 34  machines   14400 bps use Parameter No  32   018  RX START 2400 bps Selects the reception modem start speed  14400   4800 bps 12000 TC9600 TC7200 9600 7200 4800 2400 bps   7200 bps  Press the    w        a    keys to select the symbol rate    9600 bps Note   TC7200 bps This parameter is applicable only when  TC9600 bps communicating with regular G3 machines  When  12000 bps communicating with Super G3  V 34  machines   14400 bps use Parameter No  33   019  ITU T V 34 1   Off Selects whether the ITU T V 34 is Off  On or Select   2  On Select   3   Select Select whether the ITU T V 34 is Off or On  when  entering Phone Book Dialing Numbers or Manual  Number Dialing   020  ITU T ECM 1   Off  Invalid  Select the ECM mode   2   On  Valid  Note   When communicating with V 34  the ECM mode  becomes effective automatically regardless of this  parameter setting   021  EP TONE 1   Off  without EP Tone    Selects whether to add the echo protect tone on V 29  2 7 On  with EP Tone  mode    Used when Echo Suppression is disabled    On   Add  Off   Do not add  022  SIG  INTERVAL  1  100 ms Selects the time interval between the receiving signal  2   200 ms and the transmitting signal   3   500 ms  023  TCF CHECK 1   Normal  Short  Selects the TCF check interval Long S
231. rol Signal  OV  CN601  2nd Feeder  PCB Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function  Pin No   CN601 1 PUSOL CTL1   Pick Up 24V Pick Up Solenoid Control  Solenoid 1 PickUp    Solenoid  ON OV                   97             UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200                                                                                                       2nd Feeder  PCB Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function  Pin No   CN601 2  24V Pick Up DAN  24 VDC Power Supply  Solenoid 2 Slep amp     Shutdown         QV  CN602  Refer to SPC PC Board CN724   CN603  2nd Feeder  PCB Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function  Pin No   CN603 1 LDJAMDOOR   JAM Cover 12V  1 2V   OP Sensor  2nd  3    CN603 2 GND JAM Cover Ground  Sensor  2nd  2  OV  CN603 3 nJAMDOR    JAM Cover ST JAM Cover Sensor  OP Sensor  2nd  1  5V  H    detect Signal  OV  L   CN603 4 LDPNON OP  No Paper Sensor 12V  1 2V   2nd  3    CN603 5 GND No Paper Sensor Ground   2nd  2  OV  CN603 6 nPNON OP   No Paper Sensor No Paper Sensor detect   2nd  1  SV H    Signal  OV  L   CN603 7 LDCCHK OP  Paper Tray detect 412V  1 2V  Sensor  2nd  3    CN603 8 GND Paper Tray detect Ground  Sensor  2nd  2  OV  CN603 9 nCCHK OP  Paper Tray detect va Paper Tray detect Signal  Sensor  2nd  1 TOV  OV  L        98          UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    4 Troubleshooting    4 1  Initial Troubleshooting Flowchart    CSTART gt        Plug the Power Cord  and  turn the Power Switch ON                                               Does
232. rough the ADF   09 11  Not Used   12  1st PAPER TRAY COUNT Total count of paper fed from the 1st paper tray    13  2nd PAPER TRAY COUNT Total count of paper fed from the 2nd paper tray   14 16   Not Used   17  ADF COUNT Total count of originals fed through the ADF    18  ADF READ COUNT Total count of originals scanned through the ADF   19 20   Not Used   21  COPY PRINT COUNT Total count of copies printed    22  COPY SCAN COUNT Total count of copies scanned    23  PC PRINT COUNT Total count printed from PC    24  PC SCAN COUNT Total count scanned to PC    25  FAX TRANSMIT COUNT Total count of Fax transmitted    26  FAX RECEIVE COUNT Total count of Fax received    27  FAX PRINT COUNT Total count of Fax printed   28 29   Not Used   30  A4R LTR COUNT Total count of A4 R   Letter R Print    31  Not Used   32  FLS LG COUNT Total count of FLS   Legal Print    98  SERVICE MODE ID Identification Code for Service Mode    99  ALL COUNTER CLEAR All counters are cleared           162       UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    5 1 7   F8 Mode  Service Adjustment    Set the machine to Service Mode  and press the    8    key   i  Press the  Start  key to enter the F8 Service Mode   i  Enter the desired code number  or press the    w        a    keys   If you wish to select another code number  press the    w        a    keys   i  Press the  Set  key   i  Enter the desired function code number and press the  Set  key   When the    Clear    key is pressed  the selected code input will not be accepted
233. s  5 Deferred Multi Station  Polling Ls  6 Direct Polling Tx No  7 Memory Polling Tx Yes 1 File  8 Preset Polling Password Yes  9 Temporary Polling Password Yes  10 Continuous Polling Yes  Convenience  1 Panel Display Yes  2 Voice Contact No  3 Edit File Mode Yes With View Mode  4 Incomplete File Save Yes With View Mode  5 Automatic Fax Cover Sheet Yes  Copy Features  1 First Copy Time  er 19 sec  25 sec   2 Copy Speed  Letter Approx  19 cpm Paper Feed  1st Paper Tray   Paper Exit  to Exit  A4 Approx  18 cpm Tray  Continuous  Copy Mode   3 Single Copy Yes  4 Multiple Copy Yes  5 Sort Copy Yes  6 Enlargement Yes  7 Reduction Yes  8 Zoom Yes 71    141   Certainty  1 Verification Stamp Yes  2 Header   Total Page Print Yes  SE Journal Yes 200 Transactions   with View  Mode  4 Comm  Journal Yes With Image  5 Last Ind  XMT Journal Yes  6 Power Failure Report No  Printout Lists  1 One Touch List Yes  2 ABBR  No  List Yes  3 Program List Yes  4 Address Book Search List Yes Auto Dialer List  5 Fax Parameter List Yes                   19    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200       Items    Description       UF 8200 AU    UF 7200 AU   UF 8300 Others    UF 7300 Others        Remarks                                                                                                                                                    6 FileList Yes With View Mode  7 Ind  XMT Journal Yes  8 Directory Sheet Yes  Identifications  1 Logo Yes 25 Characters  2 Multiple Logo Yes  3 Character ID Yes 16 Charact
234. s GDI Print only  3 Scanner Function     Network only  TA an  4 Facsimile Function  Mono  Yes  5 Internet Fax Function  Mono  Yes Option  1 1 1  Fax Function  Description  Items UF 8200 AU  UF 7200 AU  Remarks    UF 8300 Others    UF 7300 Others           Main Specifications                      Transmission Speed    1 Compatibility Super G3   G3 ITU T Std  amp  Non Std  2 Modem Speed 33 6   2 4kbps T 30 V 34 V 17 V 29 V 27ter  3 Coding Scheme JBIG MMR MR MH   Conforms to ITU T Rec  T 30  4 ECM Yes ECM  5 Short Protocol Yes  B  D   6    Approx  2 7 sec    ITU T Image No  1   A4  Std Resolution        7 Communication Resolution  dpi x Ipi  pels mm x lines   mm     Transmission  Std    203 x 98  8 x 3 85   Fine  203x 196  8 x 7 7   S Fine   203 x 391  8 x 15 4   406 x 391  16 x 15 4   600dpi   600 x 600 dpi    Reception  Std    203x98  8 x 3 85   Fine  203x 196  8 x 7 7   S Fine   203 x 391  8 x 15 4   406 x 391  16 x 15 4   600dpi   600 x 600 dpi    600 dpi communication is only  possible between T 30  Compliant Panafax  WORKiO   and other T 30 compliant  machines        Communication Ports                                        1 PSTN Line Port s zeg 2nd G3 Option is available    2 LeasedLine Port No   3 V 24 Line Port No   4 LAN  Network  Yes Ethernet 10Base T 100Base TX  5 Centronics Parallel I F No   6 USB Port Yes USB1 1   7  EEE 1394 No Firewire   8 Communication Port  Max  3 Ports   9 Multi Task Operation  Max  5 Jobs             14    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200       I
235. s One Touch numbers from 01 to 80  Program Keys  P1 to P80 common used with the One Touch keys     b  Station name   Name of the station being programmed  15 alpha   numeric characters maximum     c  Station address   email address or telephone number of the station  being programmed    226    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200     d  Routing subaddress   sub address to be used for routing  20 digit  maximum    e  outing id number   TSI to be used for routing  20 digit maximum    f  The End Receiving Station s telephone number is entered after the hash  sign        3   program to  end   Defines the Program Keys stored as a Group Key or POP Access Key to be  set in section  3  between  program to  end block   Edit  Delete or Register the information    a  Program Key  P01   P80  Common used with the One Touch Keys    b  Station name as a POP Key   Some as  d  POP User name    c  POP   The syntax used to set the Program Key as a POP Access Key    d  POP User name   Name of the POP user account  40 alpha numeric  characters maximum    e  POP Password   POP Password  10 alpha numeric characters  maximum    f  Set whether the emails on the POP Server are deleted after retrieving  the emails    g  Station name as a Group Key   Name of the station being programmed   15 alpha numeric characters maximum    h  GROUP   The syntax used to set the Program Key as a Group Key   i  Entry number   One Touch  ABBR  No  or Program Keys to be  programmed001 to 200  indicates ABBR  Nos 001 to 200  200 st
236. s not  while transmitter is waiting for CFR or   programmed    FTT  Possible incompatibility or incorrect  Password   402 XMT B DCN was returned from receiver Receiver working in non ITU mode  while transmitter is waiting for NSF    only   Possible incompatibility   DIS   403 RCV B Transmitter had no polling function    POLLED ON   polling XMT ready  is   Polling  not set at the transmitter   Document to be transmitted is not  placed at the transmitter    404 XMT B Transmitter sent NSS  or DCS  Receiver is defective   Modem   followed by TCF three times  but the   SC PCB or FXB PCB is defective   receiver did not respond   CFR or Receiver disconnects line during first  FTT is usually returned  NSS  or DCS  is transmitted    405 XMT B Transmitter received FTT after it Line quality is poor   TCF is damaged  transmitted TCF at 2400bps  due to line noise    Received RTN after communicating   Receiver is defective   Modem  etc    at 2400 bps  SC PCB or FXB PCB is defective   406 RCV B _ XMT Password mismatched  XMT  RCV password does not match    Password RCV Password mismatched  Last 4 digits of TSI does not match with  Comm   Selective RCV incomplete  the last 4 digits of ONE TOUCH  ABBR  telephone number    407 XMT D    Transmitter received no response Receiver is defective   No paper  paper  after it transmitted post message  jamming  etc    such as EOP  MPS  EOM  etc   or Receiver ceased receiving because of  received DCN  excessive error   Line quality is poor    SC PCB or F
237. s their DIS bit 49  NSF bit 155   has no Sub address function   OFF   581 XMT B Sub address Password transmission  Sub address transmission to a unit that  to a unit that has their DIS bit 50  NSF  has no Sub address function   bit 156  OFF   582 XMT B  Sub address SEP  for Polling  Sub address transmission to a unit that  transmission to a unit that has their   has no Sub address function   DIS bit 47  NSF bit 130  OFF   601 XMT ADF Door was opened during ADF  transmission   623 XMT A   Nooriginal was in the ADF   Built in   Operator removed the original from the             dialer engaged        ADF after dialing was completed   Original was not set properly in the  ADF        138       UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200       Fax Information Codes                                                       Code  Mode   Phase Description of Problem Cause  630   XMT or B Redial count over  No dial tone detected  Sensor dial tone  RCV is not detected   Destination   Polling  dependent   Busy tone is detected   Destination  dependent  T1 timer  35 5 sec    elapsed without a signal from the  receiver   631 XMT A    STOP  button was pressed during  Auto Dialing   634 XMT B Redial count over with no response or   Telephone line cable is disconnected   busy tone was not detected  Wrong number is dialed   Note  SC or FXB PCB is abnormal   U S A  and Canadian models will  redial only once if a busy tone is not  detected   638 XMT LAN  Power turned Off with applicable data   Power switched off   i
238. screen is displayed when the  current firmware code file transfer is finished  and there are remaining firmware code files   Click  OK  when the machine is ready to  receive the next file     Firmware Download Program x     Current firmware file transfer has completed   There are firmware file s  remaining to be transferred   Click  OK  when the machine is ready to receive the next file  Service Mode         Page 12    Local Firmware Update Tool  Parallel USB Port     Unit information of the Firmware Update Mode   For USB Connected Unit  DP 2310 3010 only      Every time the machine finishes receiving a firmware code file the unit deletes and rewrites  the firmware code and will return to Service Mode again  Set the unit back to USB  Firmware Update after the machine returns to Service Mode and continue the firmware  update    When the last firmware code file  PNL  is received  the unit will re boot automatically and return  to standby  The unit doesn t re boot automatically when you select an independent file and the  PNL firmware wasn t transferred  Cycle the power Off On and reset the unit if the firmware code  file transfer is finished and the unit has returned to the Service Mode     For USB Connected Unit  Other models     Every time the machine finishes receiving a firmware code file  the unit deletes and rewrites  the firmware code and will return to USB Firmware Update and continue the firmware  update automatically    When the last firmware code file  AutoBoot  is r
239. stinations  do not select 15 times   045  RING DET  1  1 ring Selects the ring detection count from 1 to 9 rings in 1  COUNT u ring step intervals   9   9 rings  046  ON HOOK TIME  0 0 sec  Selects the on hook time between sequential  e communication calls in 1 second step intervals   90   90 sec   047  RESPONSE 171 sec  Selects the waiting interval for the response after  WAIT   completing the dialing   90   90 sec   20   150 sec    For France Only   048    Not Used  049  050  RING DET  1   Normal Selects the guality of ringer detection  Use if the line  MODE 2   Rough signal is out of regulation  set to  Rough  so that the  unit may detect the ringing signals   051  Not Used  052   PULSE RATE 1   10 pps Selects the dial pulse rate 10 20 pps   2   20 pps  053    Not Used  054  055  BUSY TONE 1   Off Selects whether to detect the Busy Tone   CHECK 2   On  056  DIAL TONE 1   Off Selects whether to detect Dial Tone before dialing the  CHECK 2 0n telephone number   057  DC LOOP 1   Off Selects whether the unit checks the DC Loop during  CHECK 2 0n communication    Except for USA  and Canada   058  COMM JNL   1   Off  without image  Selects whether the machine prints the COMM   IMAGE 2   On  with image  Journal with image   059   Not Used  060   VERSION Indicates the Host  software version   061   TX RX PRT CPY   TX        PRT        Displays the transmitted  received  total printed and  RX  Opener copied document count   062   PRINT 1   Off Selects whether to print in the Fax Pa
240. sy Command  PCB m rp 45V  A Command  CN721 4 ov  CN505 14  nPRDY Engine Control 5V Printer Ready  PCB Printer P  E Read  CN721 3 eady ov  CN505 15  GND Engine Control Ground  PCB  CN721 2 ov  CN505 16  pSAVE Engine Control 7 Power Save Control  PCB  8V   Signal  CN721 1 ov  CN510  oe Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function  CN510 1 AGND G3B PCB Ground  CN363 14  OV  CN510 2 AOUTG3B G3B PCB Line Signal  CN363 13 Line  Signal  CN510 3 nCTONG3B  G3B PCB 5V Ringer Detection Signal  CN363 12 H  OV  CN510 4 nIRQG3B G3B PCB aay G3B Interrupt Request  CN363 11  93V   Signal  OV  CN510 5 GND G3B PCB Ground  CN363 10  OV                   79          UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200                                                                                                                                                             Medion Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function  CN510 6 nOPG3B G3B PCB T G3B Detection Signal  CN363 9 G3B PCB     Detection oV  CN510 7 pG3BRST G3B PCB  T G3B Reset Signal  CN363 8 i  Reset    OV  CN510 8 GND G3B PCB Ground  CN363 7  OV  CN510 9 SCLDO G3B PCB 433V IIC Bus Clock  CN363 6 l  OV  CN510 10  SDAO G3B PCB  TT IIC Bus Data  CN363 5  OV  CN510 11  GND G3B PCB Ground  CN363 4  OV  CN510 12  GND G3B PCB Ground  CN363 3  OV  CN510 13   3 3V G3B PCB 43 3V  3 3 VDC Power Supply  CN363 2  CN510 14   5V G3B PCB 45V  5 VDC Power Supply  CN363 1  CN518  Z  Signal Name Destination Signal Waveform Function  CN518 1 GND SPC PCB Ground  P716 10 
241. sy performing a task          Try again later when the machine is not busy           229    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200       Error Message    Possible Cause   Action                         11   Error    lt Programmed ABBR overwrite   Cannot overwrite existing programmed data  use the  prohibited  Use open ABBR only     Delete  command to erase the existing data first   12   Permission denied     Password is Correct the password and try again   incorrect     13   Permission denied     158 PC Remote   Set the PC Remote Update parameter to  Valid    Dialer Update parameter is set to   Invalid   gt   14 Format Error    lt error line gt  The format of the Entry is incorrect   incomplete or the data  string for each station is not defined within a single line   15   Warning    lt error line gt  The format of the Entry is incorrect or the number of  characters entered  exceed the maximum allowed in the  field  Correct it and try again   16   Warning   Field limit exceeded lt error   The maximum number of Station Name  Domain Name        line gt        Sender Name  Program Name  etc  were exceeded        230       UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    iagram    iagram  tD    ic D  ircui    10 Schemat  General C    10 1     Ircul    Name    ing    UF 8300 8200   General C  UF 7300 7200       Door  Interlock SW    Draw    Ki dO 13539U I b  Eo dO MHODU I   Wi dO uOGWvru I   kh dO 32019   d  G E gt  eh N   ji ONOvZ   S     anoaz    i z 9 QNOvZ   l 6  KSC   soon m  Harum bi  E    ies      UIONNS
242. t   S      He  8   Is the printout in Service Mode 3 Yes       normal  Y  No Check the Scanner mechanism     No  Is the Toner Cartridge operational   Y  Yes    Replace the Toner Cartridge      Y  Are there any foreign particles or Yes  stains on the BTR  Y  No 1  Clean the BTR with a soft  dry cloth   2  Replace the BTR   ra  Y    No  Is the Power Supply Unit normal  i  Yes 1  Check all connectors  and  voltages on the Power Supply Unit   2  Check the Connector  and  voltage on the Power Supply Unit   3  Replace the Power Supply Unit         Are there any foreign particles or Yes  stains blocking the Laser Beam path     No 1  Remove the particles from the  laser beam path  or clean the stains   2  Replace the Laser Unit  LSU    No  Is the SC PCB normal     Yes 1  Check all connectors  and voltages    onthe SC PCB   2  Replace the SC PCB              Y                      Is the SPC PCB normal  Ne Y  Yes 1  Check all connectors  and voltages  on the SPC PCB              2  Replace the SPC PCB        102    4 3 3     Vertical White Lines                      Paper Travel mp          UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200                   Check the Scanner mechanism                                                                                                           Y  1  Remove the particles from the laser  beam path  or clean the stains   2  Replace the Laser Unit  LSU                                       Y  1  Clean the BTR with a soft  dry cloth                    Y  Is the print
243. t Heat  Roller Bushing  1323      22  Remove the Heat Roller  1322      23  Remove the Heat Roller Gear  1320  and the Right  Heat Roller Bushing  1321       24  Remove 3 Screws    25  Remove 2 Thermostats  1303      52    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200   26  Remove 1 Screw    27  Remove the Thermistor  1314       28  Remove 4 Separator Springs  1311     29  Remove 4 Screws     30  Remove 4 Separator Plates  1312     31  Remove 4 Separators  1313       2  Paper Exit Sensor      1  Remove the Exit Sensor PC Board  1802  by  unhooking 2 Latches as illustrated     2  Remove the Connector from the Exit Sensor PC  Board                             53    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    2 3 8  Paper Feed Module     1  Cleaning      1  Open the Right Cover  614     Refer to 2 3 1   3 Control Panel Unit     2  Remove the Toner Cartridge       Registration Roller and Paper Feed Roller     Clean the surface of the Rollers with a soft cloth   saturated with water     Caution   Do not bend the Plastic Sheet      2  Pick Up Roller      1  Remove the Rear Cover  604     Refer to 2 3 1   1 Rear Cover     2  Open the Right Cover  614     Refer to 2 3 1   3 Control Panel Unit     3  Pull the Paper Tray out    Refer to 2 3 1   5 Front Cover Assembly     4  Remove the Toner Cartridge    5  Remove the Snap Ring    6  Remove the Pick Up Roller Clutch  921       7  Remove the Stopper  611  as illustrated    8  Remove 2 Screws    9  Remove the Paper Guide  1120       10  Turn the Pick Up Roller Assembly  
244. tems    Description       UF 8200 AU    UF 7200 AU   UF 8300 Others        UF 7300 Others     Remarks       Communication Protocols       1 PSTN    ITU T G3  1 30                                                                             3 Document Size  Max      8 5 x 14 in  216 x 2000 mm     2 Faxover the Internet ITU T T 37  3 G3 Fax over IP Network ITU T T 37  4 TCP IP Yes  5 DHCP Yes  6 LDAP Yes  7 SMTP Yes  8 POP3 Yes  9 NTLM Yes  10 FTP Yes  11 LPR LPD Yes  12 SNMP Yes  13 MIB2 Yes  Scanner Mechanism  1 Scanning Device CIS  ADF   2 Scanning Resolution  Speed  cid eus XS  GA S 80  LTR  07sec   LTR  14 sec  ed A4  0 8 sec A4  1 5 sec  mm   na 209  ee x77  LTR  14sec   LTR  29 sec  dpi x Ipi  pels mm x lines  A4  15sec   A4  30sec   Excludes  Initializing Time  ADF  mm  slipping factor  and Data XMT  du LE e 1  gt  LTR  57sec   LTR  5 7sec   Time   i x Ipi  pels mm x lines  DCH   E a wa  Letter size for USA and    if   2  Canada  A4 size for Other  CORBIS T90 x TSN n   i se pola   im Destinations   i LTR  2 2 sec LTR  4 4 sec  SURO pI SOR 2300 A4  2 3sec   A4  4 6sec    LTR  8 8 sec LTR  8 8 sec  COUVRE PRAX EN A4  9 3 sec A4  9 3 sec  Legal       4 Effective Scanning Width    LTR   8 3 in  212 mm   AA  8 2in  208 mm      Letter size for USA and  Canada  A4 size for Other  Destinations        Face Up  top feed                               5 ADF Capacity 100 sheets LTR   A4  20 Ib   75 g m    6 Collation Stack Yes Face Up  Printer Mechanism  1 Recording Method LP  2 Reco
245. th Edition  2006 June 26  15th Edition  2007 September 17    Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other  countries    Windows 2000  Windows XP  Windows Server 2003  Windows Vista are trademarks and trade names of  Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries    Copyright    1999   2007 Panasonic Communications Co   Ltd    All rights reserved  Unauthorized copying and distribution is a violation of law     The contents of these Operating Instructions are subject to change without notice     Page 2    Network Firmware Update Tool  LAN     1  General  The Network Firmware Update Tool allows a PC or laptop connected via LAN  TCP IP  to a Panasonic Fax MFP  to quickly program the Firmware Code directly to the memory of the device    1 4 Supported Operating Systems    This application software operation has been confirmed under the following Operating Systems  e Windows   2000  e Windows   XP  e Windows Server   2003  e Windows Vista    1 2 Supported Panasonic Fax MFP Models    e Please refer to the service manual of each model    Page 3    Network Firmware Update Tool  LAN     2  Installation    2 1    2 2    Page A    Installing the Network Firmware Update Tool    1     Start Microsoft Windows    Log on to the computer network from an account with Administrator privileges    Locate and Run the Setup   exe  program for Network Firmware Update Utility in the software  setup disk or folder     Follo
246. the CPU  drives the ADF Roller  Feed Roller and Eject Roller   with the speed based on the density of the picture information    The Feed Roller feeds the document to the scanning point and ejects the document out of the machine     6 1 4  Verification Stamp Unit    The Verification Stamp Unit stamps the  X  mark on the face of the document after the document is  successfully transmitted or stored     6 1 5  Scanner Block    The scanner block consists of the CIS  Contact Image Sensor  Assembly   The in line Lens Array focus the image information and pass it to the CIS   The CIS array converts the image information into the electronic signals     192    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    6 2  Control Panel    The Control Panel consists of the PNL PC Board and LCD Unit  which displays the various status  messages  and a hard key type panel  or a membrane type panel depend on the destinations     6 3  Printer   Receive Mechanism    6 3 1    Component Layout and Paper Path                                              Toner Cartridge                   Feed Roller                   o  Exit Roller    Paper Exit  Sensor                                                                               Registration Sensor                                                                                                                                                    Paper Path Sensor  Fuser Unit Bias Transfer Roller  BTR  Pick Up Roller       193    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    6 3 2  Print Pr
247. ties dialog box        Printing is exceedingly slow          Select the Spool settings  Start printing after first page is spooled   from the Details tab of the Printer Driver Properties dialog box     Select 300 dpi resolution           4 10 3  Error Message Appears on the PC       Error Message    Possible Solution s        Network Print DLL Error       Check if the Panasonic Device is turned    On     and the 10Base T   100Base TX cable is properly connected     Printer Properties may be incorrectly configured   i e  Printer Port        Network Port is Busy       The Panasonic Device may be processing a different print job  please  wait  and try again later     The Panasonic Device is either Transmitting  or Receiving an email        Cannot print because an error  is found in the current printer  setting          Verify  that the paper size  or orientation coincide with the application   and the printer driver settings           150       UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    4 10 4  Error Message Appears on the Unit       Error Message    Possible Solution s        Cannot complete print job   Image memory overflow      There may not be enough Sort Memory available in the Panasonic  Device to complete the print job   Either install an optional Sort Memory  or change the resolution to 300  dpi in the Printer Driver Properties dialog box        Cannot complete print job   Confirm print condition      The print settings may not be matched for the system     Change the printing settin
248. tly installed     Low Toner     Toner Sensor is disconnected     Toner Sensor is defective     Engine PCB connector is disconnected     Engine PCB is defective     No Toner Cartridge     ADF Cover is open     ADF is not installed correctly     ADF Cover Sensor is disconnected     ADF Cover Sensor is defective     LVPS connector is disconnected     LVPS is defective              U07 CLOSE JAM COVER       U13 TONER IS RUNNING LOW  or OUT OF TONER       U16 NO CARTRIDGE  U20 CLOSE ADF COVER                   OO P GO HAA 90POD  PN   WN   gt        4 7 1 1  Low Toner Messages   Operation    The Toner Cartridge Yield is approximately 10 000 pages using Letter or A4 size paper and 5  Black  coverage  however  the maximum yield will not exceed 11 500 pages    The machine controls the printer to maintain good print quality by controlling the Bias Voltage with the Low  Toner Sensor and the Print Counter    There are three Toner warning LCD Displays     130       UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    LCD 1   TONER IS RUNNING LOW  U13   Low Toner sensor detects Low Toner or the machine has printed 11 000 pages   Preparing a new cartridge for replacement is recommended     LCD 2   WARNING TONER LOW LESS THAN 50 PAGES   450 pages have been printed since the LCD 1 appeared   Replacement with the new cartridge is recommended     LCD 3   OUT OF TONER  E13   50 pages have been printed after LCD 2 appeared   Replace with the new cartridge     When replacing with a New Cartridge  refer to the Operating 
249. to the  lt Figure gt       Perform the Service Mode F6 04  Printer Registration  to adjust the gap to be 5 mm      If the gap is less than 5 mm  input a     value  If more than 5 mm  input a     value      Press the    Stop    key first and press the    Function        Clear    keys sequentially to exit the Service  Mode     OD Joo PN      Figure    Two lines are printed on the top  Lead edge    For Letter or A4  place as Portrait     5mm Top  Lead edge          two lines are printed              Two lines are printed    3 6 2  LSU Image Side to Side Adjustment for the Tray    1  Insert Letter or A4 size paper into the 1st tray and change the tray setting to the appropriate paper size   Empty all the remaining trays  including the bypass tray  to disable them     Note   Do not pull out the 1st tray to disable it when adjusting the 2nd tray  The 1st tray is required as it acts  as a paper path for the paper in the 2nd tray     2  Press the    Function        Original Size     and the    3    keys sequentially    3  Input the ID  and press the    Set    key to enter the Service Mode  default ID is 00000000     4  Perform the Service Mode F 1 03  Print Test Pattern 1     5  Check the gap of the print pattern from the paper edge   Refer to the  3 6 1   lt Figure gt      6  Perform the Service Mode F6 10 to F6 12  to adjust the gap to be 5 mm    7  If the gap is less than 5 mm  input a     value  If more than 5 mm  input a     value    8  Press the  Stop  key first and press the  
250. tsschalters der Maschine  Ein Magnet kann die  Maschine versehentlich aktivieren  was zu Verletzungen f  hren kann     Verwenden Sie keine leicht entflammbaren Sprays oder L  sungsmittel in der N  he der Maschine  Dadurch  k  nnen Br  nde verursacht werden     11    Beim Kopieren eines dicken Originals nicht starke Kraft vervenden  um es gegen das Originalauflageglas zu  dr  cken  Das Glas kann brechen und Verletzungen verursachen     Niemals den markierten Bereich in der N  he der Heizwalze ber  hren  Dabei besteht die Gefahr von  Verbrennungen  Wenn ein Blatt Papier um die Heizwalze gewickelt ist  versuchen Sie nicht  es selber zu  entfernen  um Verletzungen oder Verbrennungen zu vermeiden  Schalten Sie das Ger  t sofort aus und  wenden Sie sich an Ihren Panasonic Fachh  ndler     Verwenden Sie kein leitendes Papier  wie z b  Faltpapier  Karbonpapier oder beschichtetes Papier  Wenn ein  Fehleinzug auftritt  kann dies zu Kurzschl  ssen und Br  nden f  hren     Stellen Sie keine schweren Gegenst  nde auf die Maschine  Eine unbalancierte Maschine kann umkippen   oder schwere Gegenst  nde k  nnen herunterfallen  was zu Sch  den und oder Verletzungen f  hren kann     Halten Sie den Raum gut gel  ftet  wenn Sie die Maschine l  ngere Zeit   ber verwenden  um die Ozondichte in  der Luft zu minimieren     Beim Kopieren mit offener Originalauflage Abdeckung nicht direkt in die Belichtungslampe blicken  Direkte  Bestrahlung des Auges kann zu Augenerm  dung oder sogar zu Augensch  den 
251. u2    b  device Panasonic DP XXXX      c   location devloca      d    G end               Your machine s email address      This field is normally not visible when creating new email message s     It is your default email address  email application   for retrieving the  Internet Parameters and for error message notification    Can be programmed with the configuration tool of your email program       To Store data  type    set parameters password       Defines the Sender information to be set in section  2  between  sender  to  end block  Edit  Delete or Register up to 24 User Names and their  Email Addresses for the Sender Selection feature    Separate each data field with a semicolon       If the remaining fields are  to remain blank  insert a semicolon     for each blank field      224    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    The data string for each Sender Selection should be defined within a  single line   The syntax is     Sender Selection Number        User Name       Email  Address     a  01 to 24   Indicates the Sender Selection Numbers   b  User Name  25 characters maximum    c  Email Address  60 characters maximum    3  Qselect domain to  end   Defines the Selectable Domains to be set in section  3  between   select domain to  end block  Register up to 10 alternate Domain  Names that can be selected during manual email addressing   30  characters maximum The syntax is     Number        Domain     4  Qrelay domain to  Qend   Defines the Domain Names to be set in section  4  
252. unction when the document is  stored in memory  see Fax Parameter No 28  STAMP AT  MEM  XMT    005   MEMORY 1 Off Setting the home position for the MEMORY    HOME   2 On  006   DIALING 1 Pulse Selecting the dialing method   METHOD  2 Tone  007   HEADER PRINT   1 Inside Selecting the printing position of the header   2 Outside Inside   3 No print Inside TX copy area   Outside   Outside TX copy area   No print   Header is not printed   008   HEADER  1 Logo  ID No    Selecting the header format   FORMAT 2 From To  009  RCV D TIME  1 Invalid Selecting whether the machine prints the received date  amp   PRINT 2 Valid time  remote ID  percentage of reduction and page  number on the bottom of each received document   010  KEY BUZZER 1 Off Selecting the key touch beep sound   VOLUME   o Soft  3 Loud       199    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200                                                                                                 No  Parameter Setting Setting Comments  Number  012   COMM  1 Off Selecting the home position of printout mode for COMM   JOURNAL 2 Always Journal Off   Always   Inc  only    3 Inc  Only Off   Does not print  Always   Always prints  Inc  Only   Prints only when communication has failed   013 AUTO JRNL 1 Invalid Selecting whether the machine prints the journal  PRINT  2 Valid automatically after every 200 transactions   014   FILE ACCEPT  1 Invalid Selecting whether the machine prints the file acceptance  REP  2 Valid journal   If you set this parameter to
253. ur machine  when  the current Auto Dialer station is overwritten     To erase the entire Auto Dialer data  type the following command in the  Subject  line of your email     227    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200     set abbr password     Where the password is the Remote Password programmed in your     1  To  From    Subject       machine s User Parameters  Retrieve and backup the existing data  onto your PC first by following the procedures for Retrieving and  Editing                     Ni  set abbr 1234567890    lol xl    File Edit view Insert Format Tools Message Help    Be      GS Ar aY 0 M     RBB       To  IFAX      ee rn  Subject   set abbr 1234567890 4 _               command  delete   end         Your machine s email address      This field is normally not visible when creating new email message s     Itis your default email address  email application   for retrieving the Auto dialer data  and for error message notification     Can be programmed with the configuration tool of your email program       To Delete data  type    set abbr password      228    9 4   9 4 1     Error Message    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    Error Message Sent to the Sender    Error messages that are emailed from your machine to the original sender during remote programming of  the Auto Dialer via email        Error Message    Possible Cause   Action       554 Data Transfer Error  broken Header     The header or sub header decoding is being processed  while the message finished  try again        5
254. urnal  Transaction Journal     where the    password    is the Remote Password programmed in your machine s User Parameters     i e  123456789    Make sure that the CC     Bcc    lines and the body of the email message is Blank     Ex  Internet Parameters       2  get parameters 1234567890      lalx     File Edit View Insert Format Tools Message Help      send   X B Ac  e vi  RBB    GA To   Fax u     ice          1                    Subject    get parameters  1234567890              1  To   Your machine s email address   From    This field is normally not visible when creating new email message s  It is your default email  address  email application   for retrieving the Internet Parameters and for error message  notification  Can be programmed with the configuration tool of your email program      Subject   To Retrieve data  type    get parameters password  get abbr password     get jnl password A    Using Email to Retrieve the Journal  The Journal will be sent back to the originating station s email address   After receiving the journal  use a fixed width font  i e  Courier   in order to align the received journal s  contents on the PC     9 1 5  To Edit the Retrieved or Backup Internet Parameters Auto Dialer File    After receiving your machine s email with the Internet Parameters and or Auto Dialer  store the email file as  text   txt  on your PC for backup purposes    To change or update the Internet Parameters and or Auto Dialer  type the following command in the     Su
255. w the instructions on your screen to install the program     A confirmation message is displayed when the installation is completed   When prompted to do so  allow the program to restart your PC     Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool    1     2     Click the Start button on the Taskbar  point to  All  Programs   Panasonic   Panasonic   Network  Firmware Update  then select Network Firmware Update Configuration     The Configuration dialog box appears      Network Firmware Update Configuration FF xi    General   File Selection      General Tab  Note  Please only change the settings if gung Bees  necessa ry 7 IV Pauses at the Version check Log window  IV Pauses at the Displays Firmware Confirmation window  IV Displays at the Destination Confirmaton window  IV Checks the version after each transfer is completed    The maximum waiting time for the machine to boot up 20   Minutes    IV Send at once          Cancel  File Selection Tab Network Firvesr Update Conrouraton    General File Selection    Auto Select Update Mode    Auto Select Update Mode    When you select this mode  the tool acquires  the type of firmware and version from the  device s  ofthe specified address  and  updates the device to the latest version from  the  Local Firmware Folder        However  this mode cannot change the type of Local Fimware Folder  firmware  so you must use the manual mode aso  when changing from the standard firmware to  the option firmware        Cancel    Click  OK  to finish the
256. ware    Standard Firmware  PCL Firmware    PostScript Firmware       5 1d Firmware Code File selection is completed  xi    Click  N ext  gt   Specify the Parent File Folder Independent File that the firmware code file s  are  stored in     Please proceed to Step 6       Select a Parent File Folder  Complete Set   C  Panasonic Panasonic FUPD ata DP 2310_3010_PU_030327  IDP 2310 3010 PCL Firmware  C Select an Independent File    p                            Click Next when you are done           Page 10    Local Firmware Update Tool  Parallel USB Port     5 2 Select an Independent File xi    Specify the Parent File Folder Independent File that the firmware code file s  are  stored in     5 2a Select  Select an Independent File  and click   Browse     button     C Select a Parent File Folder  Complete Set     Ce             dent File    a es  Browse  mij    Click Next when you are done        uL        5 2b Select the Firmware Code File  For example CZ a            SFDL2PNLAAV100000 PU BIN  and click Look in    Sa STOLNI PU      f EF E2    O pen    SFDLZPNLAAY10000_PU BIN    Filename       SFDL2PNLAAV10000 PU BIN  Files of type   Firmware Code Files    bin  D Cancel      5 2c Firmware Code File selection is completed  xi  C   i ck  Next gt     Specify the Parent File Folder Independent File that the firmware code file s  are  stored in     Continue below     C Select a Parent File Folder  Complete Set     p               Select an Independent File    C  Panasonic Panasonic FUP D
257. ware Configuration  This machine is controlled by a Main CPU which is located on the System Control  SC  PC Board and  other sub CPUs on the PCBs  The Firmware of SC PCB and G3 PCB can be updated using a PC or an  SD Memory Card     SC PC Board    Ethernet Port    pc        gt     USB Port  pc        gt     SD Memory Card Port    SD Memory Card   32 MB up to 2 GB        l  1 I  Bere ES CPU    Panel Control Program  1 1   l    Scanner Control Program    Tcu eet     B  SC PC Board Firmware  The 4 MB Program Memory  F ROM  is integrated on the SC PCB   C  G3 PC Board Firmware  The 4 MB Program Memory  F ROM  is integrated on the G3 PCB  The Programs for 2nd Super G3  communication protocol Control is saved on the Board  The Firmware is transferred as Serial Data  from the SC PCB   D  Firmware Updating Ports  Three  3  types of Ports are available for updating the firmware    1  Ethernet LAN Port  The machine s Firmware can be updated using a PC via Local Area Network  LAN     2  USB Port  The machine s Firmware can be updated using a PC via USB Port    3  SD Memory Card  Convenient Method without a PC   The machine s Firmware can be updated using the Master SD Memory Card  The Master SD Memory  Card can be created by copying the Firmware from the Web site using the SD Memory Firmware    62    UF 8300 8200  UF 7300 7200    Writing Tool Software and a PC with SD Memory Card Slot or with an SD Memory Card Reader  amp   Writer    To update the SC PCB and G3 PCB  just one Master SD M
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
KOHLER K-T309-4M-BV Installation Guide    招集のご通知 - IR情報 - 伊藤忠テクノソリューションズ  Samsung Galaxy S6 Benutzerhandbuch  製品安全データシート    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file